Digital PDFs

EK-CMIV7-RM-005

December 1988

452 pages

Original

8.7MB

Document:	Networks Communications Communications Options Minireference Manual Volume 7 Ethernet Devices (Part 3)
Order Number:	EK-CMIV7-RM
Revision:	005
Pages:	452
Original Filename:

OCR Text

EK-CMIV7-RM-005

Networks • Communications

Communications Options
Minireference Manual
Volume 7

Ethernet Devices ( Part 3)

DIGITAL INTERNAL USE ONLY

Digital Equipment Corporation

1st Edition, December 1981
2nd Edition, August 1984
3rd Edition, August 1986
4th Edition, August 1987
5th Edition, August 1988

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.

Printed in U.S.A.

This document was set on a DIGITAL DEeset Integrated Publishing
System.
•

Class A Computing Devices:

Notice: This equipment generates, uses, and may emit radio frequency energy.
The equipment has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A computing device pursuant to SubpartJ of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such radio frequency interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference in which case the user at his own
expense may be required to take measures to correct the interference.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

momODmDlM
DEC
DECmate
DEC set
DECsystem-l0
DECSYSTEM-20

DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL
MASSBUS
PDP

PIOS
Professional
Rainbow

RSTS
RSX
Scholar
ULTRIX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

CONTENTS
Page

DEUNA UNIBUS NETWORK ADAPTOR .............................................. DEUNA-l
General Description ................................................................................... DEUNA-l
Reference Documentation ......................................................................... DEUNA-l
DEUNA Adaptor Component List ........................................................... DEUNA-2
Device Placement ...................................................................................... DEUNA-2
UNIBUS Loading ..................................................................................... DEUNA-2
DEUNA Power Requirements .................................................................. DEUNA-2
Installation Flow Diagram ......................................................................... DEUNA-3
Cabling .................................................................................................... DEUNA-12
Diagnostic Dialogs ................................................................................... DEUNA-18
VAX-ll/DEUNA Diagnostics ............................................................... DEUNA-19
Required Equipment ............................................................................... DEUNA-22
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) ............................................................. DEUNA-22
ROM-Based Self-Test and LEDs ............................................................ DEUNA-26
DEUNA Self-Test LEDs and Codes ...................................................... DEUNA-27
DEUNA Tech Tips/FCO Index ............................................................. DEUNA-29
H4000 ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER .......................................................... H4000-1
General Description ...................................................................................... H4000-1
H4000 Versions ............................................................................................ H4000-1
H4000 Transceiver Components ................................................................... H4000-2
The H4091 and H4092 ............................................................................... H4000-3
Reference Documentation ............................................................................ H4000-3
System Placement ........................................................................................ H4000-3
Device Placement ......................................................................................... H4000-3
Required Equipment .................................................................................... H4000-4
Power Requirements ..................................................................................... H4000-4
Cabling ....................................................................................................... H4000-12
Diagnostics ............................ '" .................................................................. H4000-13
Required Equipment .................................................................................. H4000-14
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) ................................................................ H4000-14
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram .................................................................. H4000-15
H4005 ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER .......................................................... H4005-1
General Description ...................................................................................... H4005-1
H4005 Versions ............................................................................................ H4005-1
H4005 Transceiver Components ................................................................... H4005-1
Reference Documentation ............................................................................ H4005-2
System Placement ........................................................................................ H4005-2
Device Placement ......................................................................................... H4005-2
Required Equipment .................................................................................... H4005-2
Power Requirements ..................................................................................... H4005-2
Installation Flow Diagram ............................................................................ H4005-3
Heartbeat Selection ...................................................................................... H4005-6
Installation Hardware ................................................................................... H4005-7
Cabling ......................................................................................................... H4005-8
Diagnostics ................................................................................................... H4005-9
Required Equipment .................................................................................. H4005-1 0

iii

CONTENTS (Cont)
Page
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) ................................................................ H4005-1O
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram .................................................................. H4005-ll
Testing Configurations ............................................................................... H4005-IS
LAN BRIDGE 100 BRIDGE ................................................................. LAN Bridge-l
General Description ........................ '" .................................................. LAN Bridge-l
Reference Documentation ................................................................... LAN Bridge-l
Configuration ...................................................................................... LAN Bridge-2
Fiber-Optic Cable Between Bridges .................................................... LAN Bridge-S
LAN Traffic Monitor Configurations ................................................. LAN Bridge-6
LAN Traffic Monitor Software ........................ '" ............................... LAN Bridge-8
LAN Traffic Monitor Functions ......................................................... LAN Bridge-9
LAN Bridge 100 Component List ...................................................... LAN Bridge-9
System Placement ............................................................................... LAN Bridge-9
Power Requirements ............................................................................ LAN Bridge-9
Installation Flow Diagram ........................'. ........................................ LAN Bridge-lO
Cabling .............................................................................................. LAN Bridge-20
Diagnostics ........................................................................................ LAN Bridge-21
LAN Bridge 100 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) ........................... LAN Bridge-22
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram ......................................................... LAN Bridge-22
MUXserver 100 REMOTE TERMINAL SERVER .................................. MXSIOO-l
General Description .................................................................................. MXSIOO-l
Product Configuration .............................................................................. MXSIOO-3
Configuration Number 1 .................................................................... MXSIOO-3
Configuration Number 2 .................................................................... MXSIOO-4
MUXserver Versions ................................................................................ MXS 100-5
Reference Documentation ........................................................................ MXSIOO-S
Hardware Components ............................................................................. MXSIOO-S
Software Components ............................................................................... MXSIOO-6
Equipment Placement .............................................................................. MXSIOO-7
Environmental Requirements ................................................................... MXS 100-7
Terminals ................................................................................................. MXSIOO-7
Physical Description ................................................................................. MXSIOO-7
Power Requirements ................................................................................. MXSIOO-7
Installation Flow Diagram ........................................................................ MXSIOO-9
Cabling ................................................................................................... MXSIOO-13
Self-Test Diagnostics .............................................................................. MXSIOO-21
Soft Errors ........................................................................................ MXSIOO-21
Hard Errors ....................................................................................... MXSI00-23
Status and Error Messages Types .......................................................... MXSI00-25
Diagnostic Test Loopback Points ........................................................... MXSI00-26
Identifying Problems with the MUXserver 100 .................................... MXSI00-27
Resetting the MUXserver 100 Unit to Factory Settings ....................... MXS100-32
Setting Up the Network MAP .............................................................. MXSlOO-32
Setting Up Printers ................................................................................ MXS 100-32

CONTENTS (Cont)

Page
TPENET TWISTED-PAIR ETHERNET ADAPTER .............................. TPENET-l
General Description ........................ '" ....................................................... TPENET-l
Product Configuration .............................................................................. TPENET-2
Reference Documentation ........................................................................ TPENET-4
Hardware Components ............................................................................. TPENET-4
Environmental Considerations .................................................................. TPENET-8
Cabling ..................................................................................................... TPENET-9
Twisted-Pair Adapters ............................................................................. TPENET-9
Configuration Guidelines .......................................................................... TPENET-9
Twisted-Pair Cables ............................................................................... TPENET-l 0
MMP Connections ................................................................................. TPENET-l0
MJ/MMJ Connections ........................................................................... TPENET-12
Connectors and Connections ................................................................... TPENET-14
Self-Test Diagnostics .............................................................................. TPENET-19
Maintenance Aids .................................................................................. TPENET-20
Wire Characterization ............................................................................ TPENET-20
Equipment Required ......................................................................... TPENET-20
Wire Characterization Tests ............................................................. TPENET-28
Wire Characterization Worksheet ..................................................... TPENET-28
Tools ....................................................................................................... TPENET-30
CHAPTER 3

CABLES

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.5

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 3-1
CABLES AND CONNECIDRS ............................................................................. 3-1
PROPER SLIDE-LATCH CONFIGURATION .................................................... 3-15
ThinWire Ethernet COAXIAL CABLE TERMINATION ................................... 3-16
Adjusting the Stripper TooL .............................................................................. 3-16
Stripping the Cable ............................................................................................. 3-21
Attaching the Male BNC Connector .................................................................. 3-24
Checking the Cable ............................................................................................. 3-26
INSTALLING MMJ CONNECTORS ON TWISTED-PAIR CABLES ............. 3-27

CHAPTER 4

SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 4-1
BASEBAND TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT ................................................. 4-2
H4090 (-KA and -KB) Transceiver Installation Kit ............................................. 4-2
H4000-TA and H4000-TB Ethernet Transceiver Tester ...................................... 4-4
H4080 Loopback Test Connector ......................................................................... 4-6
Tektronix Type 1503 Time-Domain Reflectometer (TOR) .................................. 4-6
BROADBAND TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT .............................................. 4-7
Blonder Tongue Model SA-7U Variable Attenuator ............................................. 4-7
Wavetek Model 1801 B Sweep Signal Generator .................................................. 4-8
Wavetek SAM III Signal Analysis Meter ............................................................ 4-8

CONTENTS (Coot)

Page

4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
4.7.8
4.7.9
4.7.10
4.7.11
4.7.l2

FIBER-OPTIC TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT ............................................... 4-8
Photodyne Model 5500 Fiber-Optic Time-Domain Reflectometer (FOTDR) ...... 4-9
Tektronix Model OF-150 Fiber-Optic Time-Domain Reflectometer (FOTDR) ...... 4-10
FOTEC Optical Test Set .................................................................................... 4-11
BASEBAND COAXIAL CABLE TOOLS ............................................................ 4-12
DIGITAL 29-24668 Coaxial Cable Stripper. ..................................................... 4-12
DIGITAL 29-24663 Ferrule and Pin Crimper ................................................... 4-13
DIGITAL 29-24667 Coaxial Cable Cutter ........................................................ 4-14
BASEBAND TRANSCEIVER CABLE TOOLS .................................................. 4-15
AMP 91239-7 Cable Ferrule Crimp Tool and Die Set.. .................................... 4-15
AMP 90302-1 D-Connector Pin Crimper .......................................................... 4-16
DECconnect TOOLS AND REPAIR COMPONENTS ........................................ 4-17
H8241 MMP Crimp Tool. .................................................................................. 4-17
H8242 Faceplate Tool Kit .................................................................................. 4-18
Standard Ethernet Cable Cutter ......................................................................... 4-18
Standard Ethernet Cable Stripper ...................................................................... 4-19
Standard Ethernet Cable Crimp Tool and Die SeL ........................................... 4-20
H4090 Transceiver Installation KiL ................................................................... 4-21
Transceiver Cable Ferrule Crimp Tool and Die Set ........................................... 4-21
Transceiver Cable D-Connector Pin Crimp TooL ............................................... 4-22
H4054 Transceiver Cable Straight Connector Kit .............................................. 4-23
H4055 Transceiver Cable Right-Angle Connector Kit ....................................... 4-24
Fiber-Optic Pulling Device ................................................................................. 4-25
Fiber-Optic Swivel .............................................................................................. 4-26

CHAPTER 5

NETWORK TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 5-1
NETWORK INTERCONNECT EXERCISER (NIE) OVERVIEW .................... 5-1
VMS OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................... 5-2
Setting DEC net and VMS Parameters ................................................................. 5-2
DECnet Implications ............................................................................................. 5-3
Loading and Starting NIE .................................................................................... 5-3
PDP-II XXDP+ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................ 5-3
Requirements ......................................................................................................... 5-3
Loading NIE ......................................................................................................... 5-3
Starting the NIE ................................................................................................... 5-4
NIE COMMANDS ................................................................................................... 5-5
ERROR MESSAGES, ............................................................................................. 5-15
TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEMS .................................................................... 5-18
NCP OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 5-22

CONTENTS (Cont)

Page

CHAPTER 6

ETHERNET CONFIGURATION

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.7

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................... 6-1
GENERAL GUIDELINES ...................................................................................... 6-1
STANDARD ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS ................................................. 6-3
Station Attachment to Standard Ethernet LANs ................................................. 6-3
Standalone DELNI Configurations ....................................................................... 6-5
Standalone Cascading DELNI Configurations ...................................................... 6-6
Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segments ......................................................... 6-7
Connecting a DELNI to a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segment ............... 6-8
Multiple-Segment Standard Ethernet Configurations ........................................... 6-9
Thin Wire ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS ...................................................... 6-11
ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segments ...................................................... 6-11
Standalone DEMPR Configurations ................................................................... 6-13
Standalone Cascading DEMPR Configurations .................................................. 6-14
COMBINED STANDARD/ThinWire ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS ....... 6-15
Standalone DELNI/DEMPR Configurations ..................................................... 6-15
Connecting a DEMPR to a Standard Ethernet Segment.. ................................. 6-16
Connecting a DELNI/DEMPR Combination to a Standard Ethernet Segment. ... 6-17
EXTENDED LAN CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................ 6-18
LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) Bridge Configurations ............................................ 6-18
Remote LAN Bridge 100/Repeater Configurations ........................................... 6-20
Vitalink TransLAN Bridges ............................................................................... 6-21
METROWAVE Configuration ............................................................................ 6-22
BROADBAND ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS ............................................ 6-24

vii

QUICK REFERENCE CHECK
Use this quick reference as a resource to identify the major sections in the 7 volumes of the Communications Options
Minireference Manual

VOLUME 1 COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS
Float-Address Vectors
Cables
Test Connectors
Special Test Programs
Special Tools and Equipment
EINCCITT Data
Vendor~odemProduc~

Data Communication Troubleshooting
Communication Devices
DHII
DHB32
DHQll
DHUll
DHVII
D~32
D~Cll
D~32

VOLUME 2 COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS (CONy)
D~Pll
D~Rll
D~Vll
D~Z32

DPVll
DSB32
DSVII
DUPII
DUVII
DZll
DZ32
DZQll
DZVll
K~VINK~VIA-S

VOLUME3

DIGITAL MODEMS (PART I)

EINCCITT Data
Vendor ~odem Products
~odems

DF02/DF03
DFl12
DF124
DF124+
DF126
DF127
DF129
DF212-CA
DF224
DF242-CA
DFAOI
Command Summary

VOLUME 4

DIGITAL MODEMS (PART 2)

Enclosures
DFMDevices
DFM Statistical Multiplexer
DFMX.2S PAD
Test Procedures
Modem Option Dictionary
Modem Theory
Autodialer Command/Response

VOLUME S ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 1)
Ethernet Devices
DEBNNDEBNK
DECmuxII
DECNA
DECOM
DECrouter 200
DECSA
DEC server 100
DEC server 200
DEC server SOO

VOLUME 6

ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 2)

Ethernet Devices (Cont)
DEFTR
DELNI
DELUA
DEMPR
DEMWA
DEPCA
DEQNA
DEREP
DESNC
DESPR
DESTA

VOLUME 7

ETHERNET DEVICES (PART 3)

Ethernet Devices (Cont)
DE UNA
H4000
H400S
LAN Bridge 100
MUXserver 100
TPENET
Cables
Special Tools and Test Equipment
Network Troubleshooting
Ethernet Configuration

DEUNA INSTALLATION

DEUNA UNIBUS NETWORK ADAPTOR
General Description
The DEUNA adaptor is a data communications controller used to interface VAX-II and PDP-II family
computers to the Ethernet local area network. The DEUNA adaptor complies with the "Ethernet
Specification" and (using the Ethernet shielded coaxial cable) allows communication with up to 1024
addressable devices.
The DEUNA adaptor physically and electrically connects to the Ethernet coaxial cable via the DIGITAL
H4000 transceiver and an appropriate transceiver cable.
Features of the DEUNA adaptor include the following.
•

10M bits/s transmission and reception

•

Transmit and receive data link management

•

Data encapsulation and decapsulation

•

Data encoding and decoding

•

Down-line loading and remote load detect capabilities

•

Internal ROM-based microdiagnostics to facilitate diagnosis and maintenance to both the
DEUNA adaptor and the DIGITAL H4000 transceiver

•

Collision detection and automatic retransmission

•

32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error detection

•

32K byte (16K word) buffer for continuous datagram reception, transmission, and maintenance
requirements

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DEUNA adaptor.

•
•
•
•
•

DEUNA Technical Manual
DEUNA User's Guide
H4000 Technical Manual
H4000 Installation Guide
H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet
Transceiver with Removable Tap
Assembly Installation Card

•
•

DE UNA Print Set
DEUNA Microfiche

EK-DEUNA-TM
EK-DEUNA-UG
EK-H4000-TM
EK-H4000-IN
EK-H4TAP-IN
MP01378
EP-DEUNA-TM

DEUNA-I

DEUNA INSTALLATION

DEUNA Adaptor Component List

The following table provides a list of the parts supplied with each DEUNA adaptor.
Table 1

DEUNA Parts List

Part

Part Designation

DEUNA port module
DEUNA link module
Module interconnect cable
Bulkhead cable assembly
Bulkhead interconnect panel assembly
DEUNA User's Guide

M7792
M7793
BC08R-l (2)
70-18798-**
70-18799-00
EK-DEUNA-UG

Device Placement

The DEUNA adaptor requires two hex-height small peripheral controller (SPC) backplane slots (preferably two adjacent slots). Any SPC backplane [DD1I-B (REV E) or later] can accept the DEUNA adaptor
modules.
To prevent adverse bus latency, the DE UNA adaptor should be placed on the UNIBUS conductor before
all devices that have a lower NPR rate and before all UNIBUS repeaters.
UNIBUS Loading

The M7792 and M7793 modules that make up the DEUNA adaptor have the following UNIBUS loads.
•
•

1 dc load
4 ac loads

DEUNA Power Requirements

The DEUNA adaptor power requirements are shown in the following table.
Table 2

DEUNA Power Chart

Module

Voltage Rating
(Approximate
Values)

Maximum
Voltage

Minimum
Voltage

Backplane
Pin

M7792

+5 V @ 7.0 A*

+5.25 V

+4.75 V

CA2

M7793

+5 V @ 9.0 A*
-15V@1.0A

+5.25 V
-15.75 V

+4.75 V
-14.25 V

CA2
FB2

*Refer to Tech Tip # DEUNA-TT-1

DEUNA-2

DEUNA INSTALLATION

Installation Flow Diagram

OBTAIN CUSTOMER
SPECIFIC INFORMATION:
• DEVICE PLACEMENT
• UNIBUS LOADING
• POWER REQUIREMENTS
• DEVICE ADDRESS
(774510)
• VECTOR ADDRESS (120)

PREINSTALLATION
CONSIDERATIONS

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED
(REFER TO TABLE 1)

1. TURN POWER ON.
2. MEASURE BACKPLANE
VOLTAGES (REFER TO
TABLE 2).

VERIFY SELECTED SPC
BACKPLANE VOLTAGES

3. TURN POWER OFF.

REMOVE GRANT
CONTINUITY MODULES
IF NECESSARY

REMOVE NPG (CA 1-CB 1)
WIRE FROM SPC BACKPLANE SLOT FOR PORT
MODULE (M7792)

PERFORM RESISTANCE
CHECKS ON BACKPLANE

MKV84-0756

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 5)

DEUNA-3

DEUNA INSTALLATION

CONFIGURE M7792 PORT
MODULE FOR CUSTOMER
REQUIREMENTS
(REFER TO FIGURES 2
AND 3)

-{:

DEVICE ADDRESS
VECTOR ADDRESS
BOOTSTRAP OPTION
(FOR PDP-11 SYSTEMS
ONLY)
LOOP ON TEST

PLUG BCOBR-1 CABLES
INTO J1 AND J2 ON THE
M7792 PORT MODULE
(REFER TO FIGURE 4)

INSTALL M7792 PORT
MODULE

SLIDE M7793 LINK
MODULE INTO GUIDES
BUT DO NOT INSERT
FULLY

CONNECT BCOBR-1
CABLES (FROM M7792
MODULE) TO Jl AND J2
OF THE M7793 MODULE
(REFER TO FIGURE 4)

MKV84-0757

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 5)

DEUNA-4

DEUNA INSTALLATION

CONNECT THE BULKHEAD
CABLE ASSEMBLY TO J3
ON THE M7793 LINK
MODULE
(REFER TO FIGURE 4)

COMPLETELY INSERT THE
M7793 LINK MODULE
INTO THE BACKPLANE.

INSTALL THE BULKHEAD
INTERCONNECT PANEL
ASSEMBLY (REFER TO
FIGURE 6)

REMOVE I/O PANEL
FROM BULKHEAD
BRACKET AND INSTALL
PANEL IN I/O BULKHEAD
(REFER TO FIGURE 7)

CONNECT BULKHEAD
CABLE ASSEMBLY
(70-18798-00) TO BULKHEAD PANEL

MKVB4-0758

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 5)

DEUNA-5

DEUNA INSTALLATION

PERFORM RESISTANCE
CHECKS ON BACKPLANE
• TURN POWER ON
• CHECK LED ON
BULKHEAD PANEL. IT
SHOULD BE ON
• VERIFY THAT THE
CIRCUIT BREAKER ON
BULKHEAD IS CLOSED

CONNECTTHE DEUNA
ADAPTOR TO ANY OF
THE FOLLOWING DEVICES:
• H4080 LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
• AN INSTALLED H4000
TRANSCEIVER
• A DELNI UNIT

{

1. TURN POWER ON
2. COMPARE LEDS
(DURING POWER UP
SELF-TEST) WITH
THOSE IN TABLE 4

MKV84-0759

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 5)

DEUNA-6

DEUNA INSTALLATION

CHECK SWITCH SETTINGS,
BOARD SEATING, CABLE
AND TEST CONNECTOR
CONNECTIONS

{

INITIATE CUSTOMER
ACCEPTANCE

. TURN POWER ON
2. COMPARE LEOS
(DURING POWER UP
SELF-TEST) WITH
THOSE IN TABLE 4

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW DIAGRAM

MKV84-0760

Figure 1 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 5 of 5)

DEUNA-7

DEUNA INSTALLATION

SELF-TEST
STATUS
LEDs

CABLE
VERIFY
LED

MODULE
INTERCONNECT
CABLE JACKS

E40

100000018001

THIS SWITCH PACK
(E-62) CONFIGURATION
APPLIES TO M7792
MODULE ETCH REVISION
B ONLY.

SWITCH PACK E40
SWITCH OFF (OPEN) = LOGICAL 1

SWITCH PACK E62
SWITCH OFF (OPEN) = LOGICAL 1
V3 - - - - - - - - - - - - VB

A3-----------------------A12

DEVICE ADDRESS
SELECTION
BOOT OPTION SEL 1

THIS SWITCHPACK
(E-62) CONFIGURATION
APPLIES TO M7792
MODULE ETCH REVISION
CONLY.

SWITCH PACK E62
SWITCH OFF (OPEN) = LOGICAL 1
V2 - - - - - - - - - - - - VB

VECTOR ADDRESS
SELECTION

BOOT SELO
BOOT SEL 1

MKV84·0761

Figure 2 M7792 Switchpacks and Jumpers (Sheet 1 of 2)

DEUNA-8

DEUNA INSTALLATION
NORMAL SETUP DEVICE ADDRESS (774510)
M7792 - E40
Sl

SIO

OFF

NORMAL SETUP VECTOR ADDRESS (120)
M7792-E62
Sl

OFF

Boot Option Selection

SEL 1

SELO

Function

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON
ON
OFF
OFF

Remote boot disabled t
Remote boot with system load
Remote boot with ROM
Remote boot with power-up
boot and system load

* For M7792 Etch Rev B modules, SEL 0 = S8 / SEL 1 = S7
For M7792 Etch Rev C modules, SEL 0 = S9 / SEL 1 = S8
t Switch setting for a DE UNA adapter installed in a VAX-ll system.

NOTE:
DEUNA boot ROM (23-E22A9-00) for M93l2. New DEUNA boot
ROMs (23-E32A9 and 23-E33A9).
Self-Test Loop Switch *

-l(.

Switch
Position

Function

ON (closed)
OFF (open)

Disabled
Enabled

M7792 E62 S9 forEtch rev B modules
M7792 E62 SIO forEtch rev C modules
MKV86·0550

Figure 2 M7792 Switchpacks and Jumpers (Sheet 2 of 2)

DEUNA-9

DE UNA INSTALLATION

FLOATING ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
MSB
FOR ETCH REV B
AND C MODULES

LSB

SWITCH
NUMBER

SWITCHPACK E40
I
I

I
I
I

S10

I
I

I
I
S4

OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF

I
I

FLOATING
ADDRESS
760010
760020
760030
760040
760050
760060
760070
760100

---

OFF

760200

OFF OFF

760300

---

OFF
OFF

--760400

OFF

OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

----760600
--760700
--760500

OFF
OFF

761000
--762000

OFF OFF

763000

-----

OFF

764000

NOTE: SWITCH OFF (OPEN) RESPONDS TO LOGICAL ONE ON THE UNIBUS.
MKV84-0763

Figure 3

Address and Vector Switch Assignments (Sheet 1 of 2)

DEUNA-IO

DEUNA INSTALLATION
FLOATING VECTOR ASSIGNMENT
LSB

MSB
FOR ETCH REV B
MODULES

81716151413

SWITCHPACK E62

SWITCH
NUMBER

FLOATING
VECTOR

300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
400

OFF OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF

---

OFF

500

OFF

---

OFF OFF

600

OFF OFF OFF

700

---

NOTE: SWITCH OFF (OPEN) PRODUCES LOGICAL ONE ON THE UNIBUS_

FOR ETCH REV
C MODULES

SWITCHPACK E62

I
SWITCH
NUMBER

I
S7

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

I
S3

OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

I
S2

OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

OFF

FLOATING
VECTOR
300
304
310
314
320
324
330
334
340
344
350
354
360
364
370
374
400

--OFF

OFF

500

--OFF OFF

600

--OFF OFF OFF

700

--MKV84-0764

Figure 3 Address and Vector Switch Assignments (Sheet 2 of 2)
DEUNA-ll

DEUNA CABLING

Cabling
This section contains cabling diagrams for DEUNA adaptor configurations.
BULKHEAD
INTERCONNECT
PANEL ASSEMBLY

TO DEUNA BULKHEAD ASSY
LINK MODULE
(M7793)
PORT MODULE
(M7792)

D-CONNECTOR

NOTE:

REMOVE THE NPR JUMPER (CAl TO CB1) BEFORE
THE PORT MODULE (M7792) IS INSTALLED_ THIS
JUMPER MUST BE INSTALLED IF THEDEUNA
ADAPTOR IS REMOVED FROM THE SYSTEM.

THE ORDER OF MODULE INSTALLATION IN THE
BACKPLANE IS NOT FIXED_

POWER: +5 Vdc @ 16 A
-15 Vdc @ 1 A
MKVB4-0765

Figure 4

DEUNA Cabling Diagram

DEUNA-12

DEUNA CABLING

-15 V
CIRCUIT
BREAKER

BULKHEAD
PANEL

CAPTIVE
SCREW
(1 OF 4)
MKV84-0766

Figure 5

Bulkhead Interconnect I/O Panel Assembly

DEUNA-13

DEUNA CABLING

CAB UPRIGHT .............

FROM
TRANSCE I VE R

CAUTION
THE BACK OF THE BULKHEAD PANEL CONTAINS A CIRCUIT
BOARD THAT CARRIES -15 V. BE SURE THIS CIRCUITRY DOES
NOT TOUCH ANYTHING THAT COULD CAUSE A SHORT
CIRCUIT ON POWER-UP.
MKV84-0767

Figure 6

Bulkhead Interconnect Panel Assembly Installation

DEUNA-14

DEUNA CABLING

TO LINK MODULE (M7993)

FROM TRANSCEIVER

CAUTION
THE BACK OF THE BULKHEAD PANEL CONTAINS A CIRCUIT
BOARDTHATCARRIES-15 V. BE SURE THIS CIRCUITRY DOES
NOT TOUCH ANYTHING THAT COULD CAUSE A SHORT
CIRCUIT ON POWER-UP.
MKV84·0768

Figure 7 Typical System Cabinet Bulkhead Installation

DEUNA-15

DEUNA DIAGNOSTICS
Table 3 DEUNA Diagnostics for VAX-ll and PDP-ll Systems
Diagnostic
Function

Diagnostic Name

PDP-ll
Systems

VAX-ll
Systems

Self-test

ROM-based self-test

N/A

Off-line test

Repair level diagnostic

CZUAA*

EVDWA*.*

Functional test

Functional diagnostic

CZUAB*

EVDWB*.*

System exerciser
(PDP-II only)

DEC/XII DEUNA module

CXUAC*

N/A

Network exerciser

Network interconnect
exerciser

CZUAC*

EVDWC*.*

DEUNA-16

DEUNA DIAGNOSTICS
Table 4 DEUNA LED Check Indications
Location

LED #

Indication

M7792 module

Verifies, when lit (ON), that the two module interconnect cables
are properly connected to J 1 and J2 on both the port and link
modules.

M7792 module

D2 - D7

Provides a visual indication of the current status of the ROMbased self-test microdiagnostics. All LEDs are lit (ON) following
successful completion of the self-test (see Notes 1 and 2).

Bulkhead panel

Indicates that -15 V transceiver power is available at the bulkhead connector J2. This verifies that:

The bulkhead cable assembly is properly connected at both
ends, and

The bulkhead interconnect panel circuit breaker is properly
set.

NOTES
The self-test microdiagnostic program is initiated each time the DEUNA adaptor is powered
up, and takes about 10 seconds to run. During
this period, these LEDs blink rapidly as the
various functions of the DEUNA adaptor are
tested.
Whenever the DEUNA protocol enters the
RUN state under system software, LED D7
blinks ON and OFF at a one second rate
(approximate). For more information on the
self-test diagnostics, refer to the following section on DEUNA Maintenance Aids or the
DEUNA Technical Manual.

DEUNA-I7

DEUNA DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic Dialogs
Table 5 Typical PDP-lljDEUNA (CZUAA*) Diagnostic Dialog
PROMPT DR> The operator must respond by typing one or more commands;
for example, STAjPASS:NNNNjTEST:NNNN
Description

Dialog
R CZUAAB
DRS LOADED
DIAG. RUN-TIME SERVICES REV. D APR-79
CZUAA-B-O DEUNA REPAIR DIAGNOSTIC
UNIT IS DEUNA
DR>START
CHANGE HW (L) ? YES

The program asks if any logical
hardware changes are required.

# UNITS (D) ? 1

The number of units on the system
to be tested.

UNIT 0

Designates unit to be tested.

WHAT IS THE PCSRO ADDRESS? (0) ? 174510

Enter appropriate octal values.

WHAT IS THE VECTOR ADDRESS? (O)? 120
ETHERNET DEFAULT ADDRESS
(HEX): AA-00-03-12-0A-E3

The ROM-based address is
displayed.

ROM MICROCODE VERSION (DECIMAL): 5
SWITCHPACK SET FOR:

Displays hardware switch settings.

SELF-TEST LOOP DISABLED
REMOTE BOOT ENABLED
End of first pass.
Number of errors.

CZUAA EOP 1
o CUMULATIVE ERRORSAC

DEUNA-18

DEUNA DIAGNOSTICS
VAX-ll/DEUNA Diagnostics
The VAX-II diagnostics run under a diagnostic supervisor. In the example (Table 6), the diagnostic
supervisor prompt = DS>.
The following software revision levels are required to run VAX-ll/DEUNA diagnostics.
•
•

VMS revision 3.4 or later
Diagnostic supervisor revision 6.9 or later
NOTE
The DEUNA functional diagnostic (EVDWB*. *),
will not run unless both the line and circuit to be
tested are set to OFF. System manager privileges
are required to perform this operation.

The following SYSTEM and PROCESS parameters are required to run the VAX-ll/DEUNA functional
diagnostic.
SYSTEM MAXBUF = 1600
PROCESS BYTLM = 30000
To change BYTLM parameter:
$ SET DEF SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSEXE]
$ RUN AUTHORIZE
UAF> MODIFY <USER ACCN'T NAME>/BYTLM = 30000
UAF> EXIT
$ LOGOUT (USER MUST LOGOUT TO WRITE BYTLM QUOTA)
To change the SYSGEN MAXBUF parameter:
$ MCR SYSGEN
SYSGEN> SET MAXBUF 1600
SYSGEN> WRITE ACTIVE
SYSGEN> EXIT

DEUNA-19

DEUNA DIAGNOSTICS
The following table describes the process used to run VAX-ll/DEUNA diagnostics.
Table 6 Typical VAX-ll/DEUNA Diagnostic Operation
Command Function

Example

ATTACH the UNIBUS interface
(UBA or UBI) to the system
bus.

DS> ATT DW750 HUB DWO

ATTACH the device to the
system.

DS> ATTACH UNAll DWO XEAO

Enter CSR/VECTOR/BR.

CSR? 774510 120 5

LOAD appropriate diagnostic.

DS> LOAD EVDWB

SELECT devices that have
been attached to the system.

DS> SEL ALL (or) SEL XEAO

Optional (if printout
is desired).

DS> SET TRACE

Run the test.

DS> START

DEUNA-20

DEUNA DIAGNOSTICS
The following figure shows a typical VAX-ll/DEUNA diagnostic printout.

*******************************************************

Test 1: READ INTERNAL ROM
Test 2: READ/WRITE INTERNAL WCS
Test 3t INTERNAL LINK ADDRESS TEST
Test 4: READ/WRI1E INTERNAL LINK MEMORY
Test 5t TRANSMIT CRe TEST
Test 6: RECEIVE CRC TEST
Test, 7 t PIWMISCUOUS A1H1RESS TEST
Test B: ENABLE ALL MULTICAST TEST
Test 9t STATION TEST
Test 10: PAD RUNT TEST
Test lol t NO RECEIVE BUFFERS AW'IILABLE
Te!;t, 12: UNA SlRESS TEST
UNA11 COUNTER SlHlMARY - INTERNAl. LOOPBM~K
SECONDS SINCE l.AST ZEROED
1
PACKETS RECEIVED
0
MULTICAST PACKETS RECEIVED
0
PACKETS RECEIVED IN ERROR
21
BYTES RECEIVED
0
MUl.TICAST BYTES RECEIVED
0
RCVS LOST - LOCAL BUF ERROR
0
LOCAL BUFFER ERRORS
0
PACKETS TRANSMITTED
21
MULTICAST PACKETS TRANSMITTED
0
PKTS XMITTED WITH 1 COLLISION
0
PKTS XMITTED MITH > 1. COLLISION
0
PKTS XMITTED ~UT DEFERRED
: 0
BYTES TRANSMITTED
t14532
MUl.TICAST BYTES TRANSMITTED : 0
TRANSMIT PACKETS ABORTED
t 0
XMIT COLLISION CHECK FAILURE
21
UNRECOGNIZED FRAME DESTINATION
0
SYSTEM BUFFER ERROR
: 0
USER BUFFER ERROR
: 0

~IODE

ETHERNET DEFAULT ADDRESS (HEX) AA-OO-03-01-0C-70
ROM MICROCODE VERSION (DECIMAL): 5
SWITCH PACK SET FOR :
NO REMOTE BOOT ENABLED
SELF TEST LOOP DISABLED
•• End of run, 0 errors detected, pass count in 1,
time is l1-APR-1984 Oa:49:22.22

DS> EXIT
$
MKV84-0773

Figure 8

Typical VAX-ll Functional Diagnostic Printout

DEUNA-21

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Required Equipment
There is no special equipment required for maintaining the DEUNA adaptor. However, the H4080
loopback test transceiver may be helpful in isolating some faults.
Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
The following items are FRUs for the DEUNA adaptor.
•
•
•
•
•

M7792
M7793
BC08R-1
70-18798-**
70-18799-00

DEUNA port module
DEUNA link module
Module interconnect cable
Bulkhead cable assembly
Bulkhead interconnect panel assembly

DEUNA-22

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

RUN REPAIR
DIAGNOSTIC

RECONNECT HARDWARE
TO NETWORK IF
NECESSARY

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES

MKV84-0769

Figure 9 DEUNA Troubleshooting Flow
Diagram (Sheet 1 of 3)

DEUNA-23

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

RECONNECT HARDWARE
TO NETWORK IF
NECESSARY

REFER PROBLEM TO
NETWORK SUPPORT

* REFERS TO PREVIOUSLY RUN DIAGNOSTIC
t

DID THE SYMPTON CHANGE? IF SO, THEN A NEW OR ADDITIONAL PROBLEM
MAY EXIST. REPLACE THE ORIGINAL MODULE TO SEE IF THE ORIGINAL
SYMPTOMS RETURN. THIS NEW INFORMATION MAYBE USEFULINANALYZING
THE PROBLEM.
MKV84-0770

Figure 9

DEUNA Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

DEUNA-24

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

REFER PROBLEM TO
NETWORK SUPPORT

IN INSTALLATION
FLOW DIAGRAM
MKV84-0771

Figure 9

DEUNA Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

DEUNA-25

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
ROM-Based Self-Test and LEDs
The ROM-based self-test is initiated in two ways.
1.

On power up

On issuing the following self-test port command to the low byte of PCSRO:
a.

Perform a device reset by setting bit 5 of PCSRO,

Verify that the DNI bit (PCSRO - bit 11) is set,

Issue self-test port command by setting bits 0 and 1 in the low byte of PCSRO,

Verify that the DNI bit (PCSRO - bit 11) is set, and

Observe the self-test results (they should be displayed by LEDs on the port module.

The following is a typical example of a self-test port command.
RSET = PCSRO <05>
DNI = PCSRO <11>
LOOPl:

LOOP2:

MOYB #RSET, @# PCSRO
BIT #DNI, @# PCSRO
BEQ LOOPI

;device reset
;test for reset complete

MOYB #3, @# PCSRO
BIT #DNI, @# PCSRO
BEQ LOOP2
HALT

;self-test port command
;test for self-test complete
;self-test results appear
;in port LEDs

DEUNA-26

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DEUNA Self-Test LEDs and Codes
The following figure shows the location of the OEUNA self-test LEDs.
The accompanying table describes the self-test LEO octal codes. In the table, ON represents a logical
ONE (1); OFF represents a logical ZERO (0). For the purpose of this table, all LEOs are assumed to be
OFF unless otherwise noted.

SELF-TEST CODE
REFER TO TABLE 7

Ie e

__--------------------~Jl,--------------------__

@I@ @) @!e-CABLEVERIFY

M7792

0000000

C-J
J2

---.J

C,...--;

MKV84·0772

Figure 10

OEUNA Port Module Self-Test LEOs

OEUNA-27

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 7 DEUNA Self-Test LED Codes
LED
Code D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2
(Octal)
77
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10

11
12
13
20

ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON ON

40
41
42
43
44
45

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

50
51
52
53
54
55
60
61
62
63
64
65
66

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON ON

ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON ON

70
71
72

73
74
7S
76
77

ON
ON
ON ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON ON

Test Name

(Module)

Never Got Started
CPU Instruction
ROM
Writeable Control Store
TIl UNIBUS Address Register
Receiver UNIBUS DMA
PCSRI Lower Byte & TIl DMA Read
PCSRO Upper Byte & TIl DMA Write
PCSRO Lower Byte & Link Mem. DMA
PCSR2 & PCSR3
Timer
Physical Address ROM
Link Memory
Local Loopback
Bugcheck (NI & UNIBUS in
HALTED STATE) - Internal
Transmit Buffer Resource
Allocation Error on Boot
Transmitter Timeout
Receiver Timeout
Buffer Comparison
Byte Count
Receiver Status
CRC Error
Match Bit Error
TDRError
Transmitter Buffer Address
Transmitter Timeout
Receiver Timeout
Buffer Comparison
Byte Count
Receiver Status
CRC Error
Receiver Buffer Address
Transmitter Timeout
Receiver Timeout
Buffer Comparison
Byte Count
Receiver Status
CRC Error
Runt Packet
Minnimum Packet Size
Maximum Packet Size
Oversize Packet
CRC
Collision
Heartbeat
Half Duplex
Multicast
Address Recognition
Extemal Loopback
Internal Transmit Buffer
Resource Allocation
Link Memory Parity Error
Internal Unexpected Interrupt
Internal Register Error
Self Test Done, No Errors
(State = 2, DNI set)

M7792/M7793
M7792
M7792
M7792
M7792
M7792
M7792/UNIBUS
M7792
M7792
M7792
M7792
M7792
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793

M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M7793
M77931H4000
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793
M7792/M7793

NOTE
During the self-test, the LEDs should be observed
counting from 1-77 octal.
MKV85-1227

DEUNA-28

DEUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DEUNA Tech Tips/FCO Index
The following table lists Tech Tips and FCOs that pertain to the DEUNA UNIBUS network adaptor.
Space is provided for adding new information.
Table 8

DEUNA Tech Tip Index

Tech
Tip No.

Title

Speed
Bulletin

DEUNA-TT-l

Revised DC Power Requirements

313

DEUNA-TT-2

DEUNA Switch pack E-62

313

DEUNA-29

DTQNA INSTALLATION

DTQNA TOKEN-BUS TO Q-BUS NETWORK ADAPTER
General Description

The DIGITAL Token-Bus to Q-Bus Network Adapter (DTQNA) is a communications processor and 10
Mbits/s broadband modem that along with the DEC/MAP software, allows a MicroVAX II to communicate
with other nodes on an IEEE 802.4 broadband token-bus network.
The DTQNA is implemented as two quad-height, Q-Bus modules. The M7130 controller module is installed
into the MicroVAX II system backplane and the M7131 modem module is installed in either the system
backplane or an external NEMA-12 enclosure (optional). See Figure 1.
The DTQNA can be installed in MicroVAX II BA23A, BA123, and H9642 systems; and in BA213,
BA214, BA215, and BA220 systems (collectively referred to in this document as BA2XX).

r M'icr;VAXCABINET- -

~,....______.....______~Q~-B~U=S~______~____~:>

.---u-----u.--'_-u---,SIG NA LS + pow E R

I . .·----=----..---POWE R ON LY

r-o=--r--'\.J"::::"L.I--'

GRANT CONTINUITY
CARDS FOR BA23A,
BA123, AND H9642

CONTROLLER
I
I
I
I
I1_ _ _ _ _ -

TO LAN

LOCAL MODEM OPTION

CONTROLLER

I
I

L___I__ 1____:

0t..====================.J

+12 V

REMOTE MODEM OPTION
MKV88·1892

Figure 1

DTQNA Hardware Configuration

DTQNA-l

DTQNA INSTALLATION
DTQNA Features
Features of the DTQNA adapter include the following.
•

Eight maintenance LEDs

•

Power-up diagnostics

•

Nonvolatile memory for power-outage data and set-up protection

•

RAM to support diagnostic and operational software

•

Q-Bus resident system configuration/boot ROM

•

DECnet support at the data link layer interface

•

ROM-based firmware for cold start

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the DTQNA adapter.

•
•
•
•
•

DTQNA Technical Manual

EK-DTQNA-TM

DTQNA Installation and Maintenance Manual

AA-LE97 A-TE

VAX DEC/MAP Introduction

AA-HM33A-TE

VAX DEC/MAP Network Manager's Guide

AA-HM3IA-TE

VAX DEC/MAP Software Installation Guide

AA-HM34A-TE

DTQNA Configuration Options
The DTQNA is available in installation kits for the four configurations listed below. Table I lists the
hardware components for each configuration.
•

DTQNA-BA

- The controller and modem modules mount in the internal MicroVAX II
BA23A, BAI23, H9642, and BA2XX systems.

•

DTQNA-BB

- The controller module mounts in the internal MicroVAX II BA23A system,
and the modem module mounts in the external NEMA-I2 enclosure.

•

DTQNA-BC

- The controller module mounts in the internal MicroVAX II BA2XX system,
and the modem module mounts in the external NEMA-12 enclosure.

•

DTQNA-BE

- The controller module mounts in the internal MicroVAX II BAI23 and H9642
systems, and the modem module mounts in the external NEMA-12 enclosure.

DTQNA-2

DTQNA INSTALLATION

Table 1 Installation Kit Components
DTQNA-BA

Configuration
DTQNA-BB,-BE

DTQNA-BC

M7130 Controller

M7131 Modem

RF Patch Panel
12-26731-01

Internal Ribbon Cable
17-01404-01

Grant Continuity Card (2)
M9048

RF Patch Cable
17-01403-01 (BA23A and BA2XX)
17 -01403-03 (BA 123)
17 -01403-04 (H9642)

BA2XX Bulkhead
12-26729-01

Choke Assembly

Filler Kit
70-24071-01

Components

X
X

External Power jSignal Cable
17-01402-01

Patch Panel
12-26730-01 (BA23A)
12-26730-03 (H9642)

External Modem
30-28371-01

Loopback Connector
12-27499-01

Power Test Plug
12-27500-01

External Power jSignal Cable
17-01506-01

BA2XX Bulkhead
12-27501-01

DTQNA-3

DTQNA INSTALLATION

Slot Selection
Depending on the DTQNA configuration and the MicroVAX II system into which it is installed, the required
number of Q-Bus backplane slots varies.
•

DTQNA-BA (BA23A, BAI23, H9642) - 3 adjacent slots

•

DTQNA-BA (BA2XX) - 2 adjacent slots

•

DTQNA-BB, -BC, and -BE - 1 slot

Depending on the other Q-Bus options installed in the MicroVAX II system, the relative position of the slot(s)
used to install the DTQNA from the memory modules varies. Table 2 lists the Q-Bus options and their
relative position from the memory modules. Relative position 1 must be installed closest to the memory
modules, and relative position 22 is installed farthest from the memory modules.
Table 2 Relative Position of Q-Bus Options
Relative Position

Q-Bus Option
TSV05 Tape Drive

DMV 11 Communication Device

TK25 Leah Tape Drive

LNV21 Laser Printer jScanner Controller

VSV21 Graphics Controller

VCB02 Graphics Controller

DHVll Communication Device

CXA 16 Communication Device
CXY08 Communication Device

TK50 Maya Tape Drive

DELQA Ethernet Interface

DEQNA Ethernet Interface

DTQNA Token-Bus Interface

RL V 12 Disk Controller

RRD50 Read Only, Disk Controller

KDA50-Q Disk Controller
KDA45-Q Disk Controller

DTQNA-4

DTQNA INSTALLATION
Table 2 Relative Position of Q-Bus Options (Cont)
Relative Position

Q-Bus Option

RQDX3 Disk Controller

KLESI-QA Disk/Tape Controller

TQK70 Tape Controller

RQDX2 Disk Controller

DRQ3B Parallel I/O Interface

DRVII-WA General-Purpose Interface

IBQOl Communication Interface

Preinstallation
The static discharge system and the switches and jumpers on the M7130 controller module must be set up
before hardware installation can begin.
Static Discharge System Setup
Use the following procedure to set up the static discharge system.
1.

Unpack the VELOSTATTM static discharge system (CD kit A2-W0299-0l).

Unfold the VELOSTAT™ mat.

Attach the IS-foot ground cable to the mat snap fastener.

Attach the 15-foot ground cable alligator clip to a good electrical ground point in the host
computer.

Attach the wrist strap to your wrist.

Attach the wrist strap grounding strap to a convenient part of the mat.

VELOSTAT is a trademark of the Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.

DTQNA-5

DTQNA INSTALLATION

Controller Module Switches and Jumpers
Table 3 lists all the switches and jumpers on the M7130 controller module. Figure 2 shows the location of the
switches and jumpers.
Table 3 Controller Module Switch and Jumper Settings
Item

Description

Purpose

SW 1-1 through
SWI-I0

Q-Bus address

Selects Q-Bus address (factory set to
177725708). See Figure 3.

SW2-1

MicroPDP-ll or
NORMAL select

Selects boot ROM location of either
20000008 for MicroVAX II, or 177400008
for MicroPDP-ll.

SW2-2

Configuration ROM
normal/disa ble

Enables boot/configuration ROM.

Pass-through
timer

Inserted = Enabled. Enabled to prevent
remote triggering (from network manager)
and host reboot (by inhibiting BINIT L
to Q-Bus).

Holdoff timer

Inserted = Enabled. Enabled to initiate 6.4
J.1s wait between Q-Bus requests.

Spare clock

Not used.

Software strap

Software readable jumper 1. Read at
ISRO <8>.

Software strap

Software readable jumper 2. Read at
ISRO <9>.

EPROM size select

With S9, selects total ROM capacity
(Table 4).

Q-Bus interrupt
request 7

Installed (Figure 4).

Q-Bus interrupt
request 6

Installed (Figure 4).

Q-Bus interrupt
request 5

Installed (Figure 4).

EPROM size select

With S4, selects total ROM capacity
(Table 4).

DTQNA-6

DTQNA INSTALLATION

S1
SPARE CLOCK (NOT USED)

C9D
@TI
~

LEDS\{8 ~

[]II]

G3
G4

SW2

S4E~S9

BOARD ETCH
MKV88-1891

Figure 2

M7130 Controller Module Switch and Jumper Location

DTQNA-7

DTQNA INSTALLATION

Table 4 EPROM Size Configuration
Total ROM
Capacity
(Kilowords)

Vll1

U96 V101
(Kilobytes)

U88

S9
S4
Configuration Configuration

0*0*0

O-OXO

0*0*0

O-OXO

16
32

32
48

O-OXO

0*0*0

64
80

O-OXO

0*0*0

O-OXO

0*0*0

128

0*0*0

Symbols for S4 and S9 configurations are:
X = cut etch

- = add jumper
* = no jumper or etch cut required.

DTQNA-8

DTQNA INSTALLATION

OFF

177

177~'~'AO~'~07
7

5 7 0

DEVICES ADDRESS = 17772570

NOTE:
SWITCH ON = ZERO IN ADDRESS FIELD
SWITCH OFF = ONE IN ADDRESS FIELD
1 ST DTQNA = 17772570
2ND DTQNA = 17760630
MKV88-1311

Figure 3

DTQNA Q-Bus Address Selection

DTQNA-9

PTQNA INSTALLATION

JUMPER CONFIGURATIONS

INTERRUPT

r----------~ LEVELS
S6

M7130
CONTROLLER
MODULE

I
;

)

U16

)

U24

'--J~

~ • IIWhI • I WM • I

BR4

lWiJ • II· wa 1WhI· I

BR5

~ • IIWhI ·11· ~

BR6

I • ~ WhI· I W%1. I

BR7

L- JUMPER LOCATION

mcml!lm~1

[S6 US;1

S8]

NOTE:
CONFIGURATION SHOWN
(INTERRUPT LEVEL BR5) IS
THEUSUAL FACTORY SETIING
MKV88-1890

Figure 4

Q-Bus Interrupt Level Selection

DTQNA-IO

DTQNA INSTALLATION
Hardware Installation
Use the flowchart in Figure 5 to install the DTQNA in the BA23A, BA123, and H9642 systems. Use the
flowchart in Figure 6 to install the DTQNA in the BA2XX systems.

GET DTQNA
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
APPROPRIATE
PERSONNEL

COMPLETE
PREINSTALLATION
PROCEDURES

SET UP STATIC
DISCHARGE SYSTEM

UNPACK AND INSPECT
DTQNA HARDWARE
COMPONENTS. SEE
TABLE 1

Figure 5

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA in BA23A, BA123,
and H9642 Systems (Sheet 1 of 5)
DTQNA-ll

DTQNA INSTALLATION

INSTALL GRANT
CONTINUITY CARDS
IN ROWS A AND C OF
BACKPLANE SLOT ON
COMPONENT SIDE OF
M7131 MODULE. SEE
SLOT SELECTION
SECTION FOR OPTION
POSITIONING

CONNECT RF PATCH
CABLE TO MODEM
MODULE RF
CONNECTOR

12" FOR BA23A
21" FOR BA123
36" FOR H9642

CONNECT RIBBON
CABLE FROM MODEM
MODULE J1 TO
CONTROLLER MODULE
J4

REMOVE BLANK
PANEL COVER FROM
LOCATION E OR F
OF REAR I/O PANEL

MKV88-1876

Figure 5

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA in BA23A, BA123,
and H9642 Systems (Sheet 2 of 5)

DTQNA-12

DTQNA INSTALLATION

CONNECT RF PATCH
CABLE FROM MODEM
MODULE TO
CONNECTOR ON RF
PATCH PANEL AND
RECONNECT I/O
PANEL CABLES

SECURE PATCH PANEL
TO REAR I/O PANEL
WITH MOUNTING
SCREWS

ATIACH SPLIT FERRITE
RING TO RDXX DISK
CONTROLLER CABLES
AND SECURE WITH
CLAMPS

MKV88-1877

Figure 5

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA in BA23A, BA123,
and H9642 Systems (Sheet 3 of 5)
DTQNA-13

DTQNA INSTALLATION

INSTALL CONTROL
MODULE INTO
BACKPLANE SLOT.
SEE SLOT SELECTION
SECTION FOR OPTION
POSITIONING

REMOVE BLANK
PANEL COVER FROM
A VACANT SLOT (B,
C, OR D) OF
ENCLOSURE REAR
I/O PANEL

INSTALL BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR PANEL
INTO VACANT SLOT
(B, C, OR D) OF
ENCLOSURE REAR I/O
PANEL. CONNECT
CABLES TO CONTROL
MODULE, AND SECURE
WITH MOUNTING
SCREWS

CONNECT POWER/
SIGNAL CABLE
CONNECTORS P2
AND P4 TO MODEM
ENCLOSURE JACKS
J2 AND J4

ROUTE CABLES TO
REAR I/O PANEL, AND
CONNECT P1 AND P4
TO J1 AND J4

MKV88·'878

Figure 5

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA in BA23A, BA123,
and H9642 Systems (Sheet 4 of 5)
DTQNA-14

DTQNA INSTALLATION

ATTACH SPLIT
FERRITE RING TO
RDXX DISK
CONTROLLER CABLES
AND SECURE WITH
CLAMPS

MOUNT MODEM
ENCLOSURE WITHIN
4.5 M (15 FT) OF
SYSTEM (CUSTOMER
PERFORMED)

MKV88·1879

Figure 5

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA in BA23A, BA 123,
and H9642 Systems (Sheet 5 of 5)

DTQNA-15

DTQNA INSTALLATION

GET DTQNA
INSTALlATION
INFORMATION FROM
APPROPRIATE
PERSONNEL

COMPLETE
PREINSTALlATION
PROCEDURES

UNPACK AND INSPECT
THE DTQNA
HARDWARE
COMPONENTS. SEE

PATCH CABLE TO
MODEM MODULE RF
CONNECTOR

INSTALL MODEM
MODULE IN VACANT
SLOT CLOSEST TO CPU
BUT AFTER MEMORY
MODULES, ACCORDING
TO Q-BUS OPTION
POSITION GUIDELINES.
SEE SLOT SELECTION
SECTION

Figure 6

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA in
BA2XX Systems (Sheet 1 of 3)
DTQNA-16

DTQNA INSTALLATION

CONNECT BULKHEAD
CABLES TO CONTROL
MODULE AND ATTACH
BULKHEAD TO SYSTEM

INSTALL CONTROL
MODULE INTO
BACKPLANE SLOT.
SEE SLOT SELECTION
SECTION FOR OPTION
POSITIONING

END

ROUTE CABLE TO
FRONT TO BA2XX.
CONNECT J1 TO
BULKHEAD P1. AND
J4 TO BULKHEAD P4

CONNECT CUSTOMER
PROVIDED DROP
CABLE TO RF
CONNECTOR ON
MODEM ENCLOSURE

MOUNT MODEM EN CLOSURE (CUSTOMER
PERFORMED)

MKV88-1881

Figure 6

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA
in BA2XX Systems (Sheet 2 of 3)
DTQNA-17

DTQNA INSTALLATION

INSTALL CONTROL
MODULE IN NEXT
SLOT

CONNECT RIBBON
CABLE FROM MODEM
MODULE Jl TO
CONTROL MODULE

CONNECT RF PATCH
CABLE TO BULKHEAD
REAR RF CONNECTOR

END

INSTALL BULKHEAD
IN FRONT OF MODEM
MODULE

CONNECT DROP
CABLE TO RF
CONNECTOR

MKV88-1882

Figure 6

Installation Flowchart for DTQNA
in BA2XX Systems (Sheet 3 of 3)

DTQNA Configuration
After the DTQNA hardware is installed, the configuration vector of the port functional parameters must- be
performed. DTQNA port configuration is initiated by the operator from the console mode (»> prompt),
with the HALT ENABLE/DISABLE switch in the DISABLE position. Refer to the DTQNA Installation
and Maintenance Manual for the configuration procedures.
DTQNA-18

DTQNA CABLING

M7131
MODEM MODULE

GRANT CONTINUITY CARDS
M9048
(1226732-01 )

M7130
CONTROLLER
MODULE
RF PATCH CABLE
(1701403-01 [BA23])
(1701403-03 [BA 123])
(1701403-04 [H9642])

NOTE:
M9048 GRANT CONTINUITY CARDS, AND M7130 AND M7131 MODULES
SHOWN AS THEY WOULD APPEAR IN THE BACKPLANE.
MKV88-1322

Figure 7

DTQNA Internal Installation in BA23A, BA123, and H9642 Systems (DTQNA-BA)

DTQNA-19

DTQNA CABLING

LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
(12-27499-01 )

EXTERNAL MODEM

130-28\°'1
PATCH PANEL
(12-26730-01 [BA23])
(12-26730-03 [H9642])

M7130
CONTROLLER
MODULE

EXTERNAL
SIGNAUPOWER
. / CABLE
/"
(17-01402-01)

PLUG
(12-27500-01 )
TOKEN-BUS
DROP CABLE
MKV88-1889

Figure 8

DTQNA External Installation in BA23A, BA123, and H9642 Systems (DTQNA-BB and -BE)

DTQNA-20

DTQNA CABLING

M7130
CONTROLLER

TOKEN-BUS
DROP CABLE

BA2XX BULKHEAD
(12-26729-01 )

INTERNAL
RIBBON CABLE
(17-01404-01 )

MODEM
MODULE
MKV88-1888

Figure 9

DTQNA Internal Installation in BA2XX Systems (DTQNA-BA)

DTQNA-21

DTQNA CABLING

M7130
CONTROLLER

POWER
TEST

EXTERNAL MODEM
(3028371-01 )

EXTERNAL SIGNAL)POWER CABLE
(1701506-01 )

TOKEN-BUS
DROP CABLE
MKV88-1316

Figure 10

DTQNA External Installation in BA2XX Systems (DTQNA-BC)

DTQNA-22

DTQNA DIAGNOSTICS
DTQNA Diagnostics
The OTQNA has both power-up self-test and user-initiated diagnostics. The power-up self-test diagnostics
exist for the controller and modem modules, the results of which are indicated by the LEOs oli the modules.
The user-initiated diagnostics are part of the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MOM) diagnostics that
identify a faulty fi~ld replaceable unit in the OTQNA.
Power-Up Self-Test Diagnostics
When power is applied to the OTQNA controller and modem modules a series of self-tests are executed.
The four LEOs on the controller module indicate which self-test is being executed. If all self-tests pass
successfully, a rotating pattern appears on the LEOs. The failure of a self-test is indicated by steadily lit
LEDs, whose pattern shows which self-test failed (Table 5).
Table 5 Controller Module LED Status
LED
4

LED
3

LED

o
o

LED
1

o
o
o
o

ROM Checksum Test

Controller

PCSR 1-3 RAM Test

Controller

QIC Test

Controller

Local RAM Test

Controller

TBC Test

Controller

Controller Loopback Test

Controller

Cable Loopback Test

Cable/Modem

Modem Test

Cable/Modem

Modem On-Line Test

Modem

MAC Address Test

Controller

DMA Test

Controller

NVM Test

Controller

o
o

1
1
1
0

1
1
0
1

1
0
1
1

Initial Power ON
Controller

Probable
Faulty FRU

CPU Test

o
o
o

Test Status

0
1
1
1

The LEDs show this
rotating pattern at a
cycle time of 2 seconds
after all tests have passed.

* o = ON and 1 = OFE
OTQNA-23

DTQNA DIAGNOSTICS

The status of the M7131 modem module is indicated by the four LED indicators on the modem module
(Table 6).
Table 6 Modem Module Status Indicators

LED

Status

POWER OK
(Green)

ON indicates that modem is supplied with proper dc power.

RECEIVE
(Green)

ON indicates that modem is receiving network data.

TRANSMIT
(Green)

ON indicates that DTQNA is transmitting data/tokens
(station is part of logical ring on network).

FAULT
(Red)

ON indicates that modem is in a fault condition.

User-Initiated Diagnostics

The DTQNA diagnostic NAZQAA executes under the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor (MDM). The MDM
is a menu-driven system that performs two types of tests: verification and service tests. The verification tests
are performed every time the system is booted, and can also be selected to be run on the MDM menu. The
service tests are also run by the MDM menu and require certain set-up steps to be performed, such as the
connection of loopback connectors and/or the RF tester. Each procedural step is prompt-driven, and detailed
prompt instructions are provided. Refer to the MicroVAX Diagnostic Monitor User's Guide
(AA-FM7 AB-DN) before running the user-initiated diagnostics.

DTQNA-24

DTQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting
Use the flowchart in Figure 11 to troubleshoot DTQNA problems and identify a faulty FRU.

MODE AND EXERCISER
SECTION

Figure 11

DTQNA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 5)

DTQNA-25

DTQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DIAGNOSE
PROBLEMS USING
M7130 LEOS

REPLACE FRU
AS INDICATED
BY LEOS

YES

FRU
REPLACEMENT
SUCCESSFUL

REPLACE FRUS
IN THE FOLLOWING
ORDER UNTIL THE
PROBLEM IS FIXED
1. CONTROLLER
2. MODEM INT. CABLE

3. MODEM EXT. CABLE

Figure 11

MKV88-1884

DTQNA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 5)

DTQNA-26

DTQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

INSTALL LOOPBACK
PLUG AT BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR

CHECK THAT
CIRCUIT BREAKER
IS ON

REMOVE LOOPBACK
PLUG. RECONNECT
EXTERNAL MODEM
CABLE

BAD CONTROLLER
AND/OR BULKHEAD
ASSEMBLY

PLUG. RECONNECT
NEW EXTERNAL
MODEM CABLE

MKV88·' 885

Figure 11

DTQNA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 5)

DTQNA-27

DTQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

SET ON-LINE
AUTO TEST TO
AUTO TEST POS .

(POWER LED BLINKS)

TESTER
DEFECTIVE

SET ON-LINE
AUTO TEST TO
ON-LINE POS.

(POWER LED STEADY ON)

CONNECT COAXIAL
CABLE BETWEEN
TEST CONNECTOR
AND MODEM

SET CHANNEL
SELECT TO
CORRECT SETTING

MKV88-,886

Figure I I

DTQNA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 5)

DTQNA-28

DTQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

MAKE SURE YOU
ARE USING THE
CORRECT MAP
CHANNEL

DEFECTIVE
MODEM

MKV88·,887

Figure 11

DTQNA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 5 of 5)

DTQNA-29

DTQNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

DTQNA Registers
Figure 12 shows the DTQNA internal registers.
15

oFoo8L
R_A_D_D_R_ES_S________~_____
0 __~1 ~BUS
________________o______________~__________V_E_C_TO__
VECTOR
15

7FF021..1____________S_E_L_F_T_E_S_T_C_O_D_E__________~L_0__~I____~D_EV__
ID____~____P_O_R_T_S_T_A_T_E____~I ICSR1

7FF041..1__________________________P_O_R_T_Q_-_BU_S__A_D_D_R_ES_S__
<1_5_:0_0_>______________________~1 ICSR2
12

ICSR3

PORT ~BUS ADDRESS <21 :16>

7FF06

o
ICSRO

UNDEFINED

B8400
7

NOTE:R=AESEAVED

B84021 BVAL I

UNDEFINED

B84061

IICA5
0

I RPT I PS1 Ipso 1 LCK I MDMCNTL

I HIMAP

BPADD

I LOMAP

BPADD

B840AI

IICR4

BIT SELECT

B84081

NOT USED
7

BIT SELECT

B84041
15

NOT USED

o
B8480
15

B850°1..1____________
15

~I_S_W_1_01'--SW__9.I_s_W_8~I~S_~
__·.I_S_w_6~I~S_w
__
5.I_S_w_4~I~S_w_3~I_s_w_2~I_S_W__1~1____________~1 ~~?~~~:S
10

B860011..__________U_N_D_E_FI_N_E_D________~IJ_M_P_2.I_JM_P~11'--__M_AJ_O_R__R_E_V__~_______M_IN_O_R__R_EV
______~1 ISRO

B86801..______~--------------~----------T-B-D----------------------------------~ :~~3
Mlo.ooo356

Figure 12

DTQNA Internal Registers

DTQNA-30

DTUNA INSTALLATION
DTUNA TOKEN UNIBUS NETWORK ADAPTER
General Description
The DIGITAL Token UNIBUS Network Adapter (DTUNA) is a means of implementing the Manufacturing Automated Protocol (MAP) for VAX/VMS UNIBUS systems.
.
The DTUNA consists of software and hardware that permit a VAX/VMS UNIBUS system to participate
in a MAP network environment. The software implements layers 3 through 7 of MAP. The hardware
provides the connection to layers 1 and 2 of MAP.
The DTUNA hardware (Figure 1) consists of a KMSIP single-line synchronous controller, the TIM unit,
and interconnecting cables. The TIM unit is a MAP server manufactured by Concord Communications
Incorporated and is the RS-422 interface to the MAP network. The TIM unit implements the physical and
data link layers (layers 1 and 2) of MAP.

TIM UNIT

I
M8203 LINE UNIT

M8206 MICROPROCESSOR

Figure 1 DTUNA Hardware

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following manuals for more information on the DTUNA adapter.
Title

Document Number

VAX UNIBUS/MAP Hardware Installation Manual

AA-HM25A-TE

VAX DEC/MAP Introduction

AA-HM33A-TE

VAX DEC/MAP Network Manager's Guide

AA-HM31A-TE

VAX DEC/MAP Software Installation Guide

AA-HM34A-TE

KMSII Synchronous Communications Processor
Pocket Service Guide

EK-KMSII-PS

KMSII-P Synchronous Communications Processor
Technical Manual

EK-KMSIP-TM

DTUNA-l

DTUNA INSTALLATION
Unpacking and Inspection
1.

Set up the static discharge system as follows.
a.

Unpack a VELOSTAT™ static discharge system (CD kit A2-W0299-0I).

Unfold the VELOSTATTM mat.

Attach the I5-foot ground cable to the mat snap fastener.

Attach the I5-foot ground cable alligator clip to a good electrical ground point in the host
computer.

Attach the wrist strap to your wrist.

Attach the wrist strap grounding strap to a convenient part of the mat.

Inspect and unpack the DTUNA adapter as follows.
NOTE
The DTUN A components must be unpacked and
inspected on a static discharge system mat.

Inspect the unopened DTUNA shipping containers and check for dents, holes, or crushed
corners.

Open and unpack the shipping container and inventory the contents against the DTUNA
component parts diagram (Figure 2).

Check all software media and accompanying documentation against the bill of materials and
carefully inspect all items for damage. Report any shortages or damages to the carrier and
notify Support.

VELOSTAT is a trademark of the Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.

DTUNA-2

DTUNA INSTALLATION

TIM UNIT

D~ODDD
I

M8203 LINE UNIT

M8206 MICROPROCESSOR

TIM
POWER CORD

~=================~

BC08S-1

oc=J
[---]

BC08S-10

BC55D

[)~i- - - - - - 0

H3002
I/O
PANEL

[0]

H3255/H3254
TEST CONNS
H3251
TEST CONN

TIM
TECHNICAL
MANUAL

J@l @lU@l @li

,
SOFTWARE MEDIA
AND DOCUMENTATION

VAX
UNIBUS/MAP
HARDWARE
INSTALLATION MANUAL
MLO-309-86

Figure 2

OTUNA Hardware Component Parts Diagram

OTUNA-3

DTUNA INSTALLATION

Preinstallation
Device Placement - Ensure that there are two adjacent small peripheral controller (SPC) hex-height
backplane slots available for the M8206 and M8203 modules. Any DDll-C or DDll-D backplane can
accept the KMSIP which can be placed anywhere on the UNIBUS backplane before the first UNIBUS
repeater.
Bus Latency Constraints - Latency is the delay between the time a device initiates a request for service and
the time it takes to receive a response. If the system in which the KMSIP is installed contains many highspeed direct memory access (DMA) devices, there is a possibility of unacceptable KMSIP performance. To
prevent this from occurring, and to provide a higher DMA device priority, the KMSIP should be installed as
close as possible to memory and the central processor.
Backplane Configuration - To configure an SPC slot for installation of the M8206 module:
1.

Remove the bus grant continuity module (if applicable).

Install the bus grant continuity module in any unused backplane slot.

Ensure that the backplane has the following reserve power supply capacities.
10.5 A on the +5 Vdc power supply at pin CIA2,
150 rnA on the + 15 Vdc power supply at pin C 1U 1,
200 rnA on the -15 Vdc power supply at pin C 1B2.
Ground reference is pin Cl C2.

Remove the non processor grant (NPG) jumper between pins CAl and CBl of the backplane slot
for the M8206 module (Figure 3).
NOTE
The host system will be nonoperational if the M8206
module is removed and the NPG jumper is not
reinstalled.

DTUNA-4

DTUNA INSTALLATION

- - - - - KMS1P PROCESSOR SLOT
______ KMS1P LINE UNIT SLOT

TYPICAL

3 2

D~IIIIII

I I I II

J] 11111

- - + - - C8l
CAl

]]
~IIITDJ
1111111

GRANT JUMPER

PIN NAMING CONVENTION

III
C

MODULE SIDE 11,21
PIN (A-V EXCEPT G,I,O,Q)
SLOT (I-N)
PIN SET (A-F)
MLO-315-86

Figure 3

Locating the NPG Jumper

DTUNA-5

DTUNA INSTALLATION

Installation Procedure
Hardware Installation - The DTUNA installation procedures are detailed in the installation flowchart
(Figure 4). If additional information is required, refer to the VAX UNIBUS/MAP Hardware Installation
Manual AA-HM25A-TE.

BEGIN

)

GET DTUNA
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
APPROPRIATE
PERSONNEL.

~
COMPLETE
PREINSTALLATION
PROCEDU RES.

~
SET UP STATIC DISCHARGE SYSTEM.

UNPACK AND
INSPECT THE
DTUNA HARDWARE
COMPONENTS.

!
EXECUTE SYSGEN
TO DETERMINE CSR
AND VECTOR
ADDRESSES.

!
ENSURE M8206
PRIORITY PLUG IS A
LEVEL FIVE PLUG
AND JUMPERS Wl
AND W3 ARE
INSTALLED. SEE
FIGURE 5

1
MKV88·1777

Figure 4

DTUNA Hardware Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 1 of 7)

DTUNA-6

DTUNA INSTALLATION

SET M8206 CSR
ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK E129
TO SELECTED
FLOATING ADDRESS.
SEE FIGURE 5

SET M8206 VECTOR
ADDRESS
SWITCH PACK E31 TO
SELECTED FLOATING ADDRESS. SEE
FIGURE 5

~
SET M8206
SWITCH PACK E82,
SWITCH 8 TO ON
AND ALL OTHER
SWITCHES TO OFF
FOR 115 MS
SELECT. SEE FIGURE
5

~
INSTALL TH E M8206
MODULE IN THE
LEFT-HAND BACKPLANE SLOT.

r
ENSURE JUMPER
W17 IS REMOVED
FROM M8203 MODULE. SEE FIGURE 6

cb
Figure 4

MKV88·'778

DTUNA Hardware Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 2 of 7)

DTUNA-7

DTUNA INSTALLATION

SET M8203
SWITCH PACK E39
TO SELECT RS-422
INTERFACE AND
56 Kbits/s DATA
RATE OPTIONS. SEE
FIGURE 6

SET M8203
SWITCH PACK E121.
SWITCH 10 TO ON
AND ALL OTHER
SWITCHES OFF FOR
AC LO OPTION. SEE
FIGURE 6

SET ALL SWITCHES
ON M8203
SWITCHPACK E134
TO OFF. SEE FIGURE
6

INSTALL THE M8203
MODULE IN THE
RIGHT-HAND BACKPLANE SLOT.

MKV88·1779

Figure 4 DTUNA Hardware Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 3 of 7)

DTUNA-8

DTUNA INSTALLATION

EXECUTE EVDHA TO
TEST M8206 MICROPROCESSOR.

INSTALL BC08S-1
CABLE FROM M8203
J3 TO M8206 Jl.
SEE FIGURE 7

EXECUTE EVDMA
TO TEST M8203
LINE UNIT AND
BC08S-1 CABLE.

CONNECT BC08S-10
TO INSIDE CONNECTOR OF H3002 I/O
PANEL. SEE FIGURE
7

INSTALL H3002 I/O
PANEL INTO SYSTEM I/O BULKHEAD.
SEE FIGURE 7

MKV88-1780

Figure 4

DTUNA Hardware Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 4 of 7)

DTUNA-9

DTUNA INSTALLATION

CONNECT BC55D
CABLE TO OUTSIDE
CONNECTOR OF
H3002 I/O PANEL.
SEE FIGURE 7

EXECUTE EVDMA
TO TEST BC55D AND
BC08S-10 CABLES
AND H3002 I/O
PANEL.

EXECUTE EVDHB TO
TEST M8206 MICROPROCESSOR
KMS1 P FIRMWARE.

CONNECT THE NETWORK DROP CABLE
TO THE RF CONNECTOR ON THE REAR
OF THE TIM UNIT.
SEE FIGURE 8

~
CONNECT THE
BC55D CABLE TO
THE RS-422 CONNECTOR ON THE
REAR OF THE TIM
UNIT. SEE FIGURE
8

~
MKV88·1781

Figure 4

DTUN A Hardware Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 5 of 7)

DTUNA-IO

DTUNA INSTALLATION

CONNECT THE
CABLE FROM THE
CONSOLE TERMINAL
TO THE RS-232-C
CONNECTOR ON THE
REAR OF THE TIM
UNIT. SEE FIGURE

CONFIGURE THE
CONSOLE TERMINAL
FOR:
9600 BAUD
8 BITS/CHARACTER
1 STOP BIT
NO ECHO
NO PARITY

SET THE TIM UNIT
CONSOLE/PORT
SWITCH TO THE
CONSOLE POSITION.

CONNECT THE TIM
UNIT POWER CORD
TO A SUITABLE 125
VAC SOURCE.

MKV88·1782

Figure 4

DTUNA Hardware Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 6 of 7)

DTUNA-ll

DTUNA INSTALLATION

CALL
SUPPORT.

PARAMETERS, THEN
BOOT TIM UNIT.

INITIATE TIM UNIT
TRANSMISSION
LEVEL TEST.

CHANGE RF
TRANSMISSION
LEVEL

MKV88·1783

Figure 4

DTUNA Hardware Installation Flowchart (Sheet 7 of 7)

DTUNA-12

DTUNA INSTALLATION

M8206 MICROPROCESSOR MODULE

CJ
osc 0
W1,W3 BOTH
MUST BE IN

c=:::J
Jl

E82-8 MUST BE
ON FOR 115 MS
SELECT. ALL
OTHERS OFF

EB2

E31

SWITCH PACK E129

PRIO
MUS

A 3 - - AI2 \

NOTE:
ON SWITCH PACKS,
SW1 IS LEFT.
IN TABLES
SW1 IS RIGHT.

CSR

ADDRESS
SELECTION

MSB

151141131211

I I'
1

LSB

8N6 54321'10

SWITCH PACK

I I
0

"'-,..
SWITCH

DEVICE ADO

OFF

760010
760020
760030
760040
760050
760060
760070
760100

OFF

760200

OFF OFF

760300

OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF

OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON

300
310
320
330
340
360
370
400
500
600
700

760500

OFF OFF

760600

OFF OFF OFF

760700

OFF

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

760400

OFF
OFF

SWITCH NB

761000

OFF

762000

OFF OFF

763000
764000

OFF

NOTE: Switch OFF responds to logical 1 on the UNIBUS

NOTE: Switch ON produces logical 1 on the UN IBUS

OPEN=OFF
CLOSED=ON

MLO·312·86

Figure 5

M8206 Microprocessor· Module Configuration

DTUNA-13

DTUNA INSTALLATION

M8203 LINE UNIT MODULE

~
E134, ALL OFF
NOT USED

DD~
E134

E121

I
I

E121, SWITCH 10 ON (AC LO)
OTHERS OFF, NOT USED
REMOVE W17
FOR FULL-DUPLEX

~i?J

C:::=::J

L:::::::::J

D~DDDD

•

I
~

W17

c::::J
E39

SWITCH PACK E39
z

*~u~uu~u~~~
L
RESERVED~
I I

SWITCH

SWITCH
SPEED

1 MEG

500K

OFF

250K

OFF

56K

OFF

19_2K

OFF

9_6K

OFF

4_8K

OFF

2.4K

OFF

INTERFACE
5

RS232-C OR RS423-A
OR INTEGRAL **

OFF

V-35

OFF

RS-422

OFF

**INTEGRAL MODEM OPTION IS NOT USED
IN KMS 11-P INTERFACE

---

MlO-313-86

Figure 6

M8203 Line Unit Module Configuration

DTUNA-14

DTUNA INSTALLATION

STRIPE

H3255
. .~~-+-TEST
CONNECTOR
SIDE ONE

BC08S1-10

M8206 MICROPROCESSOR

STRIPE

SMOOTH
SIDE

H3002
DISTRIBUTION
PANEL

MKV87-1133

Figure 7

DTUNA Cabling and Diagnostic Test Connector Installation

DTUNA-15

DTUNA INSTALLATION

TOKEN BUS

RS-422
INTERFACE
( DCE INTERFA CE)

BC55D
CABLE

TERMINAL

MLO-311-86

Figure 8

TIMU'
mt Installation

DTUNA-16

DTUNA INSTALLATION

Setting TIM Unit Parameters - After the TIM unit is physically installed,operational parameters must be
loaded. The following example shows a typical session for setting TIM parameters. The actual parameters
must be supplied by the system manager.

COMMAND/PARAMETER

DESCRIPTION

Password: SYSTeM
TIM Console ~onitor n.n

(login to TIM unit console monitor)

tcm:

(rIM console monitor prompt)
(invoke CONfigure utility)
(set all parameters to dafault)
(changas SPA port 4 to HDl)
(set chann9l pair)
(set head-end type)
(sat RF tr3nsmission level. 45.5 dBmV)
(set token address)
(set preamble length)
(set HJL layar lSAP value)
(set RS-422 interface speed)
(prepare to save parameter5 in NVR~M)
(exit CO~figure utility)
(boot TIM unit to save parameters)

tcm:CCN
CON:OEF ALL
CON:OEF HDL
CON:WRITE PHY:03 03
CON:WRITE PHY:16 60
CON:wRITE PHY:18 DC
CON:WRITE MAC:06 Ol 00 00 00 00 FO

CON:WRITE MAC:OC 04
CON:WRITE LLC:12 FE
CON:WRITE HOL:Q4 08
CON:SAVE ALL
CON:EXIT

tcm:600T
Password!

For ~ore information on setting TIM unit parameters, ref9r to the TIM Technical
Manual.

DTUNA-17

DTUNA INSTALLATION
TIM Unit Transmission Level Test - The transmission level test verifies that the transmission RF level
properly set. The test transmits a group of frames through the cable plant to the head-end remodulator an
determines their received RF signal level.
The test is initiated from the TIM console monitor (tern:) with the following command.
tcm:NDE START 1000
This command initiates a test in the network diagnostic exerciser (NDE) to transmit a series of 1000 frame:
After the test is completed, the results are viewed with the following command.
tcm:COU PHY
The following is a typical response.

Physical Counters
{4-18-86}
Signal level of received frames
below
expected

okay
218

nominal
782

{14:00}

okay

above
expected

If the response shows anything other than a 0 in the "below expected" or "above expected" columns, th
TIM unit RF transmission level needs adjustment. See the example under "Setting TIM Parameters" fc
CON: WRITE PHY: 18 OC command.
For more information on executing the TIM unit transmission level test, refer to the TIM Technicc.
Manual.

DTUNA-18

DTUNA INSTALLATION

;oftware Installation and Verification - The KMS 1P firmware and DTUN A software installation and
rerification procedures are provided in the installation flowchart (Figure 9). If additional information is
'equired, refer to the VAX DEC/MAP Software Installation Guide, AA-HM34A-TE.

INSTALL DTUNA
HARDWARE.

EXECUTE SYSGEN TO
CHECK SYSTEM
PARAMETERS. MODIFY IF NECESSARY.

$ RUN SYS$SYSTEM:SYSGEN
- USER'S UAF RECORD
- SYSGEN PARAMETERS
- { - KMS1 P CSR ADDRESS
- KMS1 P VECTOR ADDRESS

-+{ $ SYS$UPDATE:VMSINSTAL KMS012
<device-name>

DURING KMS FIRMWARE

--1' ' DO YOU WANT TO RUN THE IVP

INSTALLATION, EXECUTE
INSTALLATION VERIFICATION PROGRAM (IVP).

-L

EXECUTE VMSINSTAL
TO INSTALL DEC/MAP
SOFTWARE.

_J$ @SYS$UPDATE:VMSINSTAL MAP01 0

AFTER THE INSTALLATION [YES]?

l<device-name> OPTIONS N

MKV87·1134

Figure 9

DTUNA Firmware/Software Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 1 of 2)

DTUNA-19

DTUNA INSTALLATION

- KMS1 P CSR ADDRESS
- KMS1 P VECTOR ADDRESS
- ~
- TIME (GMT)
[ - MAP NODE NAME
-AFI/PRIMARY SUBNET ID

---{$ @SYS$SYSTEM:MAP$START.COM

- -..z$ @SYS$TEST:MAP$IVP.COM

MKV87-1135

Figure 9

DTUNA Firmware/Software Installation Flowchart
(Sheet 2 of 2)

DTUNA-20

DTUNA CABLING

Cabling
Cabling considerations were addressed in the Installation section.

DTUNA-21

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

DTUNA Testing
Maintenance Features - The following are maintenance features for the DTUNA adapter.
•

KMS Diagnostic Testing
M8206 Microprocessor Repair Level 3 Diagnostic (EVDHA)
M8206 Microprocessor Level 2 Diagnostic (EVDHB)
M8203 Line Unit Repair Level 3 Diagnostic (EVDMA)

•

TIM Unit LED Indicators
PWR LED (green) indicates status of power-up self-test
POL LED (yellow) indicates proper function of unit

Diagnostic Descriptions - There are three diagnostic programs for the DTUNA adapter.

EVDHA, M8206 Microprocessor Repair Level Diagnostic
This diagnostic tests the logic of the M8206 microprocessor. It performs 20 tests by stepping the microprocessor through various instruction sequences. It is a standalone repair level diagnostic (Level 3) that runs
under the VAX diagnostic supervisor.
A typical command series to run the EVDHA diagnostic on a VAX-ll/730 system is:
»> I
»> B SUO

DS> LOAD EVDHA
DS> ATT DW730 HUB DWO
DS> ATT KMCll DWO KMA 760460 340 5
DS> SET ALL
DS> SET TRACE
DS> START
The procedure for using EVDHA to test the M8206 microprocessor is show in Figure 10

DTUNA-22

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

DISCONNECT
BC08S-1 FROM
M8206 J1.

INITIALIZE SYSTEM
AND BOOT
DIAGNOSTIC
SUPERVISOR.

MKV87·1136

Figure 10

Using EVDHA to Test the M8206 Microprocessor

DTUNA-23

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

EVDHB, M8206 Microprocessor Functional Diagnostic
This diagnostic verifies the functional operation of the M8206 microprocessor in a VMS environment.
Special diagnostic firmware is loaded into the M8206 microprocessor and is used to transmit, receive, and
check buffers of 512 characters. EVDHB is a Level 2 diagnostic and runs either under VMS or standalone.
To run EVDHB under VMS, the KMSIP driver (YODRIVER) must be installed.
A typical command series to load YODRIVER is:
$ MCR SYSGEN
> RELOAD SYS$MAINTENANCE:YODRIVER.EXE
> CONNECT YOAO / ADAP=UBO/CSR=%070260/VEC=%0340/NUMVEC=2
> EXIT
A typical command series to run the EVDHB diagnostic on a VAX-ll/730 system is:
»> I
»> B SUO

DS> LOAD EVDHB
DS> ATT KMCll HUB YOA 760460 340 5
DS> SEL YOA
DS> START
The procedure for using EVDHB to test the M8602 microprocessor and its interaction with the KMSI P
firm ware is shown in Figure 11.

DTUNA-24

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

B
BOOT VMS AND
LOAD KMS1 P
FIRMWARE
(YODRIVER).

A
EXECUTE
DIAGNOSTIC
SUPERVISOR.

RELOAD K:MS1 P
FIRMWARE.

MKV87·1137

Figure 11

Using EVDHB to Test the M8206 Microprocessor and KMSIP
Firmware

DTUNA-25

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

EVDMA, M8203 Line Unit Repair Level Diagnostic
This diagnostic verifies the operation of the M8203 line unit and checks the cabling up to the TIM unit.
EVDMA is a VAX/VMS Level 3 diagnostic that runs under the diagnostic supervisor.
EVDMA is executed twice. First, the H3255 test connector is connected to 12 on the M8203 module and
EVDMA is executed to test that module. Second, the BC08S-10 cable, H3002 I/O panel, and the BC550
cable are connected with theH3251 test connector at the end of the BC550 cable. In this arrangement,
EVDMA tests both cables and the I/O panel. Refer to Figure 7 for diagnostic test cabling.
A typical command series to run the EVOMA diagnostic in external loopback mode on a VAX-ll/730
system is:
»> I
»> B SUO

OS> LOAO EVOMA
OS> ATT KMS11 OWO KMAO 760460 340 5
M8203 REG 11 (E134 SW10,9 E121)? 54
M8203 REG 15 (E134 SW8-1)? 0
M8203 REG 16 (E121 SW8-1)? 0
LOOPBACK TYPE? 3
BAUO RATE? 3
RUN SWITCH? 0
OS> SET ALL
OS> SET TRACE
OS> START
The procedures for using EVDMA to test the OTUNA are shown in Figures 12 and 13.

OTUNA-26

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

DISCONNECT
BC08S-10 FROM
M8203 J2.

INSTALL H3255 TEST
CONNECTOR TO
M8203 J2.
A

INITIALIZE SYSTEM
AND BOOT
DIAGNOSTIC
SUPERVISOR.

TEST CONNECTOR
AND CONNECT
BC08S-10 CABLE TO
M8203 J2 IF
PREVIOUSLY
01 SCON N ECTED.

PROPER
INSTALLATION.

MKV87·1138

Figure 12

Using EVDMA to Test the M8203 Line Unit and BC08S-1 Cable

DTUNA-27

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

INITIALIZE SYSTEM
AND BOOT
DIAGNOSTIC
SUPERVISOR.

REMOVE H3251
TEST CONNECTOR
FROM BC55D CABLE
AND CONNECT IT TO
THE TIM UNIT IF
PREVIOUSLY
DISCONNECTED.

MKV87·1139

Figure 13

Using EVDMA to Test the BC08S-1O and BCSSO Cables,
and the H3002 I/O Panel (Sheet 1 of 2)
DTUNA-28

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

MKVB7·1140

Figure 13

Using EVDMA to Test the BC08S-10 and BC55D Cables, and the
H3002 I/O Panel (Sheet 2 of 2)

DTUNA-29

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

TIM LED Indicators - The status of the TIM unit can be determined by using Table 1 and the procedure
shown in Figure 14.

Table 1 TIM Unit LED Indicators State and Status
LED

State

Status

TXD
(yellow)

BLINK

Blinks only when data frames are being
transmitted.

Invalid

OFF

Invalid

BLINK

Blinks when data frames passed on network.

Data frames being passed on network.

OFF

No data frames passed on network, TIM unit not connected to network, or
TIM unit faulty.

BLINK

Error detected during power-up diagnostics.

Passed power-up diagnostics.

OFF

Failed power-up diagnostics.

POL
(yellow)

PWR
(green)

DTUNA-30

DTUNA DIAGNOSTICS

CALL SUPPORT.

OPERATIONAL
PARAMETERS.

MKV87·1141

Figure 14

Testing the TIM Unit Using the Front Panel LEOs

OTUNA-31

DTUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting
DTUNA testing is detailed in the Troubleshooting Flowchart (Figure 15) which assumes that the DTUNA
of the failing node was at one time operational.

CORRECT
PROBLEM.

YES

CHECK LEOS FOR
NORMAL STATUS.

TEST TIM UNIT
USING FRONT
PANEL LEOS.

YES

END)

EXECUTE EVDHA
TO TEST M82D6
MICROPROCESSOR.

MKV87-1142

Figure 15

DTUNA Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 2)
DTUNA-32

DTUNA MAINTENANCE AIDS

EXECUTE EVDMA
TO TEST M8203
LINE UNIT AND
BC08S-1 CABLE.

EXECUTE EVDMA
TO TEST BC55D AND
BC08S-1 CABLES
AND H3002 I/O
PANEL.

MKV87·1143

Figure 15

DTUN A Troubleshooting Flowchart
(Sheet 2 of 2)

DTUNA-33

H4000 INSTALLATION
H4000 ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
General Description
An H4000 Ethernet transceiver provides a physical and electrical interface between an Ethernet coaxial
cable and other Ethernet devices such as controllers, repeaters, network interconnect devices, and so on,
via the transceiver cable.
The transceiver clamps directly onto the coaxial cable and has a IS-pin male D-connector for connecting to
a transceiver cable. Power to drive the transceiver (-11.40 to -15.75 Vdc) is provided by the connected
device.
The H4000 transceiver is transparent to the data layers and is not addressable or programmable in any
way.
ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE
(MAX. TOTAL LENGTH: 500 M (1640.4 FT)

\CL----1
500HM
TERMINATOR

(.
50 OHM
TERMINATOR

~ETHERNET
~TRANSCEIVER

H4000 DIGITAL
ETHERNET
TRANSCEIVER

CABLE

ETHERNET
CONTROLLER

STATION 1 INTERFACE

STATION N* INTERFACE

*N S 100 PER 500 M (1640.4 FT) COAXIAL CABLE SEGMENT
MKV86-0533

Figure 1 Typical H4000 Transceiver Configuration

H4000 Versions
There are three versions of the H4000 transceiver.
•
•
•

H4000 transceiver (see Figure 2)
H4000 transceiver with removable tap (see Figure 3)
H4000-BA

The H4000-BA is an H4000 transceiver without heartbeat. The application for this product is restricted to
DEMPR connected through a DELNI to the network.
The installation instructions for the H4000-BA are identical to the H4000 requirements.

H4000-1

H4000 INSTALLATION

D-SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR OF
TRANSCEIVER DROP CABLE

MKV84-2203

Figure 2 Ethernet H4000 Transceiver

D-SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR O F /
TRANSCEIVER DROP CABLE

MKV85-2728

Figure 3 Ethernet H4000 Transceiver with Removable Tap Assembly

H4000 Transceiver Components

The following parts are supplied with the H4000 transceiver.
•
•

H4000 transceiver with tap.
H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver with Removable Tap Assembly Installation Card
H4000-2

H4000 INSTALLATION
The H4091 and H4092
The H4091 is an Ethernet to ThinWire adapter. It consists of:
•
•
•
•

An H4080,
A BNC-to-N reducer,
A barrel connector, and
An installation card.

The H4092 is a ThinWire segment to Ethernet connection installation kit. It consists of:
•
•
•
•
•

An H4091,
An H4000,
A DEREP (Local Ethernet Repeater),
Two cables, and
An installation card.

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information regarding the H4000 Ethernet transceiver.

•

H4000 Ethernet Transceiver Technical Manual

EK-H4000-TM

•
•
•

H4000 Ethernet Transceiver Microfiche

EP-H4000-TM

H4000 Field Maintenance Print Set

MP-01369

Ethernet Installation Guide

EK-ETHER-IN

Site Survey and Configuration Planning Volume 1
Installation and Testing Volume 2

•

H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver
Installation Manual

EK-H4000-IN

•

Etherjack Installation Guide

EK-DEXJK-IN

•

H4000- T Ethernet Transceiver Tester
User Guide

EK-ETHTT-UG

•

H4000 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver with
Removable Tap Assembly Installation Card

EK-H4TAP-IN

•

DEC Standard 134, Ethernet Specifications, Version 2

System Placement
System placement is not applicable to the H4000 transceiver.
Device Placement
The H4000 transceiver clamps directly onto an Ethernet coaxial cable. Note the following constraints.
•

A maximum of 100 transceivers may be placed on a single 500 m (1640.4 ft) Ethernet coaxial
cable segment.

•

Transceivers must be positioned on (±5 cm [1.97 in]) to the annular rings marked every 2.5 m
(8.2 ft) on the coaxial cable.

•

Spacing between transceivers may not be less than 2.5 m (8.2 ft).
NOTE
If annular rings are not marked on the coaxial cable,
transceivers must be spaced in multiples of 2.5 m
(8.2 ft) only.
H4000-3

H4000 INSTALLATION

Required Equipment
The following equipment is required for installing an H4000 Ethernet transceiver.
•

H4090-KA/KB installation kit (instructions for using the kit are included with the kit - See
Figure 4).

•

H4000-TA/TB transceiver tester

•

CD Kit (Part Number: A2-Wll08-10 - See Figure 5).

Power Requirements
An H4000 transceiver requires -1l.40 to -15.75 Vdc for proper operation. The power is supplied by the
following source.
•

The Ethernet device to which the transceiver is connected.

ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION KIT H4090·KA
OR H4090·KB

~EXWRENCH
-

\29.24340

29-24337 (NOT INCLUDED
IN ·KB KIT)

DRILL CHUCK
KEY
DRILL GUIDE

~
~.

. /

,
..•

,..t,..~

..-"

~":~1

DRILLING FIXTURE 29-24338
(INCLUDES DRILL GUIDE
AND CABLE GUIDE)

~~~~'l/
'I. 'I. 'I. 'I. 'I.

DRILL BITS
(VIAL OF 5)

29.24341

H4000
INSTALLATION
CARD
EK·H4000·IN

.........
,

BOX OF BRAID CONTACTS
29-24339 (NOT REQUIRED
FOR INSTALLATION)
MKV86·0534

Figure 4 H4000 Transceiver Installation Kit

H4000-4

H4000 INSTALLATION

Ys IN HEX WRENCH AND COMBINATION WRENCH/DRILL (12-24664-02)

CD AMP TAP III (12-24664-01)
CD BRAID CONNECTOR (12-24664-04)
MKV86-0535

Figure 5 CD Kit for H4000 Transceiver with Removable Tap

H4000-5

H4000 INSTALLATION
The following flow diagram outlines the H4000 transceiver installation process.

OBTAIN CUSTOMERSPECIFIC INFORMATION:
• DEVICE PLACEMENT (SEE "DEVICE
PLACEMENT') EK-ETHV1-IN-002
• POWER REQUIREMENTS (SEE
"POWER REQUIREMENTS")
• AVAILABILITY OF
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
• LOCATION FOR ETHERJACK
CONNECTOR (IF USED)

UNPACKANDVERIFY ALL
COMPONENTS RECEIVED

INSTALL TRANSCEIVER
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
IN H4000 TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION CARD

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER
CABLE TO H4000
TRANSCEIVER AND LOCK
IN PLACE (REFER TO
FIGURE 10)

MKV86-0536

Figure 6

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 3)

H4000-6

H4000 INSTALLATION

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER
CABLE TO H4000-T
TESTER

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW DIAGRAM

DISCONNECT
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FROM H4000-T TESTER

MKV84-1280

Figure 6

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

H4000-7

H4000 INSTALLATION

INSTALL ETHERJACK
CONNECTORS
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
IN "DEXJK ETHERJACK
INSTALLATION GUIDE"

GO TO INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES FOR
SPECIFIC DEVICE

INITIATE CUSTOMER
ACCEPTANCE

MKV86-0537

Figure 6 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

H4000-8

H4000 INSTALLATION

The following figures (Figures 7 and 8) show the positions of the center conductor contact and braid
contacts for both transceiver versions. Also shown is the clamping block assembly. The clamping block
assembly holds the coaxial cable so that it connects with the center conductor contact and braid contacts.

NOTE:
THE BRAID CONTACTS FOR THE
DIFFERENT VERSIONS OF THE
TRANSCEIVERS CANNOT BE
SUBSTITUTED. USE PN 29-24339
FOR THIS VERSION OF THE
TRANSCEIVER.

NEW
CONTACT

TYPICAL USED
CONTACT THAT
SHOULD BE REPLACED

MKV86·0538

Figure 7 Hardware for Installing the H4000 Transceiver on a Coaxial Cable

H4000-9

84000 INSTALLATION

CD CLAMP SCREW

CLAMP ASSEMBLY
BRAID CONTACTS
TAP BODY

® PROBE ASSEMBLY
@ PUSH PINS

TRANSCEIVER D-SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR

NOTE:
BRAID CONTACTS FROM EARLIER VERSIONS OF THE H4000 CANNOT BE
SUBSTITUTED. (USE PN 12-24664-01)
MKV86·0539

Figure 8 H4000 Transceiver with Removable Tap Nomenclature
The following figure shows the actual connection between the coaxial cable and the contacts.

H4000-10

COAXIAL
LE

CENTER
CONDUCTOR
BACKING
PIN

::r:
.f:>.
o

-TRANSCEIVER
MODULE
15 PIN
D-CONNECTOR

TRANSCEIVER
MODULE
TK-9342

Figure 9 H4000 Ethernet Transceiver: Cutaway View Showing Coaxial Cable Interface

~
~
~

H4000 CABLING
Cabling

The following figure illustrates the procedure for connecting and locking the transceiver cable in place.
The transceiver cable should be secured with a cable tie as shown for strain relief.

WHEN CONNECTOR STRAIN
RELIEF IS DESIRED, THE
TRANSCEIVER CABLE MAY
BE SECURED TO THE
COAXIAL CABLE WITH A

IF DIFFICULT TO LOCK, SEE
"PROPER SLIDE-LATCH
ASSEMBLY" ILLUSTRATED
IN THE "CABLES" SECTION
OF THIS MANUAL.

CABLE

MKV86·0540

Figure 10 Typical Transceiver Cable Connection

H4000-12

H4000 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostics
There are no diagnostics designed specifically for the H4000 Ethernet transceiver. The following diagnostics, however, may be helpful in isolating faults to the transceiver.
•

NIE (Network Exerciser) - See Network Troubleshooting in this volume of the Communications Options Minireference Manual.

•

Functional diagnostics for the device connected to the transceiver (refer to specific device for
applicable diagnostics).

H4000-13

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Required Equipment
The following equipment is required for isolating faulty H4000 Ethernet transceivers.
•

H4000-TA (or -TB for non-U.S. versions) transceiver tester.

Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
The following items are FRUs for the H4000 transceiver.

H4000 with Inclusive Tap

•
•
•

54-14966-00
29-24339
H4000

Transceiver Module
Braid Contacts (Box of 100)
H4000 Transceiver

H4000 with Removable Tap

•
•
•
•
•

H4000 Assembly
Transceiver Module
AMP TAP III
Braid Contacts
Push Pins

70-27780-00
54-14966-00
12-24664-01
12-24664-04
74-32789-01

H4000-14

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
The following troubleshooting flow diagram illustrates the procedures for locating a malfunctioning
H4000 Ethernet transceiver.

CONFIGURE H4000-T
TESTER FOR LOOPBACK
TESTING (REFER TO
FIGURE 12)

PERFORM CORRECTIVE'
ACTION (REFER TO TABLE
1)

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

* DID THE SYMPTOM CHANGE? IF SO,
THEN A NEW OR ADDITIONAL PROBLEM
MAY EXIST. REPLACE THE ORIGINAL
MODULE TO SEE IF THE ORIGINAL
SYMPTOMS RETURN. THIS NEW
INFORMATION MAY BE USEFUL IN
ANALYZING THE PROBLEM.
MKV86·0541

Figure 11

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

H4000-1S

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

CONNECT A SECOND
H4000-T TESTER TO
ANOTHER INSTALLED
H4000 TRANSCEIVER

MKV84·1286

Figure 11

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

H4000-16

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

VERIFY OPERATION OF
THE SECOND
TRANSCEIVER

_
{

1. SET H4000-T MODE
SWITCH TO "'TX/RX"'
2. PRESS AND RELEASE
THE "'RESET" BUTTON

Y
PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION (REFER TOTABLE
1)

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

MKV84-1287

Figure 11

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

H4000-17

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

CONFIGURE BOTH
TESTERS FOR
END-TO-END
CONNECTIVITY TEST
(REFER TO FIGURE 131)

PRESS THE "RESET"
BUTTON ON THE H4000-T
TESTER CONNECTED TO
THE UUT

PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION (REFER TO TABLE
2)

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTI NG
RETURN NETWORK TO
NORMAL
CONFIGURATION

*'010 THE SYMPTOM CHANGE? IF SO,
THEN A NEW OR ADDITIONAL PROBLEM
MAY EXIST. REPLACE THE ORIGINAL
MODULE TO SEE IF THE ORIGINAL
SYMPTOMS RETURN. THIS NEW
INFORMATION MAY BE USEFUL IN
ANALYZING THE PROBLEM.
MKV86·0542

Figure 11

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

H4000-18

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

The following figure shows a configuration for a single H4000-T transceiver tester connected to an H4000
UUT (unit under test).
ETHERNET
COAXIAL
CABLE

~r-----1
500HM
TERMINATOR

500HM
TERMINATOR

H4000 UUT
(UNIT UNDER TEST)

~ETHERNET

~TRANSCEIVER CABLE

~
H4OOO-T
TRANSCEIVER TESTER
("TX/RX" MODE)

ETHERNET
CONTROLLER

MKV86-0543

Figure 12

Typical H 4000-T Configuration for Loopback Testing

H4000-19

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS
The following figure shows a configuration for two H4000-T transceiver testers connected for end-to-end
connectivity testing. One tester is set in TX/RX mode, the other tester is set in RX ONLY mode.
ETHERNET COAXIAL
CABLE

~~L.....--1

500HM
TERMINATOR

500HM

TERMINATOR

H4000 UUT
(UNIT UNDER TEST)

¥~ETHERNET

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

~
H4000-T
TRANSCEIVER TESTER
("RX ONLY" MODE)

H4000-T
TRANSCEIVER TESTER
("TX/RX" MODE)

MKV86-0S44

Figure 13

Typical H4000-T Configuration for End-to-End Testing

H4000-20

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 1 H4000-T Indications and Corrective Action (TX/RX Mode)
Corrective Action*

Lamp

Indication

DATA
PASS

Data packet transmitted
and received correctly.

DATA
FAIL

Data packet not
received correctly.

Repair/replace:
•
Check tap (Ohm out)
•
Transceiver cablet
•
Module:\:
•
Check tap for bent or broken
contacts
•
Retap
•
Replace entire H4000 transceiver

COLLISION
TEST

Collision test signal
not received after
sending data packet.

Repair/replace:
•
Transceiver cablet
•
Module:\:

COLLISION

Intermittent light:
Normal collision
signal received.

Steady light:
Late collision.

If COLLISION is ON and SELF-TEST
is flashing, check for:
•
Missing terminators
•
Malfunctioning controller
•
Improperly configured network

TIMEOUT

Carrier signal not
received within
19 microseconds.

Repair/replace:
•
Check tap (Ohm out)
•
Transceiver cablet
•
Module
•
Retap

SELF
TEST
PASS

Indicates successful self-test
when flashed every 3-4
seconds.

*When several FRUs are suggested for replacement, begin by replacing the first of the several items.
tMake sure that the transceiver cable is properly assembled. Check "Proper Slide-Latch Assembly"
illustrated in the "CABLES" section of this manual.
:\:Before replacing module, remove power by disconnecting transceiver cable.

H4000-21

84000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 2 84000-T Indications and Corrective Action (RX ONLY Mode)
Lamp

Indication

DATA
PASS

Data packet received
correctly.

DATA
FAIL

Data packet not
received correctly.

Corrective Action*

If DATA PASS lamp is lit
on TXjRX tester:
Check tap (Ohm out)
Troubleshoot cable plant
Replace UUT
Retap

•
•
•

•

COLLISION
TEST

Not used.

COLLISION

Steady light:
If the COLLISION lamp is also lit on the
TXjRX tester, check for:
Missing terminators
Malfunctioning controller
Improperly configured network

Normal or late
collision.

TIMEOUT

Not used.

SELF
TEST
PASS

Steady ON indicates
the single self-test
was successful.

•
•
•

*When several FRUs are suggested for replacement, begin by replacing the first of the several items.

H4000-22

H4000 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 3

H4000 Tech Tips/FCO Index

Tech
Tip No.

Title

Speed
Bulletin

ETHERNET-TT-2

Recommended Use of H4000 and Physical
Channel Coax

313

H4000-TT-3

Transceiver Tester DELNI

385

H4000-TT-4

H4000 W /Removable Tap

408

H4000-TT-5

H4000 Braid Connectors

418

H4000-TT-6

Transceiver Tap and Coaxial Cable
Compatibility

449

H4000-23

H4005 INSTALLATION

H4005 802.3 TRANSCEIVER
General Description
An H400S 802.3 transceiver provides a physical and electrical interface between an Ethernet coaxial cable
and other Ethernet devices such as controllers, repeaters, network interconnect devices, and so on, via the
transceiver cable. The H400S transceiver has a switch selectable heartbeat that should be disabled when used
with devices that do not require heartbeat.
The transceiver clamps directly onto the coaxial cable and has a IS-pin male D-connector for connecting to a
transceiver cable. Power to drive the transceiver (+11.40 to +lS.75 Vdc) is provided by the connected
device.
The H400S transceiver is transparent to the data layers and is not addressable or programmable in any way.
ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE
[MAX. TOTAL LENGTH: 500 M (1640.4 FT)]

:;::l,----C
~
TERMINATOR

\(
500HM
TERMINATOR

802.3
TRANSCEIVER CABLE

H4005 DIGITAL
802.3
TRANSCEIVER

CONTROLLER

STATION 1 INTERFACE

STATION N* INTERFACE

*N ~ 100 PER 500 M (1640.4 FT) COAXIAL CABLE SEGMENT
MKV88·1904

Figure 1 Typical H4005 Transceiver Configuration
H4005 Versions
The H400S is the only version of the H400S Ethernet transceiver.
H4005 Transceiver Components
The following parts are supplied with the H400S transceiver.
•

H 400 S transceiver

•

Tap assembly

•

H4005 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver with Removable Tap Assembly Installation Card.
H4005-J

H4005 INSTALLATION

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information regarding the H4005 Ethernet transceiver.

•

H4005 DIGITAL Ethernet Transceiver with Removable Tap
Assembly Installation Card

EK-H4005-IN

•

DEC Standard 134, Ethernet Specifications

EL-OOO 134-00

•

DECconnect System Installation and Verification Guide

EK-DECSY-va

•

Etherjack Installation Guide

EK-DEXJK-IN

•

H4000- T Ethernet Transceiver Tester User Guide

EK-ETHTT-ua

System Placement
System placement is not applicable to the H4005 transceiver.
Device Placement
The H4005 transceiver clamps directly onto an Ethernet coaxial cable. Note the following constraints.
•

A maximum of 100 transceivers may be placed on a single SOO m (1640.4 ft) Ethernet coaxial
cable segment.

•

Transceivers must be positioned on (±5 cm [1.97 in]) the annular rings marked every 2.S m
(S.2 ft) on the coaxial cable.

•

Spacing between transceivers may not be less than 2.S m (S.2 ft).

•

Cannot be used with Ethernet repeater (DEREP). Use H4000 transceiver with the DEREP
repeater.
NOTE
If annular rings are not marked on the coaxial cable,
transceivers must be spaced in multiples of 2.5 m
(8.2 ft) only.

Required Equipment
The following equipment is required for installing an H400S Ethernet transceiver.
•

H4000-TA/TB transceiver tester (must be IEEE 802.3 compatible)

•

CD Kit (Part Number: A2-WllOS-1O)

•

Installation Tool (Part Number: 12-24664-02)

Power Requirements
An H4005 transceiver requires -11.40 to +IS.75 Vdc for proper operation. The power is supplied by the
following source.
•

The Ethernet device to which the transceiver is connected.

H4005-2

H4005 INSTALLATION

Installation Flow Diagram
The following flow diagram outlines the H4005 transceiver installation process.

OBTAIN CUSTOMERSPECIFIC INFORMATION:
• AVAILABILITY OF
CONSIDERATIONS

TRANSCEIVER CABLE
• LOCATION FOR ETHERJACK
CONNECTOR (IF USED)

UNPACKANDVERIFYALL
COMPONENTS RECEIVED

INSTALL TRANSCEIVER
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
IN H4005 TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION CARD

SET HEARTBEAT SWITCH
SEE FIGURE 3

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER
CABLE TO H4005
TRANSCEIVER AND LOCK
IN PLACE (REFER TO
FIGURE 5)

MKV88·1903

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet I of 3)

H400S-3

H4005 INSTALLATION

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER
CABLE TO H4000-T
TESTER

GO TO
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOW DIAG RAM

DISCONNECT
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FROM H4000-T TESTER

MKV84-1280

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

H4005-4

H4005 INSTALLATION

INSTALL ETHERJACK
CONNECTORS
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
IN "DEXJK ETHERJACK
INSTALLATION GUIDE"

GO TO INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES FOR
SPECIFIC DEVICE

INITIATE CUSTOMER
ACCEPTANCE

C__

E_XIT _ )

MKV86-0537

Figure 2

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

H4005-5

H4005 INSTALLATION

Heartbeat Selection
The H4005 transceiver is normally shipped in the heartbeat enabled configuration. Disable heartbeat when
installing with devices that do not require heartbeat.
NOTE
H4005 transceivers should be used with all Digital
Equipment Corporation Ethernet products except
DEREP repeaters. H4000 transceivers should be
- used with DEREP repeaters.
Heartbeat should be enabled when the H4005 transceiver is used with DIGITAL products except with
DEMPRjDELNI or DEMPR in an 802.3 network.
When used with non-DIGITAL products, follow the
vendor's recommendations.

SWITCHES DOWN
HEARTBEAT
DISABLED

SWITCHES UP
HEARTBEAT
ENABLED

NOTES
1. SWITCHES TOWARD DIMPLE ENABLE HEARTBEAT.
2. SWITCHES AWAY FROM DIMPLE DISABLE HEARTBEAT.
MKV88-1912

Figure 3

Setting the H4005 Heartbeat Switches

H4005-6

H4005 INSTALLATION

Installation Hardware
The following figure shows the positions of the center conductor contact and braid contacts. Also shown is
the clamping block. The clamping block holds the coaxial cable so that it connects with the center conductor
contact and braid contacts.

CD
CD

o
o
®
®

CLAMP SCREW
CLAMP ASSEMBLY
BRAID CONTACTS
TAP BODY
PROBE ASSEMBLY
PUSH PINS
TRANSCEIVER D-SUBMINIATURE CONNECTOR

NOTE:
BRAID CONTACTS FROM EARLIER VERSIONS OF THE H4000 CANNOT BE
SUBSTITUTED. (USE PN 12-24664-04)

MKV86·0584

Figure 4

Hardware for Installing the H4005 Transceiver
on a Cable
H4005-7

H4005 CABLING

Cabling
The following figure illustrates the procedure for connecting and locking the transceiver cable in place. The
transceiver cable should be secured with a cable tie as shown for strain relief.

NOTE
For new installs, 802.3 cables are required. When
replacing an H4000 transceiver with an H4005
transceiver, it is recommended that the Ethernet
transceiver cable be replaced with an 802.3 transceiver cable. Failure to do so could result in some network
problems in noisy environments.

CONNECTOR STRAIN
RELIEF IS DESI RED, THE
TRANSCEIVER CABLE MAY
BE SECURED TO THE
COAXIAL CABLE WITH A
CABLE TIE.

LOCK~

PUSH TO
IF DIFFICULT TO LOCK, SEE
"PROPER SLIDE-LATCH
ASSEMBLY" ILLUSTRATED
IN THE "CABLES·· SECTION
OF THIS MANUAL.

•
•

MKV86·0585

Figure 5

Typical Transceiver Cable Connection

H4005-8

H4005 DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics
There are no diagnostics designed specifically for the H4005 Ethernet transceiver. The following diagnostics,
however, may be helpful in isolating faults to the transceiver.

•

NIE (Network Interconnect Exerciser) - See Network Troubleshooting in this volume of the

Communications Options Minireference Manual.
•

Functional diagnostics for the device connected to the transceiver (refer to specific device for
applicable diagnostics).

H4005-9

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Required Equipment
The following equipment is required for isolating faulty H4005 Ethernet transceivers.,
•

H4000-TA (or -TB for non-U.S. versions) transceiver tester (latest version).

Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
the following items are FRUs for the H4005 transceiver.
•
•
•

Braid contacts (box of 100)
AMP Tap III
H4005 transceiver (FRU)

12-24664-02
12- 24664~0 1
70-22781-01

H4005-10

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
The following troubleshooting flow diagram illustrates the procedures for locating a malfunctioning H4005
Ethernet transceiver,

CONFIGURE H4000-T
TESTER FOR LOOPBACK
TESTING (REFER TO
FIGURE 7)

PERFORM CORRECTIVE'
ACTION (REFER TO TABLE
1)

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

Figure 6

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

H4005-11

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

CONNECT A SECOND
H4000-T TESTER TO
ANOTHER INSTALLED
H4005 TRANSCEIVER

MKV86-0581

Figure 6

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

H4005-12

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

VERIFY OPERATION OF
THE SECOND
TRANSCEIVER

1. SET H400{}-T MODE
SWITCH TO "TX/RX"

_
{

2. PRESS AND RELEASE
THE "RESET" BUTTON

Y
PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION (REFER TO TABLE
1)

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING

MKV84·'287

Figure 6

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

H4005-13

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

CONFIGURE BOTH
TESTERS FOR
END-TO-ENO
CONNECTIVITY TEST
(REFER TO FIGURE 8)

PRESS THE "RESET"
BUTTON ON THE H4000-T
TESTER CONNECTED TO
THE UUT

PERFORM CORRECTIVE
ACTION (REFER TO TABLE
2)

GO TO NETWORK
TROUBLESHOOTING
RETURN NETWORK TO
NORMAL
CONFIGURATION

*-010 THE SYMPTOM CHANGE? IF SO,
THEN A NEW OR ADDITIONAL PROBLEM
MAY EXIST. REPLACE THE ORIGINAL
MODULE TO SEE IF THE ORIGINAL
SYMPTOMS RETURN. THIS NEW
INFORMATION MAY BE USEFUL IN
ANALYZING THE PROBLEM.
MKV84-1288

Figure 6

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

H4005-14

H400S MAINTENANCE AIDS

esting Configurations
'he following figure shows a configuration for a single H4000-T transceiver tester connected to an H4005
JUT (unit under test),
ETHERNET
COAXIAL
CABLE

'S:1"--------,L
~ ~
TERMINATOR

50 OHM
TERMINATOR
H4005 UUT
(UNIT UNDER TEST)

~802,3
TRANSCEIVER CABLE

H4000-T
TRANSCEIVER TESTER
("TX/RX" MODE)

CONTROLLER

MKV88-1905

Figure 7

Typical H4000-T Configuration for Loopback Testing

H4005-1S

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

The following figure shows a configuration for two H4000-T transceiver testers connected for end-to-enc
connectivity testing. One tester is set in TXjRX mode, the other tester is set in RX ONLY mode.
ETHERNET 90AXIAL
CABLE

7.l______L~
TERMINATOR

50 OHM
TERMINATOR
H4005 UUT
(UNIT UNDER TEST)

H4000-T
TRANSCEIVER TESTER
("RX ONLY" MODE)

802.3
TRANSCEIVER CABLE

H4000-T
TRANSCEIVER TESTER
('TX/RX" MODE)

MKV88·1906

Figure 8

Typical H4000-T Configuration for End-to-End Testing

H4005-16

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 1 H4000-T Lal!lPS and Corrective Action (TX/RX Mode)
Lamp

Indication

Corrective Action*

DATA PASS

Data packet transmitted
and received correctly

None

DATA FAIL

Data packet not received correctly

Repair/replace:
- Transceiver
- Bent or broken contacts
- Transceiver cable* *
- Connection (retap)

COLLISION
TEST

If heartbeat is disabled, collision
test failure is normal.

None

Collision test signal not received
after sending data packet

Repair/replace:
- Transceiver cable**
- Transceiver

COLLISION

Intermittent light:
COLLISION ON and
TIMEOUT ON

Check shorted coax

COLLISION ON and
SELF-TEST flashing

Check for:
- Missing terminators
- Defective controller
- Improperly configured network
- Open cable

TIMEOUT

Carrier signal not received
within 19 microseconds

Repair/replace:
- Transceiver cable**
- Transceiver

SELF TEST
PASS

If TIMEOUT is ON and
COLLISION is ON

Check for shorted coax

SELF-TEST flashing every
3 to 4 seconds

None

* When several FRUs are listed, begin with the first one before trying the others.
** Ensure that the transceiver cable is properly assembled and is an 802.3 Ethernet transceiver cable.

H4005-17

H4005 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 2 H4000-T Lamps and Corrective Action (RX ONLY Mode)
Lamp

Indication

Corrective Action

DATA PASS

Data packet received correctly

None

DATA FAIL

Data packet not received
correctly (DATA PASS
lamp lit on TXjRX tester)

Replace transceiver
Check tap (ohm out)
Troubleshoot cable plant

COLLISION
TEST

Not used

COLLISION

Steady light
If COLLISION lamp is
also lit on TXjRX tester

Check for:
- Missing terminators
- Defective controller
- Improperly configured network

TIMEOUT

Not used

SELF TEST
PASS

Steady ON

None

H4005-IS

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

LAN Bridge 100
General Description
The LAN Bridge 100 is a device that connects two 802.3. and/or Ethernet 10 Mbit CSMA/CD local area
networks (LANs) together such that they appear as one extended LAN.
Features of the LAN Bridge 100 include the following:
•

Operates as a packet forwarding filter between two baseband and/or broadband Ethernet
networks.

•

Performs packet forwarding without creating an excessive communications bottleneck.

•

Supports network management capabilities, which include but are not limited to:
Monitoring packets transmitted and packets dropped
Monitoring Ethernet activity (such as, number of collisions)
Accessing counters over the Ethernet from host applications.

•

Connects to H4000, H4005, DESTA, DEMPR, DELNI, DECOM, or Ethernet/IEEE 802.3
transceivers.

The LAN Bridge 100 can also be used as a LAN Traffic Monitor (LTM). The LAN Traffic Monitor is an
Ethernet monitor that uses the LAN Bridge 100 as a hardware base. The LAN Bridge 100 processes 48-bit
Ethernet addresses and the LTM software calculates the Ethernet packet statistics. The statistics are
periodically reported to a host system that performs additional data reduction, such as averaging and peak
traffic analysis. There are two components of an LTM:
•

The LTM Listener - A LAN Bridge 100 unit that is down-line loaded with LTM monitoring
software.

•

The LTM User Interface (UI) - Remote application software that is installed on any DECnet
VAX/VMS syste~ with an Ethernet controller and associated driver.

Down-line loading capability is being added to all LAN Bridge 100 devices with revision E and higher. This
capability is necessary for the LAN Bridge 100 to operate as a LAN Traffic Monitor.
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information relative to the LAN Bridge 100.

•
•
•
•
•

LAN Bridge 100 Installation/User's Guide

EK-DEBET-UG

LAN Bridge 100 Technical Manual

EK-DEBET-TM

DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide

EK-DECSY-CG

Remote Bridge Managemeftt Software Guide

AA-FY93A-TE

LAN Traffic Monitor User's Guide

AA-1P16A-TE

LBlOO-l

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

Configuration
For message traffic purposes, LANs connected by bridges are considered one extended LAN. For configuration purposes, however, LANs connected by bridges are considered separate. Each of these LANs can be
configured up to the normal maximums for length, number of stations, and other specifications. For further
information about configuring bridges and LANs, see the DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide.
There are three versions of the LAN Bridge 100. One version is local bridge and the other two are remote
bridges. The local LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-A A or -AB) connects two LANs that are separated by less
than 100 m (328 ft). This is the maximum combined length of the LAN Bridge 100 transceiver cables, each
of which can be up to 50 m (164 ft). See Figure 1.
The remote LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-RC or -RD) connects two LANs together through a transceiver
cable and a fiber optic cable. The fiber optic cable connects to another remote bridge (DEBET-RC/RD
or -RH/RJ) or to a remote repeater (DEREP-RC/RD or -RH/RJ). See Figure 2.
The remote LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-RH or -RJ) connects two LANs together through a transceiver cable
and a fiber optic cable. The fiber optic cable connects to another remote bridge (DEBET-RC/RD
or -RH/RJ) or to a remote repeater (DEREP-RC/RD or -RH/RJ). See Figure 2.

STATION
STANDARD ETHERNET
CABLE

TRANSCEIVER CABLES
EACH UP TO 50 M (166 FT)

STATION

MKV87-1238

Figure 1

DEBET-AA or -AB Configuration

LBIOO-2

5-50 M
(16.4-164 FT)

DEBET-RC/RD OR
-RH/RJ
"Tl

dQ"
~

FIBER OPTIC LINK
UP TO 3000 M (9843 FT)

Ci
tT1

tl'

tT1
~

:;:c
()

t""'
tl'
......

..........

9
w

:;:c
Ci
"'"t

::r:

..........

FIBER OPTIC LINK
UP TO 1500 M (4922 FT)

~
~

g"
l:)

"'"t

§:

DEBET-RC/RD OR
-RH/RJ

=
Z
Q

5-50 M
(16.4-164 FT)

~
MKV88-1841

~
~

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

Transceiver cables connect to baseband transceivers (H4000), to local network interconnects (DELNI), or to
broadband modems (DECOM). See Figure 3 for LAN Bridge 100 connections.
For a remote bridge-to-remote repeater link, up to 1500 m (4921.5 ft) of fiber optic cable is allowed. Note
that the length of the fiber optic link depends on the total length of the network on the repeater side of the
link (this length includes the fiber optic cable between the bridge and the repeater). The maximum network
length on the repeater side of the link is 2800 m (9186.8 ft). This includes the fiber optic link up to the LAN
Bridge 100. For more information on bridge-to-repeater configurations, see the DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide.

IEEE 802.3 BASEBAND

H4000

LAN BRIDGE 100

FIBER-OPTIC
LINK

ETHERNET BASEBAND

IEEE 802.3 BASEBAND
MKV86·0522

Figure 3

LAN Bridge 100 Connections

LBIOO-4

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION
Fiber Optic Cable Between Bridges
In a bridge-to-bridge configuration, the dual cable fiber optic link that connects the bridges together does not
affect the cable configuration guidelines of either of the LANs connected to the bridges. The length of fiber
optic cable between the two bridges must not exceed 3000 m (9843 ft).

CAUTIONS
Follow the guidelines in the LAN Bridge 100 Technical Manual (EK-DEBET-TM';:003 or later), Appendix B. It is extremely important that the recommendations for optical budgets, derating factors, and fiber
types are followed.
Exceeding the 3000 m (9843 ft) limit and/or exceeding the loss budget will cause the bridge configuration
to fail.
To achieve these longer distances, particularly beyond 1500 m (4921.5 ft), the fiber optic cable installation
must be carefully planned. The type and quality of the cable's optical fiber, the cable repair strategy, and
the cable's total end-to-end light loss are very important considerations when planning a successful bridge
installation.
The end-to-end light loss depends on the quality of the fiber, the number and quality of the splices required
for installation, and the number and quality of the connectors used. The cable repair strategy also affects the
optical budget because damaged cables may be repaired. The repair typically consists of replacing a section
of cable requiring two splices. The repaired link must remain under the end-to-end light loss budget. If the
initial installation uses the entire budget, a repair would not be possible. Therefore, plan for 1.0 dB for repair.
For longer cable runs, or for installation requiring more splices, request a lower loss fiber optic cable from the
vendor. Cables with less than 3 dB/km (measured at 850 nm) are available. For more information on fiber
optic links, see the LAN Bridge 100 Technical Manual (EK-DEBET-TM), Appendix B, and the DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide (EK-DECSY-FC), Chapter 9.

LBIOO-5

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION
LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-RH/RJ) Fiber Optic Attenuator
The DEBET-RH/RJ fiber optic attenuator (PN 12-30068-01) is a device that induces a loss of 3 dB in a
fiber optic system. The attenuator is designed to be used for 100/140 fiber optic links that are 1000 m
(3281 ft) or less.
The attenuator is installed when a DEBET-RH/RJ is connected to another DEBET-RH/RJ or to a
DEREP-RH/RJ (Figure 4).
NOTES
If a special condition exists and more budget is
required, the attenuator can be removed. This will
increase the budget by 3 dB.
DO NOT install the attenuator for 100/140 fiber
optic links beyond 1000 m (3281 ft).
DO NOT install the attenuator for 50/125,
62.5/125, and 85/125 fiber optic links.
ATTENUATOR IS INSTALLED
ON BOTH SIDES

DEBET -

RH/RJ

.-..- 1000 M OR LESS ~
100/140 FIBER
DEREP - RH/RJ OR DEBET
- RH/RJ
MKV88·1847

Figure 4

Attenuator Installed on Both Sides

LBIOO-6

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

The attenuator is also installed when a DEBET-RH/RJ is connected to a DEBET-RC/RD or to a
DEREP-RC/RD (Figure 5).
NOTES
Install the attenuator on one side only by attaching
the attenuator to the output (transmit) connector on
the DEBET-RH/RJ.

If an older DEBET-RC/RD is being used with a
newer DEBET-RH/RJ, the guidelines and budgets of
the DEBET-RC/RD must be followed. Refer to
LAN Bridge 100 Hardware Installation/Owner's
Guide (EK-DEBET-UG), Section 3.4.
ATTENUATOR IS INSTALLED
ON ONE SIDE ONLY

RX
~ 1 000 M OR LESS ~

100/140 FIBER
DEBET - RH/RJ

DEREP - RC/RD OR DEBET
- RC/RD

MKV88-1846

Figure 5 Attenuator Installed on DEBET-RH/RJ Side Only

LBIOO-7

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

Use the following guidelines and the flowchart in Figure 6 to install the attenuator on the DEBET-RH/RJ.

Installation Guidelines
•

Install the attenuator between the fiber optic cable connector (SMA 906) and the TX connector
on the DEBET-RH/RJ unit.

•

Install only one attenuator per unit.

•

Install attenuators on both TX connectors if both units are DEBET-RH/RJs.

•

Label the fiber optic cable (TX) "3 dB."

•

DO NOT install the attenuator on the RX end of the fiber optic cable.

•

DO NOT install attenuators on both ends of the same optical fiber.

•

DO NOT install the attenuator on a DEBET-RC/RD unit.

LBIOO-8

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

START

t
REMOVE THE
PROTECTIVE CAPS
FROM THE FIBER
OPTIC CABLE
CONNECTORS AND
FROM THE
DEBET-RH/RJ FIBER
OPTIC CONNECTORS.
(SEE FIGURE 16)

+
REMOVE THE
ATTENUATOR FROM
TH E PLASTIC BAG *

t
INSTALL THE
ATTENUATOR
BETWEEN THE SOURCE
(TX) FIBER OPTIC
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
AND THE FIBER OPTIC
CABLE CONNECTOR
(SMA 906). (SEE
FIGURE 17) **

~
CONNECT THE FIBER
OPTIC CABLE.
FINGER-TIGHTEN THE
FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTORS

t
* CAUTION
THE ATTENUATOR MUST BE KEPT FREE OF DIRT
AND DUST TO ENSURE PROPER INSTALLATION.

** NOTE
THE ATTENUATOR MAY FALL FROM THE CONNECTOR
DURING INSTALLATION. BEFORE SCREWING THE
CABLE INTO THE CONNECTOR. ENSURE THAT THE
ATTENUATOR IS STILL IN PLACE.

PLACE ATTENUATOR
LABEL ON THE
TRANSMIT CABLE OF
THE FIBER OPTIC
CABLE. (SEE FIGURE
18)

STOP

MKV88-1843

Figure 6

DEBET-RH/RJ Attenuator Installation Flowchart

LBIOO-9

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

LAN Traffic Monitor Configurations
The LAN Traffic Monitor can be configured in several ways. In Figure 7, the LTM Listener always
monitors Ethernet 2 and sends statistics to the LTM User Interface on Ethernet 2. Port B has a loopback
connector installed and is not in operation. As long as the LAN Bridge 100 connects the two LANs, the
Listener can send statistics to a User Interface on Ethernet 1.

NOTE
The LAN Bridge 100 will fail self-test if either port
is disconnected. A loopback connector must be connected to the unused port.
ETHERNET1
PORTA

LAN Bridge 100

PORT B

ETHERNET 2

PORT A
VAX/VMS
(LTM USER
INTERFACE)

LTM LISTENER

PORT B

LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
MKV87-1240

Figure 7

LAN Traffic Monitor Connected to One Port

LBIOO-lO

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION
Figure 8 shows the LTM Listener connected to two completely separate LANs. In this example, the LAN
Traffic Monitor can monitor either Ethernet 1 or 2, but will report to the LTM User Interface on Ethernet 1.

VAX/VMS
(LTM USER
INTERFACE)
ETHERNET 1

PORT A

LTM LISTENER

IPORT B

ETHERNET 2

MKV87-1241

Figure 8

LAN Traffic Monitor Connected to Two Separate LANs

The configuration in Figure 9 shows two Ethernet LANs that are bridged together, forming a single
extended LAN. The LTM Listener can monitor either Ethernet 1 or 2 and can report on either port. It is
recommended that the LTM Listener be configured to report on the port that has the least number of
intervening bridges between it and the LTM User Interface hostCs). Doing so will minimize the impact of a
bridge failure.

VAX/VMS
(LTM USER
INTERFACE)
ETHERNET 1

PORT A

LTM LISTENER

PORT B

LAN Bridge 100

ETHERNET 2

PORT B

MKV87-1242

Figure 9

LAN Traffic Monitor on Two Connected LANs

LBI00-ll

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

When configured as an LTM Listener, down-line loading is enabled (either by remotely setting the NVRAM
RESET switch to ENABLED with RBMS, or by setting hardware Switch 5 to the DOWN position). The
unit then initiates a request for a down-line load of the LTM Listener software image from a load host. The
down-line loading of the LTM Listener software image could take up to 2 minutes if the network is busy.
NOTE
If RBMS software is used to manage the LAN Traffic Monitor, be sure that the DOWN-LINE LOAD
ENABLE switch (Switch 5, Figure 12) is set to the
OFF position (UP=OFF). Setting this switch to the
ON position (DOWN=ON) when not using RBMS
software, configures the unit as a LAN Traffic
Monitor.
The LTM Listener has two modes of operation: Waiting for a Start Request and Monitoring. After poweron (or after a RESET command), the LTM Listener hardware is in the "Waiting for a Start Request" mode.
This mode is identified by the On-Line indicator flashing at 2-second intervals (that is, it flashes twice, then
waits 2 seconds before flashing twice again). During this waiting process, the LTM Listener listens to both
Ethernet ports for a Start Request from an LTM host. The Start Request contains the initialization
information for the LTM Listener and requests the Listener to begin monitoring.
After receiving a Start Request, the LTM Listener hardware enters the "monitoring" mode (identified by the
On-Line indicator flashing once every second).
NOTE
If the On-Line indicator remains ON without blinking, it indicates that the unit is operating as a bridge,
not as an LTM.
LAN Traffic Monitor Software
The basic software for installing and operating the LTM is as follows:
•

LAN Traffic Monitor distribution software - Installed on each LTM load host.

•

DECnet Phase IV software running on VAX Version 4.4 or later - Installed on each LTM load
host.

The distribution software must be installed on a load host that runs DECnet Phase IV software and is
connected to the same Ethernet segment as the LTM Listener. The distribution software includes an LTM
Listener software image file that is down-line loaded to the LTM Listener.
LAN Traffic Monitor Functions
When the LAN Bridge 100 is configured to operate as a LAN Traffic Monitor, the LTM Listener software
image must be down-line loaded from a load host. The LTM does not operate without software.
If RBMS software is used to remotely manage the LTM, ensure that the DOWN-LINE LOAD ENABLE
switch, Switch 5 (see Figure .12), is set to the OFF position (UP=OFF). This will allow remote down-line
loading requests. With Switch 5 in the down (ON) position, the LAN Bridge 100 cannot operate as a bridge.
RBMS initiated software overrides the hardware switch setting (only when the switch is in the up [OFF]
position) and can remotely configure the unit between operation as an LTM or LAN Bridge 100.

Whenever power is applied to the LAN Bridge 100, the DC OK indicator illuminates and the unit performs
a diagnostic self-test. The diagnostic self-test normally takes about 20 seconds to complete and, if successful,
causes the Self-Test OK indicator to illuminate.

LB100-12

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

LAN Bridge 100 Component List
The following parts are supplied with each bridge.
Table 1 LAN Bridge 100 Parts List
Description
Local Bridge:
DEBET-AA and -AB

Remote Bridge:
DEBET-RC and -RD

Remote Bridge:
DEBET-RH and -RJ

Part Designation
LAN Bridge 100
Loopback Connectors 2 each
(12-22196-01)
Mounting Brackets
Screws
Power Cord
LAN Bridge 100 Installation/User's Guide
LAN Bridge 100
Loopback Connectors 1 each
(12-22196-01)
Mounting Brackets
Screws
Power Cord
LAN Bridge 100 Installation/User's Guide
LAN Bridge 100
Loopback Connectors 1 each
(12-22196-01)
Fiber Optic Attenuator
(12-30068-01)
Attenuator Label
Mounting Brackets
Screws
Power Cord
Fiber Optic Attenuator Installation
/ Configuration Reference Card
LAN Bridge 100 Installation/User's Guide

System Placement
The LAN Bridge 100 can be located in any convenient location. Typical locations might include either a:
•
•
•
•

Shelf
Table
Rack mount assembly
Wall mount assembly.

Power Requirements
The LAN Bridge 100 operates on ac power, 47 to 63 Hz. A voltage select switch is used to select operation
from 120 Vac or 240 Vac.
The LAN Bridge 100 draws 1.6 A at 120 Vacand 0.9 A at 240 Vac.

LBI00-13

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

YES
UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED (REFER TO
TABLE 1)

PLUG TRANS.CEIVER
CAB LES I NTO PO RT A
AND B ON THE LAN
BRIDGE 100 (SEE
FIGURE 15)

VERIFY VOLTAGE
SWITCH SETTING
(SEE FIGURE 11)

REMOVE THE EIGHT
SCREWS FROM TH E
BOnOM OF THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 13)

PLUG IN BOTH ENDS
OF POWER CORD
(SEE FIGURE 19)

CONNECTION FIBER
OPTIC CABLES TO
PORT A AND A
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
TO PORT B (SEE
FIGURE 16).
IF THE FIBER-OPTIC
ATTENUATOR IS TO
BE INSTALLED ON
THE DEBET-RH/RJ.
(SEE FIGURE 6)

PHYSICAL
INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETE. PROCEED
TO THE
TROUBLESHOOTING
FLOWCHART (FIGURE
20) TO VERIFY
INSTALLATION

FASTEN THE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
TO THE BRIDGE (SEE
FIGURE 14)

MKV88·1842

Figure 10

LAN Bridge 100 Installation Flowchart

LBIOO-14

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION
Table 2 Bridge Indicators
MEANING
Name

ON Steady

OFF

Blinking

Selftest

Passed self-test

Running or failed
self-test

NVRAM* failed and should be
replaced.

On-line

Bridge is fully
operational and
forwarding
messages

Bridge is in INIT,
Preforwarding,
Backup, or Broken
states

Bridge is not receiving a collision
test signal **

Flashes for 2 seconds, then waits
2 seconds before flashing again.
The LTM Listener hardware is
in "Waiting for a Start Request"
mode.
After receiving a Start Request,
the LTM Listener hardware
enters the "Monitoring" mode,
identified by the On-Line indicator flashing once every second.
Port A
Activity

Heavy message
activity on
Port A

No message traffic
on Port A; failure
exists

Light message activity on Port
A. Bridge is checking for loops
once per second.

Port B
Activity

Heavy message
activity on
Port B

No message traffic
on Port B; failure
exists

Light message activity on Port B.
Bridge is checking for loops once
per second.

DC OK

Internal power
supply is
functioning
properly

Internal power supply is
not functioning properly

N/A

* NVRAM stores network pointers and parameters set by RBMS so they will not be lost during a power
failure.
** If connected to a transceiver transmitting heartbeat, the blinking indicates that the transceiver should be
repaired. For transceivers that do not transmit the collision test signal, the blinking is normal.

LBIOO-15

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

PORT A ACTIVITY

DC OK

PORT B ACTIVITY

~N\'
!S'77
A -..== (I) B
1000001

100 V/115 V/120 V
SLIDE THE SWiTCH SO
THAT "120" is ViSiBLE

~
220 V/230 V/240 V

SLIDE THE SWiTCH SO
THAT "240" is ViSiBLE

MKV86-0519

Figure 11

LAN Bridge 100 Indicators

LBIOO-16

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

Table 3 Bridge Switches
FUNCTION
Name

ON/Down

OFF/Up

Loop
Selftest

Bridge continuously
loops self-test to test
remote bridge fiber
optic interface. Fiber
optic looping cable
must be installed. *

Remote bridge fiber optic
interface not tested. Normal
self-test is run through
Ports A and B.

NVRAM
Reset

NVRAM resets to factory
default settings when
bridge is powered ON.
This removes all
bridge management
configuration changes.

Prevents NVRAM from
resetting when bridge is
powered ON. This setting
should be used to prevent
parameters stored by RBMS
from being lost during a
power failure.

Port A
Access

Nodes with bridge
management capability
on the LAN connected
to Port A can WRITE
to the bridge.

Prevents bridge management
WRITE access from nodes on
the LAN connected to Port A.

Port B
Access

Nodes with bridge
management capability
on the LAN connected
to Port B can WRITE
to the bridge.

Prevents bridge management
WRITE access from nodes on
the LAN connected to Port B.

DownLine
Load
Enable

Loading of the software
image from a load host
is enabled. (Unit
cannot be configured
as a LAN Bridge 100.)

RBMS software may override
this hardware switch setting
and can remotely configure
the unit between operation
as an LTM and a bridge.
Normal powerup will place
the unit in LAN Bridge 100
configuration mode.

Not Used

No.

* If the Loop Selftest switch is ON "down," the local bridge will not operate.

LBlOO-I7

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

LOOP SELF-TEST

DOWN-LINE LOAD ENABLE

~ DOWN =ON

UP = OFF

MKV87-1244

Figure 12

LAN Bridge 100 Switches

LBIOO-18

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

BOTTOM

MKV87-1245

Figure 13

LAN Bridge 100 Table Top Enclosure

LBlOO-19

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

NOTE:
BRACKETS ARE SUPPLIED. THE MOUNTING HARDWARE MUST BE OBTAINED SEPARATELY.

NOTE:
THE I/O PANEL CANNOT BE MOUNTED FACE DOWN. THE PREFERRED METHOD IS TO MOUNT
THE I/O PANEL FACING UP.
MKV86-0529

Figure 14

LAN Bridge 100 Rack Mount and Wall Mount Bracket Attachment

LBIOO-20

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

PUSH SLID E LATCH
FIRMLY TO RIGHT
TO LOCK

MKV85-2786

Figure 15

. ns
.
TransceIVer
C'able Connectlo

LBlOO-21

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTORS

..........
-. . 'h:~
~..~ ~PROTECTIVE
~

CAPS

PROTECTIVE
CAPS

FIBER OPTIC CABLE ~ -?1===-::::;;'FINGER TIGHTEN ONLY
MKV87-1246

Figure 16

Fiber Optic Cable Attachment

LBlOO-22

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

ATTENUATOR

-f-~-

FIBER OPTIC
CONNECTOR

HALF
DELRIN

(SMA 906 CONNECTOR)

MKV88-1844

Figure 17

Installing the Attenuator

FIBER OPTIC
OUTPUT

~\~
FIBER OPTIC CABLE

) )\
MKV88-1845

Figure 18

Connecting Fiber Optic Cable to DEBET-RH/RJ

LBI00-23

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

MKV85-2189

Figure 19

Power Cord Attachment

LBI00-24

LAN Bridge 100 CABLING
Cabling
Digital Equipment Corporation sells the BN25B-xx fiber optic cable. This is an indoor, general-purpose,
100/140 dual-fiber cable using Corning 1508 type optical fiber. The BN25B-xx cable cannot be exposed in
an environmental airspace or used outdoors. Digital Equipment Corporation does not sell a cable that can be
used in outdoor applications. For assistance, contact the local DIGITAL Network Design Service.
The actual power levels of emitted light and detected light in Ethernet devices are not essential in the
planning and prediction of a fiber optic network interconnect. The key measurement is the allowable system
loss. System losses are caused by fiber attenuation, barrel connector loss, and splice loss. Table 4 lists fiber
types, typical cable types, and the attenuation associated with each. Table 5 lists the typical loss and worst
case loss for the different types of barrel connectors and splices.
Refer to the "Fiber Optic Cables Between Bridges" section for more information concerning loss budget and
distance limitations, the LAN Bridge 100 Technical Manual (EK-DEBET-TM) Appendix B, and the
DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide (EK-DECSY-FC), Chapter 9.

Corning 1508, 1509, 1517, and 1519 are manufactured by Corning Glass Works.

LB100-25

LAN Bridge 100 CABLING

Table 4 Typical Cable Attenuation
Fiber
Type

Typical Cable
Type

Typical
Attenuation

Corning 1508

100/140; DEC BN25B-xx

4.5 dB/km *

Corning 1519

85/125; Siecor™ loose tube**

3.5 dB/km

Corning 1519

85/125; Siecor tight buffer

4.0 dB/km

Corning 1509 or
AT&T Multimode

62.5/125t; various loose tube

3.0 dB/km

Corning 1517 or
AT&T Multimode

50/125; various loose tube

2.5 dB/km

Corning 151 7 or
AT&T Multimode

50/125; tight buffer tube

4.0 dB/km

* This cable is guaranteed for 6 dB/km under specified applications for all temperature, humidity, and
rated tension conditions.
** Loose tube cable is usually very difficult to terminate with a connector. Splicing a connector cable end
onto the cable is recommended. Siecor is a trademark of Siecor Corp.
t

62.5/125 is the recommended fiber size for new installations using Digital Equipment Corporation
Ethernet products. AT&T Multimode is manufactured by American Telephone and Telegraph.

LBIOO-26

LAN Bridge 100 CABLING

Table 5 Barrel Connector and Splice Losses
Typical Loss
in dB

Worst Case
Loss in dB
(Note 1)

100/140 Amphenol type 906 (stainless steel)

0.8

1.5

50/125 Amphenol type 906 (stainless steel)

1.5

Note 2

62.5/125, 85/125 Amphenol type 906

1.5

Note 2

50/125 AT&T ST type

1.0

1.5

62.5/125 AT&T ST type

0.8

1.2

85/125 AT&T ST type

Note 2

100/140 AT&T ST type

Note 2

Elastomeric

0.1

0.2 (Note 3)

Capillary tube

0.1

0.2 (Note 3)

Fusion

0.05

0.1 (Note 3)

Barrel Connector
or Splice Type
Barrel Connectors

Splices

NOTES
1.

Assumes that the barrel connector is close to
the LED source. This is the worst loss
condition.

Consult vendor information.

Loss assumes the same lot (reel) of fiber is used.
Splicing different lots of fiber will yield results
based on the fiber differences rather than on the
mechanics of the splice.

Amphenol 906 is manufactured by Amphenol, an Allied Company.
AT&T ST is manufactured by American Telephone and Telegraph.

LBlOO-27

LAN Bridge 100 DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostics
There are no software diagnostics designed specifically for the LAN Bridge 100. The LAN Bridge 100 has
its own built-in self-test.

LB100-28

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
LAN Bridge 100 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
When the LAN Bridge 100 is suspected of any malfunctions, the entire bridge unit should be replaced.

Equipment Required
•

Controlled Distribution (CD) spares kit, which includes two transceiver loopback connectors and a
fiber optic cable for testing purposes.

•

The transceiver loopback connectors are used to isolate the bridge from transceiver cables and the
rest of the network.

•

The fiber optic loopback cable replaces the standard fiber optic cable for off-line testing of the
bridge in a fiber optic link. This cable connects Port A transmit to receive.
Table 6 Controller Distribution Spares Kit
Description

Kit Part Number

Local (AA) 115 Vac 60 Hz
Local (AB) 240 Vac 50 Hz
Remote (RC) 115 Vac 60 Hz
Remote (RD) 240 Vac 50 Hz
Remote (RH) 115 Vac 60 Hz
Remote (RJ) 240 Vac 50 Hz

A2-W0948-1 0
A2-W0948-11
A2-WI 043-1 0
A2-W1043-11
A2-MI376-10
A2-M1376-11

Optional Equipment
An H4080 test setup replaces the on-line transceiver for off-line self-testing of the bridge. The loopback
connector supplied with the unit performs the same function as the H4080 test setup except that it does not
check heartbeat.
NOTE
The H4000-TA can be used to test repeaters but
cannot be used to test bridges because all H4000-TA
transceiver testers have the same Ethernet address.
This prevents the bridge from forwarding the test
packets.

LBI00-29

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Use the troubleshooting flowchart in Figure 20 to troubleshoot the bridge.

TROUBLESHOOT
TRANSCEIVER AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR PORT B

REPLACE BRIDGE

TROUBLESHOOT
TRANSCEIVER AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR PORT A

MKV88-1229

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 1 of 8)

LBIOO-30

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

TRANSIENT NVRAM
FAILURE; BRIDGE OK

NVRAM FAILUREREPLACE BRIDGE t

* IN 15 SECONDS
t REFER TO THE "NOTES" IN THE FAULT DIAGNOSIS SECTION OF CHAPTER 5
IN THE LANBridge 100 TECHNICAL MANUAL (EK-DEBET-TM)
MKV88-1228

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 2 of 8)

LBlOO-31

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

PROPERLY CONNECT
BRIDGE TO LANs t

CONNECT LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
TOPORTSA&B

CONNECT FIBER-OPTIC
LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR
TOPORTB

* AFTER 15 SECONDS

t REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS SECTION IN CHAPTER 5
OF THE LAN Bridge 100 TECHNICAL MANUAL (EK-DEBET-TM)
MKV88-1226

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 3 of 8)

LBIOO-32

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

FROM HOST ON PORT A TO HOST ON PORT B

2 DOWN-LINE SWITCH MAY BE ENABLED BY
SWITCH 5 BEING SET OR VIA A
REMOTE COMMAND BY RBMS. SEE
LAN BRIDGE 100 HARDWARE INSTALLAllON/
OWNER'S GUIDE.

3 FLASHING TWICE EVERY 2 SECONDS INDICATES

THAT THE LOAD HOST SUCCESSFULLY DOWN-LINE
LOADED THE LTM LISTENER SOFTWARE IMAGE.
FLASHING ONCE EACH SECOND INDICA 1£S THAT
THE LOAD HOST HAS STARTED THE LTM
LISTENER SOFTWARE.
4 CHECK THAT THE DOWN-LINE LOAD

HOST HAS BEEN SET UP. SEE
LAN TRAFFIC MONITOR INSTALLAllON GUIDE
FOR DETAILS ON SETTING UP A LOAD HOST.
MKV88-1250

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 4 of 8)

LBIOO-33

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE BRIDGE

TROUBLESHOOT
TRANSCEIVER AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FORPORTB

REMOVE LOOPBACK
CONNECTOR FROM
PORTAAND
RECONNECT CABLE

TROUBLESHOOT
TRANSCEIVER AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FOR PORTA

TROUBLESHOOT
TRANSCEIVER AND
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FORPORTB

* AFTER 15 SECONDS

LKG-0774-87

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 5 of 8)

LBlOO-34

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

REPLACE BRIDGE

TROUBLESHOOT
DATA LINKS TO
RESPECTIVE
NETWORK

TROUBLESHOOT
REPEATER

LKG-0774-87

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 6 of 8)

LB100-35

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

1. CONNECT LOOPBACK
CABLE
TO BRIDGE PORT A
2. SET LOOPING
SELF-TEST ON
3. CYCLE BRIDGE AC
POWER

REPLACE BRIDGE

REPEAT FOR
2ND BRIDGE OF PAIR

*AFTER 15 SECONDS

LKG-0174-87

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 7 of 8)

LBlOO-36

LAN Bridge 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

TROUBLESHOOT
DATA LINES TO
RESPECTIVE NETWORKS

CONNECT LOOPBACK
CABLE TO REPEATER
FIBER-OPTIC
INTERFACE

1. CONNECT LOOPBACK
CABLE
TO BRIDGE PORT A
2. SET LOOPING
SELF-TEST ON
3. CYCLE BRIDGE AC
POWER

REPLACE BRIDGE

* AFTER 15 SECONDS
MKV88-1227

Figure 20

Troubleshooting Flowchart (Sheet 8 of 8)

LBIOO-37

LAN Bridge 150 INSTALLATION

LAN Bridge 1SO
General Description
The LAN Bridge 150 hardware unit is a specialized local area network (LAN) station that connects two
IEEE 802.3 and/or Ethernet LANs to form a single extended LAN. The LAN Bridge 150 is a functionally
enhanced LAN Bridge 100. It has all the functionality of the LAN Bridge 100 plus the three additional
features listed below.
•
•
•

Access (password) protection
IEEE 802.1 spanning tree compatibility
IEEE 802.2 test and XID compliance

The LAN Bridge 150 also has a larger physical ROM size than the LAN Bridge 100 and new firmware
code.
There are two versions of the LAN Bridge 150; one local bridge version and one remote bridge version.
The local bridge (DEBET-AC/AD) connects two LANs that are separated by less than 100 m (328 ft).
The remote bridge (DEBET-RP/RQ) connects two LANs that are separated by more than 100 m (328 ft)
up to 3 km (1.9 miles), or where fiber optic capabilities are needed.
Each version of the LAN Bridge 150 has two models and is designated by the model numbers as described in
Table 1.

Table 1

Versions of the LAN Bridge 150

Version

Model

Description

Local

DEBET-AC
DEBET-AD*

Used to connect LANs separated by 100 m (328 ft) or less. The distance
from the bridge to either LAN cannot exceed the maximum allowable
transceiver cable length of 50 m (164 ft).

Remote

DEBET-RP
DEBET-RQ*

Provides 14 dB of usable optical power at 850 nanometers. This version is
used to connect two DEBET-RP/RQ units up to 3 km (1.9 miles) apart,
or a DEBET-RP /RQ and a remote repeater up to 1.5 km (0.93 miles)
apart.

* Voltage select switch is factory set for 240 Vac operation, and the power cord is not supplied.

LBI50-]

LAN Bridge 150 INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the LAN Bridge 1SO.

•
•
•
•

LAN Bridge 150 Installation

EK-LBI SO-IN

LAN Bridge 150 Technical Manual

EK-LBlSO-IM

Bridges and Extended LAN Reference

EK-DEBAM-HR

DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide

EK-DECSY-CG

•

DECconnect System Satellite Equipment Room Installation Guide EK-DECSY-SR

•

DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-FC

•
•
•
•

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Network Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-FI

Remote Bridge Management Software Guide

AA-FY93C-TE

Attenuator Installation and Configuration Reference Card

EK-DEFOE-RC

Network Troubleshooting Guide

EK-339AA-6D

•
•
•

LAN Traffic Monitor Installation Guide

AA-1P15A-IE

LAN Traffic Monitor User's Guide

AA-1P 16A-IE

LAN Traffic Monitor Identification Card

EK-LANTM-IC

Configuration and Installation
Refer to the LAN Bridge 100 option in this volume for information on the configuration and installation of
the LAN Bridge 150.

LB150-2

LAN Bridge 150 CABLING
LAN Bridge 150 Network Interface
The network interface for the LAN Bridge 150 consists of two ports: Port A and Port B. The ports are
located on the bridge I/O panel.
Port A supports an AUI (15-pin standard) transceiver interface for the local bridge (DEBET-AC/ AD) or a
fiber optic interface for the remote bridge (DEBET-RP/RQ).
Port B supports an AUI (15-pin standard) transceiver interface on both the local and remote bridge.
Refer to the LAN Bridge 100 option in this volume for more information on cabling for the LAN
Bridge 150.
Table 2 lists the fiber cable budgets for the LAN Bridge 150 (DEBET-RP/RQ) and the LAN Bridge 100
(DEBET-RH/RJ).

Table 2

Fiber Cable Budgets

Fiber
Size

Available
Power

Minimum
Attenuation

Minimum Cable That Provides
Minimum Attenuation

50/125

8 dB

o dB

0.0 km

62.5/125

12 dB

1 dB

0.3 km

85/125

13 dB

3 dB

0.8 km

100/140

14 dB

4 dB

1.0 km

LB150-3

LAN Bridge 150 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic Self-Test
The LAN Bridge 150 executes a self-test when power is applied. If the LAN Bridge 150 is installed to
operate as a bridge, approximately 45 seconds after power is applied, the state of the status LEDs will
indicate whether a successful self-test has occurred. If the DC OK and the SELF-TEST OK LEDs are lit,
and the Port A Activity and Port B Activity LEDs are lit or blinking, the unit is operating properly. If these
conditions are not met, refer to the troubleshooting section in the LAN Bridge 100 option in this volume.
If the LAN Bridge 150 is installed to operate as a LAN Traffic Monitor, approximately two minutes after
power is applied, the state of the status LEDs will indicate whether a successful self-test has occurred. If the
DC OK and the SELF-TEST OK LEOs are lit, and the Port A Activity and Port B Activity LEDs are lit or
blinking and the ON LINE LED is blinking at 2 second intervals, the unit is operating properly. If these
conditions are not met, refer to the troubleshooting section in the LAN Bridge 100 option in this volume.

Refer to the LAN Bridge 100 option in this volume for a list of the status LEDs and their definitions.

LB1S0-4

LAN Bridge 150 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting
Refer to the troubleshooting flowchart in the LAN Bridge 100 option in this volume to troubleshoot the
LAN Bridge 150.
The LAN Bridge 150 has password protection. If password protection is initiated, the password must be
included with any management command (RBMS Version 2.0).

LBlS0-5

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION
LAN Bridge 200 STATION
General Description
The LAN Bridge 200 hardware unit is a specialized local area network (LAN) station that connects two
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet LANs to form a single extended LAN. The LAN Bridge 200 can be used with
standard Ethernet/lObase5 networks, ThinWire Ethernet/lObase2 networks, and with broadband networks.
Bridge operation is transparent to other stations on the LAN, and no special software is required on any
station.
There are three versions of the LAN Bridge 200 (Figure I); one local bridge version and two remote bridge
versions.
The local bridge (DEBAM-AA/ AB) connects two LANs that are separated by less than 100 m (328 ft).
The remote bridge (DEBAM-RC/RD) connects two LANs that are separated by up to 3 km (1.9 miles).
The remote bridge (DEBAM-RF/RG) connects two LANs that are separated by up to 10 km (6.2 miles).
Each version of the LAN Bridge 200 has two models and is designated by the model numbers as described in
Table 1.
Table 1

Versions of the LAN Bridge 200

Version

Model

Description

Local

DEBAM-AA
DEBAM-AB*

Used to connect LANs separated by 100 m (328 ft) or less. The distance
from the bridge to either LAN cannot exceed the maximum allowable
transceiver cable length of 50 m (164 ft).

Remote
3 km

DEBAM-RC
DEBAM-RD*

Provides 14 dB of usable optical power at 850 nm. This version is used to
connect two DEBAM-RC/RD units up to 3 km (1.9 miles) apart, or a
DEBAM-RC/RD and a DECrepeater 200 remote repeater (DERENRC/RD) up to 1.5 km (0.93 miles) apart.

Remote
10 km

DEBAM-RF
DEBAM-RG*

Provides 17 dB of usable optical power at 1300 nm. This version is used to
connect two DEBAM-RF/RG units up to 10 km (6.2 miles) apart.

* Voltage select switch is factory set for 240 Vac operation, and the power cord is not supplied.

LB200-1

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

LOCAL
PCI DEVICE

3-KILOMETER REMOTE BRIDGE
(DEBAM-RC/RD)

3-KILOMETER REMOTE
PCI DEVICE

10-KILOMETER REMOTE BRIDGE
(DEBAM-RF/RG)

10-KILOMETER REMOTE
PCI DEVICE
LKG-2407-89

Figure 1 Local and Remote LAN Bridge 200 Units

LB200-2

LAN Bridge %00 INSTALLATION
Reference Documentation

Refer to the following documents for more information relative to the LAN Bridge 200.
•

LAN Bridge 200 Installation

EK-DEBAM-IN

•

LAN Bridge 200 Problem Solving

EK-DEBAM-PS

•

LAN Bridge 200 Technical Manual

EK-DEBAM-TM

•

Bridges and Extended LAN Reference

EK-DEBAM-HR

•

DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide

EK-DECSY-CG

•

DECconnect System Satellite Equipment Room Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-SR

•

DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-FC

•

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Network Installation Guide

EK-DECSY-FI

•

Remote Bridge Management Software Guide

AA-FY93C-TE

Configuration

For packet traffic purposes, LANs connected by bridges are considered one extended LAN. For all other
configuration purposes, LANs connected by bridges are considered separate; therefore, each of these LANs
can be configured up to the standard maximum amount for length, number of stations, and other LAN
related specifications.
NOTE
When routers are connected to an extended LAN,
ensure that the total number of routers in the extended LAN does not exceed the maximum allowed for a
single LAN.
The fiber optic links between the remote bridge
(DEBAM-RCjRD) and the remote DECrepeater
200 (DEREN-RCjRD) should not exceed 1.5 km
(0.93 miles). Refer to Figure 3 and Figure 4.
The maximum length allowed for the bridge-torepeater fiber optic link is calculated by adding 500
m (1640 ft) to the maximum 1000 m (3280 ft) fiber
optic length allowed for repeater-to-repeater links.
For more detailed information on bridge-to-repeater
configurations, refer to the DECconnect System
Planning and Configuration Guide (EK-DECSY-CG).

LB200-3

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION
Figure 2 shows a local LAN Bridge 200 (DEBAM-AA/AB) connecting two LANs that are separated by
fewer that 100 m (328 ft). This is the maximum combined length of the local LAN Bridge 200 unit's
transceiver cables. each of which can be up to SO m (164 ft) in len,th.

STATION
STANDARD
ETHERNET
CAlLE

TRANSCEIVER
CA6LES
EACH UP TO
50 m (164 ft)

"STAnON

Figure 2 DEBAM-AA/AB Confiluration

L~200-4

LAN Bridle 100 INSTALLATION

Figure 3 shows remote LAN Bridge 200 units (DEBAM-RC/RD and DEBAM-RF/RG) connecting LANs
separated by more than 100 m (328 ft). Note the use of each model for efficiently connecting the distant
LANSt and the fiber optic length restrictions that apply when connecting to a remote DECrepeater 200 unit
(DEREN-RC/RD).

FIBER OPTIC LINK
--F
FIBER OPTIC LINK
UP TO 10 km (6.2 mi)
F-Up TO 3 km (1.9 mi)

F-- FIBER OPTIC LINK
UP TO 1.5 km (0.93 mi)

NOTE
DIRECT CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
REMOTE LAN Bridge 200 UNITS
AND REMOTE DEBET BRIDGES
OR REMOTE DEREP REPEATERS
IS NOT PERMITTED.

LKG-2409-88

Figure 3 DEBAM-RC/RD and DEBAM-RF IRG Configuration

LB200-5

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION
Figure 4 shows transceiver cables connecting bridges to various network interconnect devices.

IEEE 802.3/ETHERNET
CHIPCOM 802.3
BROADBAND MODEM

IEEE 802.3/ETHERNET
~--~

~-*~

ThinWire ETHERNET

NOTE
DIRECT CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
REMOTE LAN Bridge 200 UNITS
AND REMOTE DEBET BRIDGES
OR REMOTE DEREP REPEATERS
IS NOT PERMITTED.

IEEE 802.3/ETHERNET

IEEE 802.3/ETHERNET
lJ(G-241o-aa

Figure 4 LAN Bridge 200 Connections

LB200-6

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

There is no physical limit to the number of bridges that a packet can travel through before reaching its
destination station. Network performance, however, can be adversely affected if a packet must travel
through many bridges. Network delay is particularly noticeable with interactive tasks such as character
echoing for users on terminal servers. A guideline for networks with typical packet traffic loading (less than
40% maximum) is to limit the number of bridges between any two stations to seven.
When the LAN Bridge 200 is powered up, it runs its built-in self-test for approximately 30 seconds. It then
initiates the procedure to participate in a spanning tree with other bridges on the network to eliminate loops
in the topology. The spanning tree topology ensures that packets do not loop, and that only a single copy of a
packet is delivered to each LAN. The LAN Bridge 200 can run either the LAN Bridge 100 implementation
of the spanning tree algorithm, or the IEEE 802.1 implementation of the spanning tree algorithm.
The LAN Bridge 200 determines if there are any loops by communicating with other Digital or IEEE 802.1
compliant bridges in the network. If a loop is detected, one of the bridges becomes the designated packet
forwarder and the other bridge automatically enters the backup state. When in the backup state, a bridge
does not forward any packets; instead, the backup bridge constantly monitors the designated bridge. When a
backup bridge detects a failure, it automatically begins a procedure to take over and forward packets after
45 seconds.

If a LAN Bridge 200 is in a loop with a repeater, or if both of its links are connected to the same LAN, it
will not forward traffic, but will monitor this loop for reception of its own multicast "hello" message. If the
repeater is removed, the bridge will start forwarding traffic after it has detected the absence of its own
"hello" message being received on its other port.
NOTES
Use caution when configuring a bridge in a loop with
a router. If the bridge protocol filtering is not properly set up, degradation of network performance could
result.
Digital does not recommend the use of a non-Digital
IEEE 802.1 bridge in the same extended LAN with a
LAN Bridge 100. These bridges use protocols that
are not compatible, and without careful manual planning of the network configuratioo, degradatioo of
network performance could result.
Non-Digital IEEE 802.1 bridges can be used in the
same extended LAN with a LAN Bridge 200 unit
because the LAN Bridge 200 automatically compensates and runs the 802.1 spanning tree algorithm if
there are no LAN Bridge 100 units in the extended
LAN.

LB200-7

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

Hardware Components
A LAN Bridge 200 shipment consists of the items shown in Figure 5. Check the shipment for damage and
missing parts.

- LAN Bridge 200 UNit

- POWER CORD (BN20A-2E)
SUPPLIED WITH MODELS
DEBAM-AA, DEBAM-RC AND DEBAM-RF

- DOCUMENTATION
LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION
(EK-DEBAM-IN)
- AUI LOOPBACK CONNECTOR (PN 12-22196-01)
(TWO FOR LOCAL BRIDGES, ONE FOR
REMOTE BRIDGES)
- RACKMOUNT KIT
2 RACKMOUNT BRACKETS
4 U-NUTS
4, 10-32 PHILLIPS-HEAD SCREWS
WITH LOCKWASHER
6, 8-32 PHILLIPS-HEAD SCREWS
WITH LOCKWASHER
- ThlnWlre T-CONNECTOR (PN H8223) AND
TERMINATORS (PN H8225)
- FIBER OPTIC LOOPBACK CABLE AND ATTENUATING
SPACERIS KIT (PN 22-00437-01 FOR DEBAM-RC/RD
OR PN 22-00437-02 FOR DEBAM-RF/RG)
(REMOTE VERSIONS ONLY)
MKV·0003-eo

Figure 5 LAN Bridge 200 Components

LB200-8

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION
Equipment Placement
The LAN Bridge 200 can be located in a variety of environments as long as the environmental requirements
are met. The bridge can be either rack mounted in a standard 48 em (19 in.) RETMA (Radio Electronics
Television Manufacturers Association) rack cabinet, or placed on a table or shelf provided the location is at
least 45 em (18 in.) above the floor. Space must be allowed for ventilation and maintenance.
Environmental Requirements
The LAN Bridge 200 is designed to operate in a non-air conditioned environment or in an exposed area of an
industrial site. However, SO°C (122°F) is the maximum ambient temperature allowable at the air intake.
Table 2 shows the environmental parameters.
Table 2 Environmental Parameters
Parameter

Minimum

Maximum

5°C (41°F)
-40°C (-40°F)

SO°C (122°F)
66°C (1S1 OF)
20°C (36°F)

Temperature
Operating
Nonoperating
Maximum temperature change
per hour
Altitude
2.4 km (8,000 ft)
9.1 km (30,000 ft)

Operating
Nonoperating
Relative Humidity
Operating (noncondensing)
Nonoperating (noncondensing)
Wet-bulb temperature (operating)
Dew point (operating)
Airflow *

10%
0%

9S%
9S%
32°C (90°F)
2°C (36°F)

70.0 cubic feet
per minute

* Minimum of 10 em (4 in.) of space must be provided on both sides of the unit for adequate airflow.
Physical Dimensions
With Plastic Covers

Without Plastic Covers

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

13.3 em (5.3 in.)
43.6 em (17.2 in.)
29.8 em (11.7 in.)
S.2 kg (11.S lbs)

16.2 em (6.4 in.)
49.4 em (19.4 in.)
31.3 em (12.3 in.)
7.3 kg (16 lbs)

LB200-9

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION
Power Requirements
Table 3 provides the power requirements for all versions of the LAN Bridge 200.

Table 3 Power Requirements
Parameter

120 Vac Operation
DEBAM-AA/RC/RF

240 Vac Operation
DEBAM-A8/RD/RG

Voltage

90 Vac to 128 Vac

190 Vac to 256 Vac

Line current

2.3 A

1.2 A'

Frequency

47 to 63 Hz

Power consumption

230 W

Heat dissipation

275 BTU/hr

Site Preparation Considerations
Check the following items to ensure that the site is prepared for the LAN Bridge 200 installation.
1.

The appropriate baseband or broadband network interface is installed, and the required transceiver cabling is installed, tested, and tagged (if a Chipcom Ethermodem™ is used, AUI ECHO
MODE must be disabled).

If a remote bridge is being installed, ensure that the fiber optic cables are installed, tested, tagged,

and terminated with protective caps.
3.

The ac power outlet matches the power requirements of the bridge and is within 1.8 m (6 ft) of
the bridge location.

The environmental requirements are met.

The space is adequate for ventilation and for maintenance access.

The location is at least 45 cm (18 in.) above the floor.

™ Ethermodem is a trademark of Chipcom Corporation
LB200-10

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

UNPACK AND VERIFY
ALL COMPONENTS
RECEIVED
(SEE FIGURE 5)

VERIFY THE
CONFIGURATION
SWITCH SETTINGS
(SEE FIGU RE 7)

VERIFY THAT THE
OPTICAL IDLE SWITCHES
ARE SET TO THE SAME
SETTING AT BOTH ENDS
OF THE LINK. THE
DEC IDLE SETTING
(OFF) IS RECOMMENDED
(SEE FIGURE 8
AND TABLE 5)

Figure 6

LAN Bridge 200 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 6)

LB200-11

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

REMOVE THE EIGHT
SCREWS FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 10)

FASTEN THE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
TO THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 11)

Figure 6 LAN Bridge 200 Installation How Diagram (Sheet 2 of 6)

LB200-12

LAN Bridge :ZOO INSTALLATION

REMOVE THE TERMINATORS FROM THE
T -CONNECTOR AND
CONNECT THE
T-CONNECTOR TO THE
ThlnWlr. CONNECTOR
AT PORT A
(SEE FIGURE 13)

INFORM ALL NETWORK
USERS THAT THE
SEGMENT IS GOING
TO BE SHUT DOWN

IF REQUIRED, INSTALL
AN ATTENUATOR
SPACER ON THE ENDS
OF THE CABLES
(SEE TABLES 7, 8, AND 9)

CONNECT THE
FIBER OPTIC CABLES
TO THE BRIDGE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 15)

Figure 6

LAN Bridge 200 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 6)

LB200-13

LAN Bridge 100 INSTALLATION

REMOVE THE ThlnWlr.
CABLE FROM THE
T-CONNECTOR
ATTACHED TO ONE
ADJACENT STATION
(SEE FIGURE 13)

REMOVE THE
TERMINATOR AND THE
T-CONNECTOR ON THE
LAST STATION OF THE
SEGMENT
(SEE FIGURE 13)

CONNECT ONE END OF
A NEW ThinWir. CABLE
SECTION TO THE
T -CONNECTOR ON
THE LAST STATION

CONNECT THE OTHER
END OF THE NEW
ThinWir. CABLE
SEGMENT TO THE
T-CONNECTOR ON
THE BRIDGE

CONNECT THE END OF
THE ThlnWlr. CABLE
JUST REMOVED TO ONE
END OF THE NEW
T-CONNECTOR ON
THE BRIDGE

CONNECT THE
PREVIOUSLY REMOVED
TERMINATOR TO THE
OTHER END OF THE
NEW T-CONNECTOR
ON THE BRIDGE

CONNECT ONE END OF
THE NEW ThlnWir.
CABLE TO THE OTHER
END OF THE NEW
T-CONNECTOR ON
THE BRIDGE

CONNECT THE OTHER
END OF THE NEW
ThlnWir. CABLE TO
THE T-CONNECTOR ON
THE ADJACENT STATION

Figure 6

LAN Bridge 200 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 6)

LB200-14

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

PLUG THE POWER CORD
INTO THE BRIDGE UNIT
AND INTO THE
WALL OUTLET

GO TO MAINTENANCE
AIDS SECTION

Figure 6 LAN Bridge 200 Installation How Diagram (Sheet 5 of 6)

LB200-15

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

GO TO MAINTENANCE
AIDS SECTION

VERIFY THAT THE
BRIDGE IS
OPERATIONAL IN
THE NETWORK
CONFIGURATION

----~ 8

( __
8TOP_)

Figure 6 LAN Bridge 200 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 6 of 6)

LB200-16

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

•• ~
SWITCH FUNCTIONS

I
IIIIIIIiI I
12345678

UP • OFF
DOWN. ON

CONFIGURATION SWITCHES
ARE SHOWN IN THE
DEFAULT (NORMAL
OPERATING) POSITION.

1 - FACTORY MODE
2 - NVRAM RESET
3 .. PORT A ACCESS
4 - PORT B ACCESS
5 .. RESERVED
6 .. BRIDGE MODE
7 - NOT USED
8 .. AUIIThlnWlre SELECT
ON", AUI
OFF = ThlnWlre

MKV·0005·90

Figure 7 Configuration Switch Settings
Table 4
Switch
Number

LAN Bridge 200 Configuration Switch Functions
Name

ON (Down)

OFF (Up)

Factory Mode

For troubleshooting
only (refer to
loopback test).

Normal Mode - Must
be in this position
for correct bridge
operation.

NVRAM Reset

NVRAM resets to
factory default
settings when the
bridge is powered
up. NVRAM Reset
removes all bridge
management
configuration
changes.

Prevents NVRAM from
resetting to factory
default settings when
the bridge is powered
up. This setting
should be used to
prevent the loss of
parameters stored by
the bridge management
software during a
power failure.

LB200-17

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

Table 4

LAN Bridge 200 Configuration Switch Functions (Coot)

Switch
Number

Name

ON (Down)

OFF (Up)

Port A Access

Network stations
connected to Port A
that have bridge
management
capabilities are
allowed to READ and
WRITE (modify) bridge
management
parameters.

Network stations
connected to Port A
that have bridge
management
capabilities are
allowed to READ, but
cannot WRITE bridge
management
parameters.

Port B Access

Network stations
connected to Port B
that have bridge
management
capabilities are
allowed to READ and
WRITE (modify) bridge
management
parameters.

Network stations
connected to Port B
that have bridge
management
capabilities are
allowed to READ, but
cannot WRITE bridge
management
parameters.

Reserved For
Future Use

N/A

Normal Mode - Must

be in this position for
correct bridge operation.

Bridge Mode

Normal Mode - Must

N/A

be in this position
for correct bridge
operation.

Spare SwitchNot Assigned

N/A

AUI/Thin Wire
Mode Select

Selects AUI
connection for Port A.

Selects ThinWire
connection for Port A.

Table 5

Optical Idle Switch Settings

Type

Switch 1

Switch 2

DEC Idle·

OFF

802.3 Idle

OFF

Reserved

OFF

• The switches on a LAN Bridge 200 at the other end of the link must
also be set to the OFF position as shown in Figure 8· for DEC Idle.

LB200-18

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

••

~
~

t
I

UP = OFF

'DOWN = ON

OPTICAL IDLE SWITCHES
DEBAM-RC/RD ONLY
MKV·0002·80

Figure 8 Optical Idle Switch Settings

LB200-19

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

FOR 100/120V OPERAl1ON:
IF "240V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "120V" IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

?•
fa

------------------------------------FOR 220/240V OPERATION:
IF "120V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "240V" IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

•

LKG-2649-89

Figure 9 Verifying the AC Voltage Select Switch Setting

LB200-20

LAN Bridge ZOO INSTALLATION

I
I

,~
I
I
I I

U<G-2727-89

Figure 10

Removing the Plastic Covers

LB200-21

LAN Bridge 200 INSTALLATION

""'~~4. 10-32

PHILLIPS-HEAD SCREWS
WITH LOCKWASHER

NOTE
ALWAYS LEAVE AT LEAST
2.54 em (1 in) OF SPACE
BETWEEN MOUNTED DE~CES
FOR PASSING CABLES TO
THE BACK OF THE RACK.
MKV·OOOI·IO

Figure 11

Rack Mounting the LAN Bridge 200.

LB200-22

LAN Bridge 200 CABLING
LAN Bridge 200 Network Interface
The network interface for the LAN Bridge 200 consists of two ports: Port A and Port B. The ports are
located on the bridge I/O panel (see Figure 12).
Port A supports both an AUI (IS-pin standard) transceiver interface and a ThinWire interface. Either
interface can be selected by setting configuration switch number 8 to the appropriate position (see Figure 7).
Port B supports a standard AUI transceiver interface for the local bridge (DEBAM-AA/ AB) or a fiber optic
interface for the remote bridges (DEBAM-RC/RD and DEBAM-RF/RG).

AC INPUT
CONNECTOR

PORT B (SHOWN WITH
LOCAL PCI DEVICE
FOR DEBAM-AA/AB)

--::...
~

PORT A Thin Wire
CONNECTOR
PORT A AUI
CONNECTOR
FOR MODEL DEBAM-RC/RD

;~~ • ~dl

NOlE
REMOTE BRIDGE CONTROLS,
CONNECTORS, AND INDICATORS
ARE SIMILAR TO THOSE OF THE
LOCAL BRIDGE EXCEPT THAT
PORT B IS A FIBER OPTIC
LINK INTERFACE.

FOR MODEL DEBAM-RF /RG

REMOTE PCI DEVICES
LKG-2426-88

Figure 12

LAN Bridge 200 Ports and Connectors

LB200-23

LAN Bridge 200 CABLING
Cable Coofiguration Rules
Ensure that the transceiver cables, fiber optic cables, and the bridge power cable do not exceed the maximum
lengths described in Table 6 and the basic configuration rules that follow.

Table 6 Maximum Cable Lengths
From

Maximum Length

Cable Type

Transceiver

Bridge

50 m (164 ft), see
rules 1 through 5

BNE3x-xx*
transceiver cable

Transceiver

Bridge

12.5 m (41 ft), see
rules 1 through 5

BNE4x-xx* office
transceiver cable

DEBAM-RC/RD

DEBAM.. RC/RD

3 km (1.9 miles),
see rule 6

Fiber optic cable
(see Table 7)

DEBAM-RF/RG

10 km (6.2 miles),
see rule 6

Fiber optic cable
(see Table 8)

DEBAM-RC/RD

802.3
repeater

1.5 km (0.93 miles),
see rule 6

Fiber optic cable
(see Table 9)

AC outlet

Bridge

1.8 m (6 ft)

Country-specific

* BNE3x-xx transceiver cable and BNE4x-xx office transceiver cable can be interconnected. However, the
cable attenuation (signal loss) for· the office transceiver cable is greater than that of the BNE3x-xx
transceiver cable by a factor of four. For example; 2 m (6.6 ft) of office transceiver cable is electrically
equivalent to 8 m (26.2 ft) of BNE3x-xx transceiver cable.

LB200-24

LAN Bridge 200 CABLING
The basic cable configuration rules are as follows:
1.

If the bridge connects to an IEEE 802.3 transceiver such as the H4005 or to a DESTA, the
transceiver cable must be an IEEE 802.3 compliant transceiver cable (BNE3H/K/L/M or
BNE4C/D).

If the bridge connects to a non-IEEE 802.3 transceiver such as the H4000, the transceiver cable
can be either Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 compliant.

IEEE 802.3 transceiver cables and Ethernet transceiver cables cannot be interconnected.

Maximum length for the transceiver cable cannot exceed 50 m (164 ft). This maximum length
can be reduced due to the internal cabling equivalence of a device (such as a DELNI) that is
connected between the bridge and the transceiver, or due to the use of office transceiver cable.
The cabling equivalence of such a device must be subtracted from the 50 m (164 ft) maximum.
Cabling equivalence is a measure of the internal timing delay of a device, expressed in meters of
transceiver cable. For device-specific information related to cabling equivalence, refer to the
DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide.

When connecting the bridge to a configuration that includes a DELNI, allow a 5 m (16.4 ft)
cabling equivalence loss for the DELNI.

If remote (fiber optic) bridges are used, they can be used in one of two ways:
a.

A Bridge-to-Bridge Link - The DEBAM-RF/RG provides 17 dB of usable optical power at
l300 nm. This option can achieve distances of up to 10 km (6.2 miles) when connecting two
DEBAM-RF/RG units using 62.5/125 micron fiber. Connection to a remote repeater is not
permitted.
The DEBAM-RC/RD provides 14 dB of usable optical power at 850 nm. This option can
achieve distances of up to 3 km (1.9 miles) when connecting two DEBAM-RC/RD units
using 62.5/125 micron fiber. Connection to a remote 802.3 repeater is permitted, but
remote repeater budget limitations apply.

A Bridge-to-Repeater Link - When configured in this manner, the fiber path can be 500 m
(1640 ft) in length plus any available fiber length not used under the 1000 m (3280 ft)
limitation for remote repeaters. This allows a bridge-to-repeater link to reach up to 1500 m
(4920 ft).

Remote versions of the LAN Bridge 200 are not compatible with remote versions of LAN Bridge
100, LAN Bridge 150, or with the DEREP remote repeater.

Digital Equipment Corporation recommends that networks be configured so that station-to-station
paths contain no more than seven bridges in order to ensure acceptable packet transmit time
between stations.

LB200-25

LAN Bridge 200 CABLING
Cable Connections
This section provides information on connecting the ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cable, the transceiver cable,
and the fiber optic cable to the LAN Bridge 200.
Connecting TbinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cables - If Port A of the LAN Bridge 200 is being connected to
the middle or end of a ThinWire segment, use the T-connector and terminators (if required) to make the •
connection. Refer to Figure 13 to connect the ThinWire segment to Port A of the LAN Bridge 200.

.. o ~
--=amm

•

.cw

1r ---- -------~-~----------------~.
r-----..LI..-----,

STATION
A

STATION

STATION
A

STATION
B

L~~~_~~<!.g:_!~~J

STATION
C

:;?---STATION
C
MKV-0012-90

Figure 13

Connecting Thin Wire Ethernet Coaxial Cables

LB200-26

LAN Bridge 100 CABLING
Connecdng Transceiver Cables - Transceiver cable is required for connecting Port B on the local LAN
Bridge 200 (DEBAM-AA/AB), and can be used for connecting Port A on both the local and remote LAN
Bridge 200 versions. Refer to Figure 14 for making the transceiver cable connections to the LAN Bridge
200.

PUSH SLIDE LATCH
FIRML Y TO LEFT
TO LOCK CABLES
IN PLACE

LKG-2415-!S9

Figure 14 Connecting Transceiver Cables

LB200-27

LAN Bridge 200 CABLING

Connecting Fiber Optic Cables - Fiber optic cable is required for connecting Port B on the remote versions
of the LAN Bridge 200 (DEBAM-Rx). Refer to Figure 15 and the specific link information that follows to
connect the fiber optic cable to Port B on the remote LAN Bridge 200.
Digital Equipment Corporation recommends the use of two fiber optic cables for indoor wiring. The BN25Jxx cable is a general purpose cable and the BN25K-xx cable can be used in a plenum.
These are dual-fiber cables with 62.5/125 micron fiber specified at both 850 nm and 1300 nm, in
accordance with Digital Specification PS 171002-0-0 for 62.5/125 micron optical fiber. Both cables are
terminated with 2.5 mm (0.10 in.) ST-type connectors and are available in a variety of lengths.
The two remote versions of the LAN Bridge 200 (DEBAM-RC/RD and DEBAM-RF/RG) differ in the
fiber optic technology that they use, and in the maximum attainable distance that the fiber optics can span.
DEBAM-RC/RD-to-DEBAM-RC/RD Links
The DEBAM-RC/RD uses 850 nm wavelength LED transmitters and supports 50, 62.5, 85, and 100
micron core fiber types. A maximum distance of 3 km (1.9 miles) using 62.5 fiber is possible between two
DEBAM-RC/RD models. Table 7 contains the maximum distance, loss budget, ana minimum attenuation
associated with each fiber type in a DEBAM-RC/RD-to-DEBAM-RC/RD link. If the fiber optic cable has
an attenuation value that is LESS than the minimum attenuation listed in Table 7, an attenuator spacer
(P /N: 12-30068-02) must be installed on the transmit connection at both ends of the link.

Table 7

DEBAM-RC/RD-to-DEBAM-RC/RD Fiber Specifications

Fiber
Size

Maximum
Distance

Loss
Budget

Minimum
Attenuation

50/125

2.0 km (1.3 miles)

9 dB

N/A

62.5/125

3.0 km (1.9 miles)

14 dB

N/A

85/125

2.8 km (1.7 miles)

15 dB

N/A

100/140

2.8 km 0.7 miles)

16 dB

4 dB

LB200-28

LAN Bridge 200 CABLING

DEBAM-RFI RG-to-DEBAM-RFI RG Links
The DEBAM-RF IRO uses 1300 nm wavelength LED transmitters and supports SO, 62.5, 85, and 100
micron core fiber types. A maximum distance of 10 km (6.2 miles) using 62.S fiber is possible between two
DEBAM-RFIRO models. Table 8 contains the maximum distance, loss budget, and minimum attenuation
associated with each fiber type in a DEBAM-RF/RG-to-DEBAM-RFIRO link. If the fiber optic cable has
an attenuation value that is LESS than the minimum attenuation listed in Table 8, an attenuator spacer
(P/N: 12-30068-02) must be installed on the transmit connection and the receive connection at both ends of
the link.
Table 8

DEBAM-RFIRG-to-DEBAM-RF IRG Fiber Specificatioos

Fiber
Size

Maximum
Distance

Loss
Budget

Minimum
Attenuatioo

50/125

10.0 km (6.2 miles)

12 dB

3 dB

62.5/125

10.0 km (6.2 miles)

17 dB

7 dB

85/125

4.0 km (2.5 miles)

17 dB

9 dB

100/140

4.0 km (2.5 miles)

17 dB

9 dB

DEBAM-RCI RD-to-Remote Repeater (DEREN-RCI RD) Links
Ethernet timing requirements restrict distances between a bridge and a repeater to a maximum of 1.5 km
(0.93 miles). Table 9 contains the maximum distance, loss budget, and minimum attenuation associated with
each fiber type in a DEBAM-RC/RD-to- Remote Repeater (DEREN-RC/RD) link. If the fiber optic
cable has an attenuation value that is LESS than the minimum attenuation listed in Table 9, an attenuator
spacer (P /N: 12-30068-02) must be installed on the transmit connection at both ends of the link.

Table 9

DEBAM-RC/RD-to-Remote Repeater Fiber Specifications

Fiber
Size

Maximum
Distance

Loss
Budget

Minimum
Attenuation

50/125

1.5 km (0.93 miles)

9 dB

N/A

62.5/125

1.5 km (0.93 miles)

14 dB

N/A

85/125

1.5 km (0.93 miles)

15 dB

N/A

100/140

1.5 km (0.93 miles)

16 dB

4 dB

LB200-29

LAN Bridge 200 CABLING
DEBAM-RC/ RD Fiber Cable Measurement Correction
The values in Table 10 are used to correct the measured loss of an optical fiber when using the equipment
and procedure specified in the DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide. The correction
is required to account for the difference in wavelength between the DEBAM-R~/RD transmitter and the
test equipment transmitter.

Table 10

Measurement Correction

Wavelength

Correction Value

790 nm
795 nm
800 nm
805 nm
810 nm
815 nm
820 nm
825 nm
830 nm
835 nm
840 nm
845 nm
850 nm

-0.2 dB/km
-0.1 dB/km
0.0 dB/km
0.1 dB/km
0.2 dB/km
0.3 dB/km
0.4 dB/km
0.5 dB/km
0.6 dB/km
0.65 dB/km
0.7 dB/km
0.8 dB/km
0.9 dB/km

LB200-30

LAN Bridle 200 CABLING

FIBER OPTIC
CABLE

U<G-2417-89

Figure 15

Connecting Fiber Optic Cables

For more information on cabling of the LAN Bridge 200, refer to the DECconnect System Planning and
Configuration Guide, the DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide, and the DECconnect System Fiber Optic Network Installation Guide.

LB200-31

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Self-Tests
The LAN Bridge 200 has two types of self-tests. The operational self-test (normal mode) is used as a quick
check to ensure that the bridge is functioning properly as it is configured. If it is determined that an internal
problem may exist in the bridge, the loopback self-test (factory mode) is used to detect a failing field
replaceable unit (FRU).
Operatiooal Self-Test (Normal Mode) - The LAN Bridge 200 executes a self-test when power is applied.
Approximately 60 seconds after power is applied, the state of the status LEOs indicates whether a successful
self-test has occurred. Figures 16 and 17 show the successful self-test state of the status LEDs for the local
and remote LAN Bridge 200. Table 11 contains a list of the status LEOs and their definitions.
NOTE
Ensure that transceiver cables and fiber optic cables
are securely connected at both ends. If a remote
bridge is being tested, the bridge at the other end of
the link must be powered up before the self-test will
successfully complete.

LB200-32

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS

=== AUI

=== 0 LB sw

--+

x)x)x)e

x)~~O

LOGIC MODULE

PORT A

x:x =
•

PORT B

LOCAL
PCI DEVICE

~ = ON OR OFF
(BUT NOT BLINKING)

= OFF

o · (INDICATING
ON OR OFF OR BLINKING
NETWORK TRAFFIC)

IF:
THE STATUS LEOs MATCH THOSE
SHOWN HERE.

THEN:
THE LAN Bridge 200 UNIT IS
OPERATIONAL.

THE STATUS LEOs DO NOT MATCH
THOSE SHOWN HERE.

GO TO LOOPBACK SELF-TEST.
MKV·0004·110

Figure 16

Local LAN Bridge 200 Self-Test

LB200-33

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS

=== (!) LB SW

=== AUI .-. A

¢¢¢e

¢~"O

LOGIC MODULE

PORT A

x:x =

¢¢
PORT B

REMOTE
PCI DEVICE

~ = ON OR OFF

(BUT NOT BLINKING)

o = (INDICATING
ON OR OFF OR BLINKING
NETWORK TRAFFIC)

. . . . OFF

IF:
THE STATUS LEOs MATCH THOSE
SHOWN HERE.

THEN:
THE LAN Bridge 200 UNIT IS
OPERATIONAL.

THE STATUS LEOs DO NOT MATCH
THOSE SHOWN HERE.

GO TO LOOPBACK SELF-TEST.
MKV·0001·90

Figure 17

Remote LAN Bridge 200 Self-Test

LB200-34

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Table 11

LAN Bridge 200 Status LEOs

Symbol

ON Steady

OFF

Blinking

DC OK

Logic module
dc power valid

Logic module
dc power
failure

N/A

(!)

Self-Test
OK

Logic module
self-test
passed

Logic module
self-test
failed

NVRAM failed
(may require
replacement)

Bridge

Bridge code
operational

Bridge code
nonoperational

N/A

Software

Nonhridge code
operational

No valid
nonhridge code

Down-line
load in
progress

DC OK

Port A AUI
transceiver
power OK

Port A AUI
transceiver
power failure

N/A

AUI/TW
Select

Port A AUI
interface
selected

Port A Thin Wire
interface
selected

N/A

On-Line
(FWD A)

Port A in
forwarding
state

Port A not in
forwarding
state

Fault
indication

Port A
Activity

Traffic present
on network

Traffic not
present on
network

Traffic
present on
network

Self-Test
OK

PCI device
self-test
passed

PCI device
self-test
failed

N/A

On-Line
(FWD B)

Port B in
forwarding
state

Port B not in
forwarding
state

Fault
indication

Port B
Activity

Traffic present
on network

Traffic not
present on
network

Traffic
present on
network

LED Name

Logi4= Module LEOs

Port A LEOs

AUI

Port B LEOs

(!)

LB200-35

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS

Table 11
Symbol

LAN Bridge 200 Status LEOs (Cont)
LED Name

ON Steady

OFF

Blinking

Port B AUI
transceiver
power OK

Port B
transsceiver
power failure

N/A

PCI device
self-test
passed

PCI device
self-test
failed

N/A

Fiber optic
link OK

Fiber optic
link failed

N/A

Local PCI Device LED
DC OK

Remote PCI Device LEOs

(!)
OK

Self-Test
OK

Link OK

LB200-36

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS
Loopback Self-Test (Factory Mode) - The following procedure can be helpful in determining if the bridge
or the external cable is faulty.
1.

Disconnect the LAN Bridge 200 power cord from the power source.

Disconnect all cables from Port A and Port B.

Set configuration switch 1 (Factory Mode Switch) to the ON position.

Install all loopback connectors:
a.

Port A - The AUI loopback connector (PIN: 12-22196-01) and the ThinWire T-connector
(PIN: 00-H8223-00) and terminators (PIN: 00-H8225-00). Refer to Figure 18.

Port B (Local Bridge) - AUI loopback connector (PIN: 12-22196-01). Refer to Figure 18.

Port B (Remote Bridge) - Fiber optic loopback cable (PIN: 17-02372-01 for the DEBAMRCIRD or PIN: 17-02372-02 for the DEBAM-RF/RG). Refer to Figure 19.

Reconnect the power cord.

Observe the 2-second lamp check for LED validation, then wait 60 seconds for the diagnostic selftest to complete.

Compare the state of the LEOs with those shown in Figure 20 (local) and Figure 21 (remote). If
the LEDs match up, continue to the next step. If the LEDs do not match up, refer to Table 12 to
help identify the problem.

Reset configuration switch 1 to the OFF position.

Remove all loopback connectors from Port A and Port B.

10.

Reconnect the cables to Port A and Port B.

11.

Cycle bridge power and ensure that the diagnostic self-test executes successfully.

LB200-37

LAN Bridge 100 DIAGNOSTICS

AUI LOOPBACK
CONNECTORS
(PN 12-22196-01)

DEBAM-AA/AB
MKV·0008·90

Figure 18

Local LAN Bridge 200 Loopback Connectors

LB200-38

LAN Briel. 200 DIAGNOSTICS

FIBER LOOPBACK
CABLE
PN 17-02372-01 FOR DEBAM-RC/RD
PN 17-02372-02 FOR DEBAM-RF/RG

DEBAM-RC/RD

• amm

... =~

DEBAM-RF/RG
MKV·0007-90

Figure 19

Remote LAN Bridge 200 Loopback Connectors

LB200-39

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS

=== (!) LB SW

• • 00
LOGIC MODULE

PORT A

PORT B

•

LOCAL
PCI DEVICE

• • ON
MKv·oooe·eo

Figure 20

Local LAN Bridge 200 Loopback Test Status LEOs

LB200-40

LAN Bridge 200 DIAGNOSTICS

=== (l) LB SW

=== AUI -+ A

(i) -+

• • 00

•

LOGIC MODULE

000
PORT A

00
PORT B

••
@

REMOTE
PCI DEVICE

• • ON
MKV-0010-90

Figure 21

Remote LAN Bridge 200 Loopback Test Status LEDs

LB200-41

LAN Bridge 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Troubleshootin~

The troubleshooting procedures in Table 12 are symptom-oriented. The symptoms are presented in the order
that they might occur during the loopback self-test.

Table 12

Problem Solving

Symptom

Suggested Corrective Action

All LEDs OFF

Ensure that the voltage select switch is set to the correct voltage
range.
Ensure that the power cord is securely connected at the bridge and
at the wall outlet.
Verify that the correct power is available at the wall outlet.
Reset the circuit breaker, if tripped. If the circuit breaker trips
again, disconnect the transceiver cables, reset the breaker, and
apply power. If the circuit breaker does not trip, check for a bad
transceiver cable. If the circuit breaker trips again, replace the
power supply.
Ensure that the power cable is good. If not, replace it.

DC OK (Logic Module) is
OFF, any other LED ON

Replace the logic module.

Self-Test OK LED
(Logic Module) remains
OFF

Replace the logic module.

Self-Test OK LED
(Logic Module)
is blinking

Replace the NVRAM.

Self-Test OK LED
(Port B) remains OFF

Reseat the PCI module and retest. If the problem remains, replace
the PCI module. If the problem still remains, replace the logic
module.

Self-Test OK LED
(Remote PCI Device)
remains OFF

Reseat the PCI module and retest. If the problem remains, replace
the PCI module. If the problem still remains, replace the logic
module.

On-Line LED (FWD A) or
(FWD B) is blinking

Perform the loopback test as described in the DIAGNOSTICS
section:

Bridge LED (Logic
Module) remains OFF

This is NOT a hardware fault indication. Reset configuration
switches 1 and 5 to the OFF position (up = OFF) and recycle the
bridge power.

LB200-42

LAN Bridge 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 12 Problem Solving (Cont)
Symptom

Suggested Corrective Action

The Software LED
(Logic Module) is
blinking

This is NOT a hardware fault indication. Reset configuration
switch 5 to the OFF position (up = OFF) and recycle the bridge
power.

Link OK LED
(Remote pel Device)
Port B remains OFF

Ensure that the fiber optic cables are properly connected to the
bridge and to the remote device at the other end of the link.
Ensure that the device at the other end of the link is installed and
powered up.
Ensure that the optical idle switches (on the DEBAM-RC/RD) are
set to the same setting on both ends of the link (normally DEC
Idle).
Check the cable plant for insufficient optical loss. Attenuator
spacers may have to be installed if the attenuation value of the
cable is LESS than the minimum attenuation listed in Tables 7, 8,
or 9.
Reseat the PCI module and retest. If the problem remains, replace
the PCI module.

DC OK LED (Port A) is
OFF, DC OK LED (Logic
Module) is ON

Replace the logic module. If this indication occurs during the loopback test, the loopback connector on Port A may be defective.
Unplug the loopback connector at Port A, and if the DC OK LED
(Port A) lights, the loopback connector is defective. If it does not
light, replace the logic module.

DC OK LED (Local PCI
Device) is OFF, DC OK
LED (Logic Module) is ON

Reseat the PCI module and retest. If the problem remains, replace
the PCI module. If the problem still remains, replace the logic
module. If this indication occurs during the loopback test, the
loopback connector on Port B may be defective. Unplug the loopback connector at Port B, and if the DC OK LED (Local PCI
Device) lights, the loopback connector is defective. If it does not
light, take the following actions in the order listed until the problem
is corrected.
• Reseat the PCI module and retest
• Replace the PCI module and retest
• Replace the logic module and retest

Fans not running

Ensure that the fan source wire is connected properly.
Replace the fan assembly.
Replace the power supply.

LB200-43

LAN Bridge 200 MAINTENANCE AIDS
FRU RemO\'al and Replacement Procedures
Figure 22 shows the field replaceable units (FRUs) of the LAN Bridge 200.
WARNING
The procedures indicated should be performed by
qualified service pel'SOllllel only. 00 Nor attempt to
remove any FRUs while the LAN Bridge 200 is connected to a power source.
CAUTION
Modules in the bridge can be damaged byelectrostatic discharges (ESD). Use a wriststrap, ground wire,
and table pad which are included in the Field Service
Kit (PIN: 29-11762-00) when accessing any internal
components of the LAN Bridge 200.
The FRUs for the LAN Bridge 200 and their part numbers are listed below.
FRU

Part Number

Logic Module
Power Supply Module
Power Supply Ribbon Cable
Fan Assembly
AUI PCI Module (DEBAM-AAIAB)
850 nm Fiber PCI Module (DEBAM-RC/RD)
1300 nm Fiber PCI Module (DEBAM-RFIRG)

54-18357-01
H7859-A
17-01843-01
70-25518-01
DEPCI-AA
DEPCI-AC
DEPCI-AF

Miscellaneous Parts
ThinWire T·Connector
ThinWire 50-Ohm Terminator
AUI Loopback Connector
850 nm Fiber Loopback Cable (DEBAM-RC/RD)
1300 nm Fiber Loopback Cable (DEBAM-RF/RG)
Fiber Optic Attenuator Spacer

LB200-44

H8223
H8225
12-22196-01
17-02372-01
17-02372-02
12-30068-02

LAN Bridge ZOO MAINTENANCE AIDS

MKV·0011·90

Figure 22

LAN Bridge 200 FRU Locations

LB200-45

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION
MUXserver 100 REMOTE TERMINAL SER, t'~R
General Description
The MUXserver 100 is a high performance, low cost, remote terminal server for use on an Ethernet Local
Area Network (LAN). It allows up to 16 remote terminals to connect to computer systems on the Local
Area Network by means of a public data network as shown in Figure 2. The terminals are physically
connected to two DECmux II units which may be at separate remote geographic locations. Each DECmux
II communicates with a MUXserver 100 through a statistically multiplexed synchronous communications
link provided by RS-232-C synchronous modems and the public data network. (This link is referred to
throughout this section as the COMPOSITE LINK). RS-422 long-line drivers are also provided for local
links. Each remote terminal appears to have direct connection to the computer systems and resources
available on the local area network.
The server offers four major advantages:
1.

It provides terminal access to an Ethernet Local Area Network.

It permits fast, easy connections between terminals and computer systems on the network.

It manages terminal traffic and leaves computer systems with more time for application
tasks.

It reduces and simplifies cabling required for terminal connections.

30.5 em
- . - (12 in.)

8.5 em
(3.75 in.)

L
45.7 em
(18 in.)

CS-5389

Figure 1 MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server

MXSIOO-l

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION

TRANSCEIVER

ETHERNET CABLE

TERMINALS

TERMINALS
CS-5360

Figure 2 Local Area Network (LAN)

MXSIOO-2

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION

Product Configuration

There are two default configurations available on the MUXserver 100. The MUXserver 100 determines
the configuration selected based on the composite link connection.
Configuration Number 1 -

•

All composite links are factory preset to 9600 baud, RS-232-C, full-duplex modem.

•

All asynchronous lines are factory preset to 9600 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop bit.

•

A partial configuration consisting of either DECmux II is also quite acceptable.

ETHERNET

H4000

MUXserver 100
SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

DECmux II

CONNECTS TO B PORT

CONNECTS TO A PORT

C5-5378

Figure 3 Default Multiplexer Configuration Number 1

MXSlOO-3

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION

Configuration Number 2 -

•

All composite links are factory preset to 9600 baud, RS-232-C, full-duplex modem.

•

All asynchronous lines are factory preset to 9600 baud, eight bits, no parity, and one stop bit.

H4000

ETHERNET

MUXserver 100

SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

DECmux II

",.-_ _-..;;C;.;;:O.:.:N.:.;N.:ECTS TO B PO RT

CONNECTS TO B PORT
CS-5379

Figure 4 Default Multiplexer Configuration Number 2

MXSIOO-4

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION
MUXserver Versions
The MUXserver is available in two versions (DSRZA-BA and DSRZA-BB). Each version has different
power requirements.
Model

Input Voltage

DSRZA-BA
DSRZA-BB

100 - 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the MUXserver 100 remoter terminal server.

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (VMS I Micro VMS)

AA-JC20A-TE

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (RSX-11 M-PLUS)

AA-JC19A-TC

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (Microl RSX)

AA-JS34A-TY

•

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal Server Software
Installation Guide (ULTRIX-32132m)

AA-JQ09A-TE

•
•

MUXserver 100 Network Reference Manual

EK-DSRZA-RM

MUXserver 100 Network Installation Manual

EK-DSRZA-IN

•
•

MUXserver 100 User's Pocket Guide

EK-DSRZA-PG

MUXserver 100 Network Identification Card

EK-DSRZA-ID

•

LAT Network Manager's Guide

AA-DJ18A-TK

Hardware Components
The MUXserver 100 package consists of:
•

MUXserver 100 hardware unit - DSRZA-BA or DSRZA-BB

•

Country kit - correct power cord, pocket guide, network reference manual, identification card,
and installation guide

•

RS-422 test cable

The accessories that are available with the MUXserver 100 package are:
•
•
•
•
•

Transceiver cable (BNE3C-xx)
Data terminal cables (BC22D)
Ethernet transceiver (H4000 or optional H4005)
Etherjack junction box (optional)
Synchronous modems (for example; DF124)

The quantities and types of accessories depend on the option ordered.

MXS100-5

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION
Software Components
MUXserver 100 operation requires four software packages:
1.

Server software installed on at least one load host.

DEC net Phase IV software installed on at least one load host.

LAT service node software installed on all service nodes.

LAT /Plus service node software installed on service node to provide remote printer support
(VMS systems only).

The server software kit contains the operational software and the LAT /Plus host software (if required) for
service nodes. All software must be installed, verified, and operating properly before the server can be
operated.

Table 1 MUXserver 100 Software
Operating System Software

How LAT Service Node Software is Packaged

VMS Version 4.0 or 4.1

LAT software is included with the VMS operating
system.

VMS Version 4.2 or later

LAT software is included with the VMS operating system. LATplus/VMS Version 1.0 or later is included with
the MUXserver 100 Version 2.0 distribution and documentation kit.

ULTRIX-32 V1.2
ULTRIX-32m V1.2

LAT software is included with the UL TRIX32/ULTRIX-32m operating system.

RSX-IIM-PLUS
Micro/RSX

LAT software is included with the RSX-llM-PLUS and
Micro/RSX operating systems.

MXSI00-6

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION
Equipment Placement
The MUXserver 100 can be located in a variety of environments, including offices and computer rooms,
and can be stacked in multiple unit installations.
Environmental Requirements
SO to SO°C (41 ° to 122°F)
10% to 9S% (non condensing)

Temperature
Relative Humidity

Terminals
The following is a partial list of DIGITAL video and hard copy terminals that can be used. The
MUXserver 100 supports VT100/VT200 compatible terminals at speeds up to 19200 bits per second. All
ports are compatible with EIA RS-232-C electrical connections and support XON/XOFF or DTR/DTS
flow control.
VTS2
VT100 series
VT200 series

LA12
LA34
LA36

LA38
LA 100
LA120

Professional series
DECmate II
Rainbow series

Physical Description
4S.7 cm (18 in)
30.S cm (12 in)
8.S cm (3.7S in)
6.8 kg (1S lbs)

Length
Width
Height
Weight

Power Requirements
The operating power range of the DSRZA system is contained in the following table.

Table 2 DSRZA Power Requirements

Version

Nominal
Voltage
Required

Voltage
Range

Current

Frequency

-BA

120 Vac

100-120

O.S A

SO/60 Hz

-BB

240 Vac

220-240

0.3 A

SO/60 Hz

MXSIOO-7

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION

(~~®~. ~tJ)
SYNCHRON~O:::::US=M:::::O:::::D:;.,EMS

PORT B " ·

r-======-:

PORT

L~UiT
WALL

BC22D

TRANSCEIVER CABLE

SUPERVISOR TERMINAL
MKV87-1223

Figure 5

Front and Rear Panels of the MUXserver 100

MXSIOO-8

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

GET MUXserver 100
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER (NETWORK, SYSTEM, OR
SERVER).

VERIFY WITH THE
APPROPRIATE
MANAGER THAT THE
MUXserver 100
INSTALLATION SITE
MEETS SITE
PREPARATION
REQUIREMENTS.

UNPACK, INSPECT,
AND VERIFY CONTENTS OF THE MUXserver 100 BOX.
REFER TO THE SITE
PREPARATION/INSTALLATION GUIDE.

UNPACK, INSPECT,
AND VERIFY CONTENTS OF THE MUXserver 100
ACCESSORIES
BOX(ES). REFER TO
THE SITE PREPARATION/INSTALLATION
GUIDE.

MKV87·1199

Figure 6 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 3)

MXSIOO-9

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION

ARRANGE FOR
SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION.

• LOCATE SERIAL NUMBER AND ETHERNET
ADDRESS ON BACK OF SERVER
• FILL OUT THE MUXserver 100 IDENTIFICATION CARD.
• GIVE THE MUXserver 100 IDENTIFICATION
CARD TO THE APPROPRIATE MANAGER.
• ASK TO BE NOTIFIED WHEN THE SOFTWARE
IS INSTALLED.

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER CABLE (SEE
FIGURE 5).

CONNECT THE
SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL (SEE
FIGURE 5).

CONNECT COMPOSITE LINK CABLES
TO MODEMS (SEE
FIGURE 5).

SET VOLTAGE
SELECTION SWITCH
TO MATCH POWER
CORD VOLTAGE (SEE
FIGURE 7).

MKV87-1200

Figure 6 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 3)

MXSIOO-IO

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION

• MAKE SURE THE TRANSCEIVER CABLE IS
CONNECTED AT BOTH ENDS.
• CHECK WITH THE SYSTEM MANAGER THAT
THE
SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION
IS
COMPLETE.
• INSTALL THE DECmux II UNITS AT THE
REMOTE SITES.
• ENSURE THAT THE COMPOSITE LINKS TO
THE REMOTE DECmux II UNITS ARE PROPERLY CONNECTED.
PLUG POWER CORD
INTO THE MUXserver
100 AND INTO THE
WALL OUTLET.

SET POWER SWITCH
ON THE MUXserver
100 TO "1" (ON
POSITION).

• VERIFY THAT THE GREEN LED IS LIT ON THE
REAR OF THE MUXserver 100.
• THE TERMINAL ON THE SUPERVISOR PORT
SHOULD DISPLAY A MESSAGE 20 SECONDS
AFTER POWER-UP.
• PRESS THE RETURN KEY SEVERAL TIMES.
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE SHOULDBE DISPLAYED IF THE MUXserver 100 HAS BEEN
PROPERLY INSTALLED.
MUXserver 100 REMOTE TERMINAL SERVER V2.0
(BLG-<LAT V5.1)
ENTER USERNAME>
• REFER TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION
IF THE ABOVE MESSAGE WAS NOT DISPLAYED. VERIFY THAT THE DATA SET READY
(DSR) LED IS ON FOR ALL SYNCHRONOUS
RS-232-C LINK CONN.ECTIONS TO THE MUXserver 100.

MKV87·1222

Figure 6 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 3)

MXSIOO-ll

MUXserver 100 INSTALLATION

DSRZA-BA (120 V)
MAKE SURE VOLTAGE SELECTION
SWITCH IS SET TO 120 V.

VOLTAGE
SELECTION
SWITCH

---DSRZA-BB (240 V)

VOLTAGE
SELECTION
SWITCH

SET VOLTAGE SELECTION
SWITCH TO 240 V.
REMOVE AND REPLACE FUSE
AND FUSE CARRIER WITH
240 V REPLACEMENT PARTS

NOTE
IF THE VOLTAGE SELECTION SWITCH POSITION IS
CHANGED, THE FUSE AND FUSE CARRIER MUST
ALSO BE CHANGED TO MATCH.
CS-5407

Figure 7 Voltage Selection Switch and Fuse Carrier

MXSIOO-12

MUXserver 100 CABLING

Cabling
Figure 8 illustrates how the MUXserver 100 is connected.

H4000

ETHERNET

k
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
BNE 4A-02 (OR -05)
MUXserver 100

SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

C5-5390

Figure 8

Cable Requirements for a Typical MUXserver 100 Installation

MXSIOO-13

MUXserver 100 CABLING

Table 3 MUXserver Cables
Application

Cable

Connects

RS-232-C composite link

BC22F

MUXserver 100 to the modem and
DECmux II to the modem.

RS-23 2-C synchronous link

BC17D

MUXserver 100 to DECmux II
and DECmux II to DECmux II.

RS-422 composite link

See Figure 9.
Print Set No.
70-22418-xx

RS-422 DECmux II (Port B)
to MUXserver 100 (Port A).

See Figure 10.
Print Set No.
70-20983-xx

RS-422 DECmux II (Port A)
to MUXserver 100 (Port B).

See Figure 11.
Print Set No.
70-20976-xx

Port A of one DECmux II to
Port B of second DECmux II.

BC22D

Terminal to supervisor port of
MUXserver 100 or DECmux II.

BC22D

Terminal to DECmux II.

70-22411-01
70-20984-01

MUXserver 100
DECmux II

RS-422 loopback cable

MXSI00-14

MUXserver 100 CABLING

MUXserver 100
PORT A
(FEMALE)
DECmux II
PORT B
(MALE)

PROT.GND
-TXD
-RXD

SIGNAL GND

0
0
0

+RXD

12°

15°

0
0

+ClKl

PROT.GND

+TXD

+CLKO

-+RXD

-TXD

SIGNAL GND

- -ClKO

-RXD

-ClK1

0
0
°
22°
+TXD

CS-5382

Figure 9 RS-422 DECmux II (Port B) to MUXserver 100 (Port A)

MXSlOO-15

MUXserver 100 CABLING

MUXserver 100
PORT B
(FEMALE)

PROT. GNC
-TXD
-RXD

_ _ PROT.GND

2
-

+RXD

+ClKI

3
SIGNAL GND

4
5

6
+RXD

-+TXD
--RXD

-SIGNAL GND

+ClKO

-ClKI

-TXD

+TXD

-ClKO

CS-5383

Figure 10 RS-422 DECmux II (Port A) to MUXserver 100.(Port B)

MXSlOO-16

MUXserver 100 CABLING

DECmux II
PORT A
(FEMALE)

PROT. GND -

DECmux II
PORT B
(MALE)

+RXD

-+XD
- +ClKO

+ClKI
SIGNAL GND-

+TXD
-RXD
SIGNAL GND-

PROT. GND

8
-ClKI
-

-TXD

-SIGNAL GND
-

+RXD

-TXD

-SIGNAL GND
-

-ClKO

-RXD

CS-5384

Figure 11

RS-422 Port A to Port B (DECmux II)

MXSIOO-17

MUXserver 100 CABLING

FEMALE
25-PIN
CONN.

FEMALE
25-PIN
CONN.
_ _ _ - -PROT.GN

SIGNAL GND. __ _
DSR ___ - -

_ _ DSR

}-1---+---lr-----+-4--~____f-_+_....(""'1 7

_ _ _ SIG NAL G
8 _ _ _ _ CD

cD_ - - - - - -

o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o
o
DTR _ __ _ _ _

o
o 20- ____ DTR

o
o
o
o

o
o
o

C5·5385

Figure 12 RS-232-C Asynchronous Null Modem Connection

MXSI00-18

MUXserver 100 CABLING

FEMALE

25-PIN
CONN.

PROT.GND

TXD

RXD

RTS
CTS

CTS

DSR

RTS

SIGNAL GND- -

SIGNAL GND

DTR

CS-5381

Figure 13

RS-232-C Synchronous Null Modem Connection

MXSI00-19

MUXserver 100 CABLING

PORT A
(FEMALE)

PORT B
(MALE)

PROT. GND

+RXD

- +TXD

+ClK1

-+CLKO

SIGNAL GND- -

- SIGNALGND

+TXD

-+RXD

-RXD

--TXD

SIGNALGND-

- SIGNAL GND

-ClK1

-TXD

--RXD

-CLKO

CS-5388

Figure 14 Cable RS-422 Test (DECmux II)

MXSI00-20

MUXserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS

Self-Test Diagnostics
The MUXserver 100 diagnostics (self-test) run at power-up and after an INIT or RESTART command.
The self-test provides four main routines that run the following diagnostic tests on the terminal server
logic.
•

Module A Server Memory and Timer Tests - Module A executes from program ROM.

•

Module B UART Transmit/Receive Tests - Perform this module only in manufacturing test
mode. This module requires a loopback connector on the supervisor port. The tests are input
and output to the supervisor port.

•

Module C Network Interface (NI) Transmit/Receive Tests - An image of Module C is written
to program RAM from where the test is executed.

•

Module D Hardware Exerciser - An image of Module D is written to and executed from
program RAM.

Server hardware failures are considered to be fatal (hard) error,s or nonfatal (soft) errors, depending on
their effect on the server's operation. Soft errors consist of failures that may not interfere with normal
server operation but can affect overall efficiency. Hard errors are failures that can disable the server or
cause unreliable or unpredictable operation.
Soft Errors - Table 4 describes the soft error types. Table 5 describes the status parameter longword that
self-test pushes onto the stack before issuing a down-line load request.

Table 4

Nonfatal (Soft) Error Types

Error Type

Description

EEPROM
Checksum
Error

EEPROM is divided into several functional areas with a parameter checksum
maintained in each area. Any checksum error not in the ECO/LANCE revision
area of the EEPROM area is considered to be a soft error.

LANCE Error

When the server is operating in the external loopback mode, self-test flags an
external loop failure in the status longword. The external loopback mode can be
disabled, selecting the internal loopback mode.

Terminal
Port Error

If the supervisor port produces errors, self-test will flag the errors in the status
longword.

MXS100-21

MUXserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS

Table 5 Error Status Parameter Longword
Bits

Error Name/Description

High Word
<15>

Error detected on the U ART.

<14>

EEPROM checksum error in the parameter area for Port 1.

<13>

Not used.

<12>

EEPROM checksum error in the ECO/LANCE revision area.

<11>

NI heartbeat error.

<10>

NI external loopback error.

<09>

EEPROM checksum error in the server parameter area.

<08>

EEPROM checksum error in the server parameter area.

<07:00>

EEPROM checksum error in the parameter areas for Ports 10-17.

Low Word
<15:08>

EEPROM checksum error in the parameter areas for Ports 2-9.

<07>

Power-up flag.

<06:00>

Fatal error code.

MXSI00-22

MUXserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS

Hard Errors - Table 6 describes the hard error types. Table 7 describes the hard error codes written to
EEPROM.

Table 6

Fatal (Hard) Error Types

Error Type

Description

Program RAM
Data Error

Any program RAM data error detected by the dynamic memory tests.

Program ROM
CRC Error

Any error detected on a CRC-16 calculation of the the diagnostic software in
the program ROM.

EEPROM
Checksum
Error

A checksum error in the ECOjLANCE revision area of EEPROM.

Timer Error

Any failure detected by the Refresh or Watchdog Timer tests.

JAM Error

The test failed to unjam from program ROM and continued from program
RAM. Testing must be completed from program ROM.

LANCE Error

Any error detected during initialization or on an Internal Loopback operating
test.

Communications
Processor or
Shared Memory
Error

If the communications processor fails any of its tests or the shared memory
interface to the communications processor fails.

Communications
Port Error

If either of the composite communications ports fails, the server is inoperable.

MXSIOO-23

MUXserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS

Table 7

Fatal (Hard) Error Codes Written to EEPROM

Error Code

Test Name

Module A
01
02
03

04
05

06
07
08

Program RAM READ/WRITE Data Test
Program ROM CRC Test
PA PROM Checksum Test
EEPROM Checksum Test
Program RAM Dynamic READ/WRITE Data Test
Refresh Timer Test
Watchdog Timer Test
EEPROM READ/WRITE Data Test

Module B
10
11
12
13
14

Incorrect Character
Receive Timeout
Transmit Timeout
Unexpected Rx Interrupt
Unexpected Tx Interrupt

Module C
50

51
52

53
54
55
56
57
58
5A

5B
5C

LANCE Internal Loopback Test with Multiple Data Frames
LANCE Accept Broadcast Address Test
Transmit CRC Logic Test
Receive CRC Logic Test (Good CRC)
Receive CRC Logic Test (Bad CRC)
Collision Detection and Retry Test
Accept Multicast Address Test
Reject Multicast Address Test
Reject Physical Address Test
External Network Interface (NI) Loopback Test
Network Interface (NI) Heartbeat Test (Soft Error)
Shared Memory Test Error
Access Timeout, 8085 Processor not Responding

Module D
42

NI Error Exerciser

Communications
IE
31
32
33
34

Communications Memory Failure
ROM 0 Checksum Failure
ROM 1 Checksum Failure
ROM Checksum Failure
Clock Interrupt Failure
Communications/DMA Failure

MXSI00-24

MUXserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS
Status and Error Messages Types
Table 8 lists the types of message codes that IT< ) be returned by the server software during operation.
Status and error messages are displayed in the following format where xxx (unless underlined) is a decimal
status or error code.
Local -xxx- Command response or error message

Table 8 Server Status and Error Message Types
Code Range

Message Type

000-999
and
500-599

Informational messages - normal responses to user commands.

100-199
and
600-699

Warning messages - warnings about events that may not be expected or valid.

200-299

Connection error messages - reasons for terminating or not establishing service
connections.

700-799

User error messages - explanations of why user commands may not be honored.

900-999

Supervisor port messages - status and error messages issued from the MUXserver
100 ROM software.

MXSIOO-25

MUXserver 100 DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic Test Loopback Points
Figure 15 summarizes all the loopback tests available from the MUXserver 100 supervisor port. The
LOOP command and the START TEST PORT n LOOPBACK command are entered in response to the
LOCAL> prompt. All other commands are selected by means of the TEST command in the communications subdirectory (that is; in response to the COM> prompt).

ETHERNET

MODE LOOPBACK
TEST
(Use "LOOP" Command)

__. . .

10..._ _

MUXserverl00

MUXserver LOOPBACK TEST
(USE LOOPBACK CONNECTOR
H325)

~---'----~--~r---r---T-

TMOOEM
CABLE
TEST

REMOTE
DIGITAL
LOOPBACK
TEST

JANALOG

LOOPBACK

LOCAL
MODEM

TERMINAL
LOOPBACK
TEST
(Use "TEST
PORT n
LOOPBACK"
Command)

REMOTE
MODEM
DECmux II
LOOPBACK

TEST!
REMOTE
DECmux II

CS·5370

Figure 15

Diagnostic Test Loopback Points
MXSIOO-26

MUXserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Identifying Problems with the MUXserver 100
This section lists seven possible hardware installation problems, probable causes, and what to do to correct
the problems. The problems are:
1.

No GREEN light.

No messages on the supervisor terminal screen.

Ethernet error messages on the supervisor terminal screen.

NVR error messages on the supervisor terminal screen.

Composite link down messages on the supervisor terminal screen.

No DSR light.

Enter username> prompt does not display.

If one of these symptoms occurs, go to the appropriate table listed with each symptom.

MXSIOO-27

MUXserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
SYMPTOM: NO GREEN LIGHT
After each action in the "What To Do" column, wait approximately 20 seconds and then recheck the
indicator light to see if a constant GREEN light displays.
Table 9 No GREEN Light
Probable Cause

What To Do

MUXserver 100 power cable is
not connected securely

Check power cable at both ends.

No power in wall outlet

Check outlet with a working device (such as a lamp).

Incorrect voltage switch
setting

Check that the voltage select switch on the back of the
MUXserver 100 is set at the correct voltage setting.
Unplug the power cord before changing it.

MUXserver 100 fuse is
defective

Unplug the power cord and replace fuse.

SYMPTOM: NO MESSAGES ON THE SUPERVISOR TERMINAL SCREEN
Before continuing, be sure to press the RETURN key on the terminal several times. If the prompt does
not display, perform the actions in the "What To Do" column. After each action, press RETURN several
times to see if the prompt displays.
Table 10 No Messages
Probable Cause

What To Do

Terminal power switch
is OFF

Verify that the terminal is plugged in and turn ON the
terminal power switch.

Incorrect terminal
operating parameters

Display terminal operating parameters. Change parameters if they are not set to eight bits, no parity, and 9600
bits/so

Data terminal cable
connections are not
securely connected

Check that the correct cable is being used and that the
connections are tight at both ends.

Terminal is malfunctioning

Use another terminal and press RETURN to see if
prompt displays.

Terminal cable is
faulty

Replace cable with another cable that is operating
correctly.

MXSIOO-28

MUXserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
SYMPTOM: ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGES ON THE SUPERVISOR TERMINAL SCREEN
Before each action in the "What To Do" column, turn the power switch OFF on the MUXserver 100.
After each action, turn the power switch ON. Wait approximately 20 seconds and then recheck the
indicator light to see if the constant GREEN light displays.
Table 11

Ethernet Error Message

Probable Cause

What To Do

Power was applied before
transceiver cable was
connected.

Switch OFF the power, wait 20 seconds, then turn it ON
again.

Transceiver cable
connections are not tight

Check transceiver cable connections at both ends.

Transceiver cable is faulty

Connect the MUXserver 100 to another transceiver cable
that is operating correctly.

Transceiver/DELNI cable
port is faulty

Connect the MUXserver 100 to another transceiver or
DELNI cable port that is operating correctly.

SYMPTOM: NVR ERROR MESSAGE ON THE SUPERVISOR TERMINAL SCREEN
Table 12 NVR Error Message
Probable Cause

What to Do

Nonvolatile Memory
Checksum Error

Reset the MUXserver 100 to factory settings using the
following procedure:
Turn the POWER ON/OFF switch on the MUXserver
100 OFF for five seconds and ON again, while at the
same time, continuously depressing the RESET switch on
the back of the unit. Only after switching ON the POWER switch and waiting for ten seconds can the RESET
switch be released.
If, after executing this procedure, the same error occurs,
there is a fatal error with the unit and it will require
repair.

MXSI00-29

MUXserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
SYMPTOM: COMPOSITE LINK DOWN MESSAGES ON THE SUPERVISOR TERMINAL
SCREEN
The MUXserver 100 provides the composite link status on the terminal connected to the supervisor port.
For example, the message may be:
"Composite Link A UP"

"Composite Link B DOWN"

Providing a user does not "logon" to the supervisor port in response to:
"ENTER Username>"
any change in the status of the composite links is displayed automatically.
An indication that a composite link is DOWN may not mean that a problem exists. For example, a
composite link not in use will be displayed as being DOWN.
Table 13 Problems with the Composite Link
Probable Cause

What To Do

DECmux II at the remote
site is not properly
installed and powered up

Check that the remote DECmux II sites have been correctly installed.

Composite link cable is
not connected properly

Check cable connections between MUXserver 100 and
synchronous modem (cable BC22F synchronous modem
cable). The DSR light should be ON.

Composite link cable is
not connected properly
at the remote DECmux II
site

Check cable connections between the DECmux II and
synchronous modem at the remote site (cable BC22F synchronous modem cable). The DSR light on the DECmux
II should be ON.

Incorrect multiplexer
configura tion

Check that the composite link from Port A of the
MUXserver 100 connects to composite Port B of a remote
DECmux II. Alternately a link from Port B of the
MUXserver 100 must connect to a composite Port A of a
remote DECmux II.

Incompatible link

The composite link parameters of both the MUXserver
100 and the DECmux II are preset to the factory default
settings of: 9600 baud, RS-232-C, modem control. This
installation procedure is based on these settings being
unchanged. If these settings have been changed, refer to
the MUXserver 100 Network Reference Manual, Chapter 2, Section 2.9 to reset them to the factory settings. To
set both the MUXserver 100 and the DECmux II to other
than the factory settings, refer to Chapter 2 of the MUXserver 100 Network Reference Manual.

Composite link unusable

Use the diagnostics on the MUXserver 100 and DECmux
II, as outlined in Section 4.3 of the MUXserver 100 Network Reference Manual, to identify the faulty
component.

MXSIOO-30

MUXserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
SYMPTOM: NO DSR LIGHT
The two RED LED indicators on the rear of the MUXserver 100 indicate the status of the composite port
Data Set Ready (DSR) conductors. The ON state indicates the successful connection to a modem on the
respective composite port. The OFF state indicates that the modem is either in the process of connecting or
not connected.
NOTE
When using RS-422 composite links, the DSR LEDs
have no meaning and will not light.
Table 14 No DSR Light
Probable Cause

What To Do

Modem cable not properly
connected

Check that modem cable BC22F is properly connected
between the composite port (A or B) and the synchronous
modem.

Modem faulty

Check modem.

SYMPTOM: ENTER USERNAME> PROMPT DOES NOT DISPLAY
Before continuing, be sure to press the RETURN key on the terminal several times to see if the prompt
displays.
Table 15- No Enter Username> Prompt
Probable Cause

What To Do

Software is not installed
or is installed incorrectly
on the load host.

Report problem to system/network manager.

Server Ethernet address
is not configured on
the load host.

Report problem to system/network manager.

MXSIOO-31

MUXserver 100 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Resetting the MUXserver 100 Unit to Factory Settings
The software reset feature permits a change of data in the permanent database to DIGITAL factory
specifications. It is recommended that software reset be executed only when absolutely necessary.
To cause a software reset, locate the RESET switch on the back of the MUXserver 100 hardware unit.
Simultaneously press the RESET switch while switching the power ON/OFF switch on the front of the
unit OFF then ON. An immediate server initialization occurs and all permanent and operational database
parameters are reset to factory settings.
Following the reset procedure, the privilege password is "system", and the login password is "access".
Setting Up the Network MAP
The mapping concept allows the server manager to modify the logical asynchronous line connections. The
factory setting of the MUXserver 100 has all 16 asynchronous lines of the remote DECmux II units
mapped to the MUXserver 100.
To change the MAP enter the following sequence:
LOCAL> SET PRIVILEGE
PASSWORD> (Enter the "privilege" password)
LOCAL> COMM
COM> MAP
The COM command provides access to the subdirectory of commands that apply to the composite and
remote DECmux II units. Enter HELP for a listing of the available commands.
COM> MAPHELP
This command provides specific HELP with the MAP command.
To alter the MAP, enter the MAP command.
COM> MAP
Setting Up Printers
Any DECmux II port devices can be replaced with an asynchronous serial printer. This allows the
MUXserver 100 users to obtain hard-copy printouts from network services. Printer ports have remote
access, and sessions between printers and service nodes are remote sessions.
The system manager needs to know the names given to the remote access ports on the server. The system
manager can then use LAT control program commands to create a path from virtual ports on the service
nodes to the printer ports on the MUXserver 100.
Use the DEFINE PORT command to set up these port characteristic values for each printer port.

MXS100-32

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION
MUXserver 300 REMOfE TERMINAL SERVER

NOTE
This chapter has been updated to support both the
MUXserver 300 and the later versioo MUXserver
310 products. Both the General Description sectioo
and Figure 1 have been revised, and a part number list
for the MUXserver 310 has been added.

General Description
Both the MUXserver 300 and the MUXserver 310 (Figure 1) are high performance, low cost, remote
terminal servers for use on Local Area Networks (LAN). Both MUXservers interface up to 192 (48 active
for the MUXserver 300 and 16 active for the MUXserver 310) remote terminals to a LAN by way of wide
area network (WAN) facilities as shown in Figure 2. The terminals are physically connected to DECmux
300 units that may be located at separate remote geographic locations. Each DECmux 300 communicates
with the MUXserver either directly or indirectly (through another DECmux 300 unit) using statistical
multiplexed synchronous links. These composite links are provided by synchronous modems and the leased
lines of the public data networks, or local null-modem connections. Each terminal appears to have a direct
connection to the computer systems and resources provided by the LAN.

MUXserver 300 OR 310
RESET SWITCH--~
CONTROl/INDICATOR PANEL
VOL T AGE SELECT SWITCH -~~
POWER CORD RECEPTACLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER
ETHERNET ADDRESS LABEL

SUPERVISOR PORT

ETHERNET CONNECTOR
MKV89·0456

Figure 1

MUXserver 300 Remote Terminal Server

MXS300-1

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

ETHERNET CABLE

TERMINALS

TERMINALS
SN-OI85-88

Figure 2 MUXserver/DECmux 300 Network
Features
The MUXserver/DECmux 300 remote terminal network offers the following features.
•

Provides remote terminal access to a LAN.

•

Permits fast, easy connections between devices attached to the remote terminal network and
devices on the LAN.

•

Manages device traffic and leaves computer systems with more time for application tasks.

•

Reduces and simplifies the cabling required for connecting devices to the network.

•

Supports dial-in and dial-out modems.

•

Provides access to Digital and non-Digital host systems on the LAT network.

•

Allows connection between devices on the LAN.
MXS300-2

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

MUXserver/DECmux 300 Configurations
Many different configurations of MUXserver/DECmux 300 networks are possible with the following
constraints.
•

There can be only one MUXserver 300 in a MUXserver/DECmux 300 network.

•

The maximum number of DECmux 300 units in a MUXserver/DECmux 300 network is six.

•

The DECmux 300 units must be connected to the MUXserver 300 by composite links either
directly or indirectly (by daisy-chaining the DECmux 300 units).

•

A maximum of three DECmux 300 units can be daisy-chained together.

•

The MUXserver/DECmux 300 network must be a linear network; that is, it must not contain
circular composite link paths. As a result, there can be only one composite link path between any
DECmux 300 and the MUXserver 300, and there can be only one composite link path between
any two DECmux 300 units.

Figures 3 and 4 show two typical configurations of the MUXserver/DECmux 300 remote terminal network.

H4000/4005

ETHERNET

MUXserver 300

SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

DECmux 300

CONNECTS TO A PORT

CONNECTS TO B PORT
SN-O 186-88

Figure 3

MUXserver /DECmux 300 Network Configuration 1

MXS300-3

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

H4000/4005

ETHERNET

MUXserver 300

SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL

DECmux 300

SN-0187-88

Figure 4

MUXserver/DECmux 300 Network Configuration 2

MXS300-4

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION
MUXserver 300 Versions
The MUXserver 300 is available in two versions. They are as follows:

Model

Input Voltage

Digital Part Number

DSRZC-AA
DSRZC-AB

100 - 120 Vac
220 - 240 Vac

70-24790-01
70-24790-02

MUXserver 310 Versions
The MUXserver 310 is available in two versions. They are as follows:

Model

Input Voltage

Digital Part Number

DSRZC-BA
DSRZC-BB

100-120 Vac
220-240 Vac

70-24790-03
70-24790-04

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the MUXserver 300 remote terminal server.

•

MUXserver/DECmux 300 Software Installation
Guide for VMS

AA-MJ78A-TE

•

MUXserver/DECmux 300 Software Installation
Guide for ULTRIX/ULTRIX-32m

AA-MJ92A-TE

•
•
•
•
•

MUXserver / DECmux 300 Network Reference Manual

EK-DSRZC-RM

MUXserver/DECmux 300 Network Installation Manual

EK-DSRZC-IM

MUXserver / DECmux 300 User's Guide

EK-DSRZC-UG

MUXserver 300 Technical Manual

EK-DSRZC-TM

DECmux 300 Technical Manual

EK-DSRZC-DM

MXS300-5

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION
Hardware Components
The following hardware is required for a MUXserver 300 installation.
•

MUXserver 300 remote terminal server (order number DSRZC-Ax) which contains:
MUXserver 300 unit
Ethernet loopback connector (P IN: 12-221 96-0 1)
Synchronous port loopback connector (PIN: H3199)
Rack mounting kit (PIN: H041-AC)
MUXserverI DECmux 300 Network Installation Manual
MUXserver I DECmux 300 Network Reference Manual
MUXserverI DECmux 300 Network Identification Card
USA/Canada country kit (PIN: DSRZA-KA)

•

Country kit with power cord suitable for the country

•

Transceiver cable (PIN: BNE3x-xx or BNE4x-xx)

•

Adapter cable and extension cable (if required) for each synchronous composite port to be
connected

•

DEC OFFICE cable (PIN: BC16E with appropriate H8571-x adapter, if necessary) for supervisor port connection

•

If not already installed, either:
Standard Ethernet transceiver
BNC TEE-connector and DESTA for ThinWire Ethernet

Software Components
MUXserver 300 operation requires the following three software packages:
1.

MUXserver 300 distribution software - Installed on at least one load host.

DECnet Phase IV software - Installed on at least one load host.

LAT service node software - Required on all LAT service nodes that communicate with
MUXserver 300 devices.

The distribution software must be installed on a load host that runs DEC net Phase IV. software. The
distribution software includes a server image file that is down-line loaded to the MUXserver 300. The server
image constitutes the server software that enables the server to perform its functions.
Table 1 Minimum Operating System Version
Operating System

Version

VMS
ULTRIX

4.6 or later
2.0

MXS300-6

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

Equipment Placement
The MUXserver 300 can be located in a variety of environments, including offices and computer rooms. The
MUXserver 300 can be rack or wall mounted or placed on a desk or shelf.
Environmental Requirements
Temperature
Relative Humidity

5° to 50°C (41° to 122°F)
10% to 90% (noncondensing)

Physical Description (Desktop or Wall Mount Configuration)
Length
Height
Depth
Weight (unpacked)

49.4 cm (19.4 in)
16.2 cm (6.4 in)
31.3 cm (12.3 in)
6.0 kg (13.2 Ib)

Power Requirements
The operating power range of the MUXserver 300 is provided in Table 2.
Table 2

DSRZC Power Requirements

Version

Nominal
Voltage

Voltage
Range

Current

Frequency

DSRZC-AA
DSRZC-AB

120 Vac
240 Vac

100 - 120
220 - 240

0.5 A
0.3 A

50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz

MXS300-7

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION
Installation Flow Diagram

SECURE MUXserver 300
INSTALLATION
INFORMATION FROM
THE APPROPRIATE
MANAGER (NETWORK,
SYSTEM, OR SERVER

VERIFY WITH THE
APPROPRIATE
MANAGER THAT THE
MUXserver 300
INSTALLATION SITE
MEETS SITE PREPARATION REaUIREMENTS

UNPACK, INSPECT,
AND VERIFY THE CONTENTS OF THE
MUXserver 300 BOX

UNPACK, INSPECT,
AND VERIFY CONTENTS OF THE
MUXserver 100 ACCESSORIES BOX(ES).

Figure 5

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 1 of 4)

MXS300-8

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS IN THE
WALL-MOUNTING
HARDWARE KIT

REMOVE THE EIGHT
SCREWS FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 6)

FASTEN THE
MOUNTING BRACKETS
TO THE UNIT
(SEE FIGURE 6)

Figure 5 Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 2 of 4)

MXS300-9

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

ARRANGE FOR
SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION

•

LOCATE SERIAL NUMBER AND ETHERNET
ADDRESS ON BACK OF SERVER.

•

FILL OUT THE MUXserver 300 IDENTIFICATION CARD.

•

GIVE THE MUXserver 300 IDENTIFICATION
CARD TO THE APPROPRIATE MANAGER.

•

ASK TO BE NOTIFIED WHEN THE SOFTWARE
IS INSTALLED.

CONNECT TRANSCEIVER CABLE
(SEE FIGURE 7)

CONNECT THE
SUPERVISOR
TERMINAL CABLE
(SEE' FIGURE 7)

CONNECT COMPOSITE LINK CABLES
TO MODEMS
(SEE FIGURE 7)

SET VOLTAGE
SELECTION SWITCH
TO MATCH POWER
CORD VOLTAGE
(SEE FIGURE 8)

Figure 5

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 3 of 4)

MXS300-10

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

3
• MAKE SURE THE TRANSCEIVER CABLE IS
CONNECTED AT BOTH ENDS.

VERIFY INSTALLATION

• CHECK WITH THE SYSTEM MANAGER THAT
THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETE.
•

PLUG POWER CORD
INTO THE MUXserver 300
AND INTO THE
WALL OUTLET

SET POWER SWITCH
ON THE MUXserver 300
TO "1" (ON
POSITION)

VERIFY MUXserver 300
300 OPERATION

INSTALL THE DECmux SOO UNITS "T THE
REMOTE SITES.

• ENSURE THAT THE COMPOSITE LINKS TO
THE REMOTE DECmux 300 UNITS ARE PROPERLY CONNECTED.

• VERIFY THAT THE GREEN LED IS LIT ON THE
REAR OF THE MUXserver SOO.
• THE TERMINAL ON THE SUPERVISOR PORT
SHOULD DISPLAY A MESSAGE 20 SECONDS
AFTER POWER-UP.
• PRESS THE RETURN KEY SEVER"L TIMES.
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE SHOULD BE DISPLAYED IF THE MUXserver 300 HAS BEEN
PROPERLY INSTALLED.
MUXserver 300 REMOTE TERMINAL SE RVER V2.0
(BLG-<LAT VS.1)
ENTER USERNAME>
•

REFER TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION
IF THE ABOVE MESSAGE WAS NOT DISPL" YEO. VERIFY THAT THE DATA SET READY
(OS R) LED IS ON FOR ALL SYNCHRONOUS
RS-2S2-C LINK CONNECTIONS TO THE
MUXserver SOO.

STOP

Figure 5

Installation Flow Diagram (Sheet 4 of 4)

MXS300-11

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

INSTALL
CAPTIVE NUTS

SN-0158-8 8

Figure 6

Rack Mounting the MUXserver 300

MXS300-12

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

Q ~-

_....

...

MUJ.,.rv,r 100

.!..

~ o\::.:.::~:.:.:·:::Jo o(.::::::~::::.::)o ~ ~~g:;g'~g'~ (j§j)

COMPOSITE
LINK
CABLE

SUPERVlsol
TERMINAL
CABLE

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
MKV89-0043

Figure 7

Connecting Cables

MXS300-13

MUXserver 300 INSTALLATION

FOR 100/120V OPERATION:
IF "240V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,

SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT" 120V' IS
VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

FOR 220/240V OPERATION:
IF "120V" IS VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW,
SLIDE THE SWITCH SO THAT "240V" IS

•

VISIBLE IN THE WINDOW.

SN-Q 157-88

Figure 8

Selecting Operating Voltage

MXS300-14

MUXserver 300 CABLING
Cabling
The MUXserver 300 has the following three types of data ports.
•
•
•

An Ethernet port
Two synchronous composite ports
A supervisor port

The Ethernet Port - The Ethernet port is connected to the network by a transceiver cable. The transceiver
cable can be connected to one of the following items.
•

Another transceiver cable section. This cable can be secured in an Etherjack junction box.

•

A DELNI local network interconnect.

•

A transceiver on a standard Ethernet coaxial cable for Digital baseband networks, or a DECOM
for Digital broadband networks.

•

A ThinWire Ethernet station adapter (DESTA) on a ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cable.

•

A standard rack cabinet in a satellite equipment room (SER) for DECconnect systems.

Figures 9 and 10 show how the Ethernet port can be cabled.
STANDARD
ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER CABLES

TRANSCEIVER CABLE
DELNI
ETHERJACK

MUXserver 300

SN·-OI88·88

Figure 9

Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Connection

MXS300-15

MUXserver 300 CABLING

ThinWire ETHERNET COAXIAL CABLE

DESTA

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
DELNI
ETHERJACK

MUXserver 300

SN-0189-88

Figure 10

Thin Wire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Connection

MXS300-16

MUXserver 300 CABLING
The Two Synchronous Composite Ports - A composite link (Figure 11) on the MUXserver/DECmux 300
network typically includes the following components.
•

An adapter cable which connects the synchronous composite port to a synchronous modem via an
extension cable.

•

A synchronous modem for interfacing between the adapter cable and the leased communications
line. Modems are required at each end of the communications line.

•

A leased communications line which provides the physical communications path between the two
MUXserver /DECmux 300 units on each end of the composite link.

The synchronous composite ports can be connected to external devices that are compatible with various
interface standards. Selecting a particular interface standard for a composite port is done by using the
appropriate adapter cable and extension cable if needed. Table 3 shows the various interface standards and
their associated cables.
Link speeds supported for the various interfaces are shown in Table 4.

H4000/4005

ETHERNET

DECmux 300

MUXserver 300

RS-42 2-A/NULL -MODEM
UNIT INTERCONNECT
CABLE (BC19Y-10)

ADAPTOR
CABLE

EXTENSION
CABLE

DECmux 300

SYNCHRONOUS
MODEM

LEASED
COMMUNICATIONS
LINE

SYNCHRONOUS
MODEM
SN-O 190-88

Figure 11

Composite Link Connections

MXS300-17

MUXserver 300 CABLING

Table 3 Composite Port Interface Standards and Associated Cables
Interface

Adapter
Cable

Extension
Cable

Loopback
Connector

Cable
Code

Y.24/Y.28/EIA-232-Dl

BC19D-02

BC22F-xx

H3248

1101 3

Y.35

BC19F-02

BC19L-xx

H3250

1110

Y.36/RS-449/RS-423-A2

BC19E-02

BC55D-xx

H3198

1101 3

Y.36/RS-449/RS-422-A

BC19B-02

BC55D-xx

H3198

1011 4

X21

BC19C-02

BC19U-xx

H3047

1100

X 21 Data Leads Only

BC22X-02

BCI9U-xx

H3047

1011 4

RS-422-A/Null-Modem 5

BC19Y-1O

1001

IThe BC19D-02 adapter cable interfaces directly with Y.24/Y.28 devices. The Y.24/EIA-232-D adapter
connector (12-27591-01) may be needed to be used together with the adapter cable for interfacing with
EIA-232-D devices. BS19D-02 is an EIA-232-D interface kit which consists of a BC19D-02 adapter cable
and a Y.24/EIA-232-D adapter connector.
2The Y.36/RS-449/RS-423-A interface is not directly supported by the MUXserver/DECmux 300.
However, in most applications, it will work with the appropriate adapter cable.
3The Y.24/Y.28 adapter cable has an identical cable code to the RS-449/RS-423-A adapter cable.
4The Y.36/RS-449/RS-422-A adapter cable has an identical cable code as the X2I/Data Leads Only
adapter cable.
5The null-modem unit interconnect cable is not an adapter cable. It interconnects two synchronous composite
ports directly without intervening modems and communications lines.

MXS300-I8

MUXserver 300 CABLING

Table 4

Link Speeds for Synchronous Composite Ports

Interface Standard

Speed Range

Y.24/Y.28/EIA-232-D

9.6 Kbits/s, 14.4 Kbits/s, 19.2 Kbits/s

Y.35

48 Kbits/s, 56 Kbits/s, 64 Kbits/s

Y. 36/RS-44 9

9.6 Kbits/s, 14.4 Kbits/s, 19.2 Kbits/s,
48 Kbits/s, 56 Kbits/s, 64 Kbits/s

RS-422-A/Null-Modem

9.6 Kbits/s, 14.4 Kbits/s, 19.2 Kbits/s,
48 Kbits/s, 56 Kbits/s, 64 Kbits/s

X.2I

9.6 Kbits/s, 14.4 Kbits/s, 19.2 Kbits/s,
48 Kbits/s, 56 Kbits/s, 64 Kbits/s

X.2I/Data Leads Only

9.6 Kbits/s, 14.4 Kbits/s, 19.2 Kbits/s,
48 Kbits/s, 56 Kbits/s, 64 Kbits/s

The Supervisor Port - A DEC OFFICE cable (BCI6E) connects an asynchronous terminal to the

MUXserver 300 (Figure 12).
MUXserver 300

Q -."..~'"'"

BC16E-xx
DEC OFFICE CABLE

TERMINAL - - - - -

SN-0191-88

Figure 12

Supervisor Port Connection

MXS300-19

MUXserver 300 DIAGNOSTICS
Self-Test Diagnostics
When power is applied to the MUXserver 300, it performs a diagnostic self-test and initiates a request for a
down-line load of the MUXserver 300 image from a load host. The self-test normally takes about 60 seconds
to complete, but may take longer if the network is busy.
Informational messages are displayed on the supervisor terminal when self-test is complete and the image
down-line load proceeds.
Allow a minimum of 3 minutes for the self-test and down-line loading of the MUXserver 300 image to
complete, then compare the state of the four green status LEOs on the MUXserver 300 with Figure 13.
For definitions of the status LEOs see Table 5. For additional information see the Troubleshooting section in
this document.

I!! • ./'0;;'_

==---.-=_

~~.;,~~~~

~
~

= MAY BE ON OR OFF

OR FLICKERING, INDICATING
NETWORK TRAFFIC.
MKV89-0044

Figure 13

MUXserver 300 Status LEOs

MXS300-20

MUXserver 300 DIAGNOSTICS
Table 5

MUXserver 300 Status Indicator LEDs

LED
Name

Symbol

Color

State

Symptom

Power
Indicator

Green

MUXserver 300 internal dc supply voltages are correct

OFF

MUXserver 300 internal dc supply voltages are incorrect

Ethernet
Traffic

Green

ON, OFF,
or Flashing

Indicates activity on the host Ethernet
network

Server
Ready

Green

Self-test passed

OFF

1. Self-test in progress
2. Fatal error detected

Flashing

Nonfatal error detected

MUXserver 300 image successfully
down-line loaded

OFF

Down-line loading in progress

Flashing

Multiple-load failure detected

Modem connected to Composite Link A
is ready

OFF

Modem connected to Composite Link A
is not ready

MUXserver 300 has established communications with the associated DECmux
300 on Composite Link A

OFF

MUXserver 300 has not established
communications with the associated
DECmux 300 on Composite Link A

Modem connected to Composite Link B
is ready

OFF

Modem connected to Composite Link B
is not ready

MUXserver 300 has established communications with the associated DECmux
300 on Composite Link B

OFF

MUXserver 300 has not established
communications with the associated
DECmux 300 on Composite Link B

Server
On-Line

Composite
Link A
Ready

Composite
Link A
On-Line

Composite
Link B
Ready

Composite
Link B
On-Line

Green

Yellow

MXS300-21

MUXserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Troubleshooting
What to do First 1.

Check the MUXserver 300 and DECmux 300 Status LEDs.
a. Table 6 will help in interpreting these LEDs.

Check the console error messages.
a.

Examples 1 through 3 list the console error messages.

b. Configure the console terminal for 9600 bits/s, no parity, and 8-bit characters.
Table 6

MUXserver 300 and DECmux 300 LED Indications

Symptom

Problem

Correction

Power indicator LED
OFF

No dc voltage

Verify that ac power is applied to the
unit.
Ensure that the voltage select switch is
set to the correct country voltage.
Reset the circuit breaker.
Replace the unit.

Ready LED remains
OFF for more than
60 seconds

Fatal hardware
error

Replace the unit.

Ready LED blinking

Nonfatal hardware
error

See Example 1.

On-line LED
blinking for more
than 3 minutes

Telephone data
link failure

Verify the software installation on the
load host.
Look at messages on supervisor port for
more details.

MXS300-22

MUXserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Example 1: Error Messages
Local -920- Parameter checksum error on port n
Local -921- Factory-set parameters applied to port n
Local -922- Port hardware error on port n
Local -923- Port n has been disabled
Local -930- Server parameters checksum error
Local -931- Factory-set server parameters applied
Local -932- Hardware revision level checksum error
Local -933- Station parameter checksum error
Local -934- Factory-set station parameters applied
Local -935- Service parameter checksum error
Local -936- Service has been disabled
Local -937 - Link characteristics checksum error
Local -938- Factory-set link parameters applied
Local -941- Transceiver loop back error
Local -942- Image load not attempted
Local -950- Troubleshooting procedures should be followed
Local -943- Transceiver heartbeat error
Local -944- Check transceiver type for heartbeat support
Example 2: Image Fails to Load
Local -901- Initializing DECserver xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx - ROM
BIn, H/W Rev x.x
Local -902- Waiting for image to load
Local -903- Loading from host xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
Local -912- Load failure, timeout
Local -902- Waiting for image to load
Local -912- Load failure, timeout
Example 3: Fatal Bugcbeck
Local -913- Fatal Bugcheck PC=n, SP=n, SR=n, MEM=n, CODE=n

MXS300-23

MUXserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
3.

Use the SHOW LINK COUNTERS command to view the link counters for both link A and link B.
The line statistics might indicate a problem area. Example 4 proJ:ides a sample of the link A counters
obtained by using the SHOW LINK A COUNTERS command. A definition of the counters is also
provided.
Example 4: SHOW LINK A COUNTERS
Station: NSG-SYDNEY

Link A: HDLC/LAPB
Seconds Since Zeroed:
Bytes Received:
Bytes Sent:
Frames Received:
Frames Sent:
Invalid Frames Rcv'd:
FRMR Frames Rcv'd:
Receive Overrun:
Transmit Underrun:

1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890
1234567890

Receive Failures:
1234567890
Receive_CRC Errors:
1234567890
Receive-Size Errors:
1234567890
Receive-Sequence Errors: 1234567890
Send Failures (REJ Rcv'd): 1234567890
1234567890
Polls Received:
1234567890
Remote Reply Timeouts:
1234567890
RNR Frames Received:
1234567890
Local Buffer Errors:

Counter Definitions:
Seconds Since Zeroed:

Seconds since counts last zeroed.

Bytes Received:

Total number of bytes received.

Bytes Sent:

Total number of bytes transmitted successfully.

Frames Received:

Total number of I frames received.

Frames Sent:

Total number of I frames transmitted successfully.

Invalid Frames Rcv'd:

Count of frames received with invalid address or control field.

FRMR Frames Rcv'd:

Count of FRMR frames received. A frame with a
nonrecoverable error has been received at the other
end. The link is reset on receiving an FRMR frame.

Receive Overrun:

Count of USART Rx overrun errors.

Transmit Underrun:

Count of Tx underrun errors during DMA.

Receive Failures:

Sum of Receive_CRC/Size/Sequence error counts.

Receive_CRC Errors:

Count of CRC errors in frames received.

Receive_Size Errors:

Count of frames that are too long or too short.

Receive-Sequence Errors:

Count of sequence errors in frames received. Frames
have been corrupted and discarded.

MXS300-24

MUXserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Send Failures (REJ Rcv'd):

Count of REJ frames received. Frames transmitted
have been corrupted and discarded. The receiver is
requesting retransmission of frames.

Polls Received:

Count of frames received with the p. bit set. Start
link requests or idle messages are received when count
is incrementing.

Remote Reply Timeouts:

Count of number of Tl timeouts. Receiver has not
acknowledged the transmitted frames within the period of the retransmit timeout.

RNR Frames Received:

Count of RNR frames received. The receiver is not
ready to receive because the number of frames for
forwarding increases above limit.

Local Buffer Errors:

This station has temporarily run out of buffer.

Problems With the Composite Link - Use the following procedure when troubleshooting the composite link
from either the MUXserver 300 or DECmux 300.
1.

Connect a console terminal to the local unit.

Press the <RETURN> key a few times and log into the Local mode. If the DECmux 300 has
not established communications with the MUXserver 300, the Standalone mode will be entered
instead of the Normal mode. Under the Standalone mode, only the following commands are
allowed.
SET/DEFINE/SHOW/LIST [LINK I PORT I STATION]
TEST [LINK I PORT]
SET/DEFINE PRIVILEGED PASSWORD
SET PRIVILEGED

Use the SET PRIVILEGED command, then continue with the next step.

Enable broadcast on the console port by using the SET PORT BROADCAST ENABLED
command. It may be necessary to reset the unit parameters to the factory defaults. If so, press
and hold the Reset button while removing and reinserting the ac power cord.

After verifying the power and interface connections to the MUXserver 300, DECmux 300, and modems,
proceed with Table 7.

MXS300-25

MUXserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 7

Composite Link Problem Checklist

Item

Action

Communication line
incorrect

Verify that the leased line (for X.2I only leased line operation is
supported) has been arranged with the common carrier or Public
Telephone & Telegraph (PTT) authorities.

Network incorrectly
configured

Verify that the network is correctly installed.

Link state OFF

Use the SHOW LINK command to verify that the link state is ON.
If the link state is OFF, use the SET/DEFINE LINK command to
set the link state ON.

Link address incorrect

Use the SHOW LINK CHARACTERISTICS command to verify
the link address. Use the SET/DEFINE LINK ADDRESS command to set the link address to DTE, DCE, or DYNAMIC. When
one end of the composite link is addressed DTE, then the other end
must be addressed DCE. Both ends of the link can be addressed
DYNAMIC.
NOTE: DYNAMIC is the recommended setting.

Synchronous modem
speeds and interface
standards incompatible

Check speeds and interface standards on both sides of the composite
link. The two ends of the composite link will normally use the same
standard, but not always. The speed will almost always be the same
at each end.

Interface type and
link speed incorrect

If the parameters stored in the dynamic link database are different
from those detected at link start-up time:
•

A warning message will be generated when the cable type
detected is different from the cable type stored.

•

A warning message will be generated when the modem clock
speed detected is different from the modem clock speed stored.
NOTE: This will not prevent proper operation of the
MUXserver /DECmux 300 network.

Link status
disconnecting or
connecting

Use the SHOW LINK command to verify that the modem is providing the correct modem signals.

Station cannot
transmit frames

Ensure that the model'l is providing transmit and receive clock
signals.
Use the SHOW LINK CHARACTERISTICS command and compare the actual values stored with the mode speed and interface
cable type.

MXS300-26

MUXs.erver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS

Table 8

Composite Link Status LEDs

Ready

On-Line

Problem and Correction

OFF

Problem:
Modem not on-line
Correction:
Use the SHOW LINK command to display the link status.

If the link status is Running, and the On-Line LED is OFF, replace the
unit.
If the link status is other than Running, verify that the link state is ON and
the output signals are DTR and RTS. Use the SET LINK STATE ON
command if the link state is OFF.
If the output signals are not DTR and R TS, wait a few seconds and then try
again.
If the input signals are not DSR, OCD, and CTS, go to the Fault Isolation
Procedure for Composite Link Problems section that immediately follows
this table.
Problem:
Composite link not ready (on the other end of the link).
Correction:
Check the composite link ready at the other end of the link. Using this
table, perform the indicated corrective action on the other end of the link.
OFF

N/A

Problem:
Modem is not activating the carrier detect circuit.
Correction:
Check the modems on both ends of the link. Some modems like to see data
terminal ready (CCITT 108/2) ON before asserting data carrier detect
(DCD). Use the SHOW LINK command to check that the link state is ON
and that the DTR status is ON.
Problem:
Network terminating unit (NTU) is not activating the indicate (I) circuit in
an X.21 network.
Correction:
Check the NTU at both ends of the link. Some NTUs like to see CTRL C
before asserting the indicate (I) signal. Use the SHOW LINK command to
check that the link state is ON.

MXS300-27

MUXserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
Table 8
Ready

Composite Link Status LEDs (Cont)
On-Line

Problem and Correction
Problem:
Receive clock is not detected when the RS-422-A/null-modem interconnect cable is used.
Correction:
Check the units at both ends of the link. Use the SHOW LINK command
to check that the link state is ON. Check that the composite link cable is
properly connected.

Fault Isolation Procedure for Composite Link Problems - The procedure below is used to test the composite
link.
1.

Use the SET LINK STATE SERVICE command to set the link into the Service state.

Use the SET LINK command to set the interface type and link speed.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK INTERNAL command to execute an internalloopback test.

When the test completes, if an error is found, the hardware is faulty. Replace the unit under test.

Disconnect the adapter cable from the composite link and connect the H3199 loopback connector
to the unit under test.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL command to execute an externalloopback
test. If an error occurs, replace the unit under test.

When the test completes, if an error is found, the hardware is faulty. Replace the unit under test.

If the RS-422-A/null-modem interconnect cable is not used, skip the next step.

Repeat all of the above steps for the unit at the other end of the RS-422-A/null-modem
interconnect cable. If the other unit is not faulty, replace the interconnect cable.

10.

Connect and secure the adapter cable to the composite port.

11.

Disconnect the extension cable (or modem) from the other end of the adapter cable.

12.

Connect a loopback connector to the extension cable (see Table 3). Refer to the MUXserver/ DECmux 300 Network Reference Manual for more information on loopback connectors.

13.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL command to execute an externalloopback
test. If an error occurs, replace the cable under test.

14.

Connect the extension cable back to the adapter at the local end.

MXS300-28

MUXserver 300 MAINTENANCE AIDS
15.

Disconnect the extension cable at the remote (far) end. Connect an appropriate loopback connector to the remote end.

16.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL command to execute an externalloopback
test. If an error occurs, replace the cable under test.

17.

Repeat the above steps to test other extension cable segments if more then one is used.

18.

Put the modem into the Local Loopback mode.

19.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL MODEM LOCAL command to execute an
external loopback test. If an error occurs, replace the modem under test.

20.

Put the local modem into the Normal Operation mode, and the remote modem into the Remote
Loopback mode.

21.

Use the TEST LINK LOOPBACK EXTERNAL MODEM REMOTE command to execute an
external loop back test. If an error occurs, repeat this procedure at the remote end of the
composite link. The remote site would then become the local site. Ask the PTT authorities or
common carrier to verify the telephone data link between modems.

22.

Return the modems to the normal modes after fault isolation.

MXS300-29

TPENETINSTALLATION
TPENET TWISTED-PAIR ETHERNET ADAPTER
General Description
The TPENET is an unshielded, twisted-pair (TP), Ethernet adapter that allows the use of unshielded TP
cable from the Ethernet wiring closet to the desktop .. TPENET meets IEEE 802.3 specifications and
delivers 10 Mbits/s performance to desktop and local systems. This level of performance is designed for up
to 70 m (229.7 ft) of unshielded TP building cable.

A DEMPR, normally located in the wiring closet, connects Ethernet to the TPENET. Characterized TP
cable connects the TPENET to a desktop device. A desktop device can be a VAXmate, a VAXstation 2000,
or a PC with a DEPCA, DELUA, or DELQA Ethernet controller. TP cable is used in addition to ThinWire
Ethernet cable to provide flexibility in the office.

TPENET-I

TPENET INSTALLATION
Product Configuration
Figure 1 shows a typical configuration. The TP adapters interface with the DEMPR on the Ethernet end
and with the user's device on the other end. Figure 2 shows a typical SER-to-office TP setup.

TRANSCEIVER

Ethernet

TERMINATOR

-ThinWire PATCH CABLE*--~

~ UP TO 70 M UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR

CABLE

t+----WALLPLATE (OPTIONAL) -----i~

~-----ThinWire CABLE*-----~

50-OHM
TERMINATOR

* TOTAL ThinWire CABLE ~ 10M
MKV88·1188

Figure 1 Unshielded Twisted-Pair Ethernet Configuration

TPENET-2

TPENET INSTALLATION

TERMINATION

STANDARD
19-INCH RACK
----.....

I
I

~IELDJ--J

DEMPR

TWISTED-PAIR

----?

ThinWire *
CABLE
WALLPLATE
IN OFFICE

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
WIRING
PATCH
PANEL

CABLE~

~OFFICE
ADAPTER

CJ
WIRING CLOSET/SER
ADAPTERS

* TOTAL ThinWire ~ 10M

MKV88-1189

Figure 2 Typical Wiring Closet Installation

TPENET-3

TPENET INSTALLATION

Reference Documentation
Refer to the following documents for more information on the TPENET adapter:

• Unshielded Twisted-Pair Ethernet Adapter Installation Guide

EK-TPEIG-IN-OOI

• Unshielded Twisted-Pair Ethernet .Wiring Installation and Characterization

EK-TPEWC-IN-OOI

Hardware Components
Table 1 lists the major hardware components of TPENET.
Table 1 Hardware Components
Component

Part No.

Purpose

Rack Installation Kit

H3120

Provides 32-line rack-mount capability in the SER.

SER Adapter

H3330

A passive dual adapter board that allows the TP connections to a DEMPR. Switches located on the SER
adapter allow matching to the TP line impedance
(see Figure 3). The adapter retainer clips are attached
for slot mounting (see Figures 4 and 5),

Office Adapter

H3310

A passive device that connects a single workstation to
the TP cable. It also has an impedance matching
switch (see Figure 6). The office adapter can be mounted using adhesive-backed tape or a magnetic strip
(see Figures 7 and 8).

TPENET-4

TPENET INSTALLATION

LKG-1326-87

Figure 3 Setting the SER Adapter Switch

LKG-1327 -87

Figure 4

Attaching the Retainer Clip

TPENET-5

TPENET INSTALLATION

PUSH HERE
LKG-1328-87

Figure 5 Inserting Adapter in Card Cage

LKG-1331-87

Figure 6 Setting the Office Adapter Switch

TPENET-6

TPENET INSTALLATION

LKG-1332-87

Figure 7 Adhesive Mounting

MAGNETIC
STRIP
LKG-1333-87

Figure 8 Magnetic Mounting

TPENET-7

TPENET INSTALLATION
Figure 9 shows the basic SER-to-office connections.

TO DEMPR
BLANK PANEL
LKG-1339-87

Figure 9

Wiring Closet Cabling

Environmental Considerations
Table 2 lists TPENET operational and storage limitations:

Table 2 Operational and Storage Specifications
Specification

Operating

Stored

Temperature

ooe to 60°C
(32°F to 141°F)

-40°C to 66°e
(-40°F to 150°F)

Relative Humidity
(Noncondensing)

10% to 95%

Maximum Altitude

2,400 m
(8,000 ft)

12,100 m
(40,000 ft)

TPENET-8

TPENET CABLING

Cabling
This section provides cabling information for the TPENET adapter.
Twisted-Pair Adapters
Unshielded TP adapters connect to both ends of the TP wire. The SER adapter connects to the TP cable
located in the Closet/SER. The office adapter connects to the TP end located in the office. The adapter
switches are set to match the impedance for each TP cable connection. This achieves the characterization
match needed for the up to 70 m (229.7 ft) of unshielded TP cable used to connect the TPENET to an
office device.
Configuration Guidelines
Unshielded TP Ethernet adapters are subject to the guidelines and restrictions listed in Table 3. For more
information, refer to the Site Evaluation Worksheet in Appendix A of the Unshielded Twisted-Pair Wiring
Installation and Characterization Guide.

Table 3 TP Cabling Guidelines
Cable

Specification

24-AWG TP Wire

Up to 70 m (229.7 ft). The sheath must contain two TP-wire pairs with a
minimum of four twists per foot.

ThinWire

Connect only one device to a ThinWire segment that is attached to an office
adapter cable. No additional splices are allowed.

Cable Runs

Allow at least 1 foot spacing from adjacent ac power lines, buses, transformers,
fluorescent lamps, and any high-voltage devices along the entire TP cable route.
Avoid all RF interference and EMI coupling.
Allow no other signals to share the adapter signal TP cable sheath, including:
EIA, DEC423, token ring, telephone, data, or other TP signals.
Allow no line taps in the TP cable run from the wiring closet to the office.

Punchdowns

Use no more than two punchdown blocks. If a punchdown pair is used, building
cable and patching must be the same type of TP wire.
No length limitation is required between punchdowns used within up to 70 m
(229.7 feet), however, the maximum dc aging. resistance allowed is 100
milliohms.

TPENET-9

TPENET CABLI:~~
Twisted-Pair Cables
The TP adapters accommodate the following types of TP cables that meet the characterization requirments.
•
•
•
•
•
•

AT&T-C plenum
AT&T-D non plenum
Northern Telecom (NT) 3-pair
IBM type 3
DECconnect plenum
DECconnect nonplenum

MMP Connections
Figures 10 through 13 show the four types of MMP cables.

6MMP

YEL
BLU
ORG
GRN
RED
BLK

LKG-1341-87

Figure 10 6MMP-to-6MMP Pin Diagram (DIGITAL/2 Foot)
6MMP

6MMP

BLK
RED
GRN
ORG
BLU
YEL

YEL
BLU
ORG
GRN
RED
BLK

LKG-1342-87

Figure 11

6MMP-to-6MMP Pin Diagram (DIGITAL/3 Foot)

TPENET-I0

TPENET CABLING

SMP

6MMP

70
VEL
GRN
RED
BlU
ORG
BlK

GRN
BlK
VEL
RED
ORG
BlU

lKG-1343-87

Figure 12 8MP-to-6MMP Pin Diagram (AT&T)

6MMP

6MP

ORG
RED
BlK
VEL
GRN
BlU

VEL
BlU
ORG
GRN
RED
BlK

lKG-1344-87

Figure 13

6MP-to-6MMP Pin Diagram (Northern Telecom)

TPENET-l1

TPENET CABLING
MJ jMMJ Connections
Figures 14 and 15 show the connector and punchdown.

---1)r

BRN/w*

00
00
00

**W/BLU

~'-----

MJ/MMJ CONNECTOR
(REAR VIEW)

* BRN/W DENOTES A BROWN OUTER RING WITH A WHITE CENTER DOT.
* * W/BLU DENOTES A WHITE WIRE WITH A BLUE TRACER.
LKG-1426-87

Figure 14 H3112-A Connector for TP Use

TPENET-12

TPENET CABLING

WIRES PRESSED UP
INTO STUFFER CAP

LKG-1427-87

Figure 15

Punchdown Connections'

TPENET-13

TPENET CABLING

Connectors and Connectioos
Figure 16 shows an AT&T connection. Figure 17 shows a Northern Telecom connection.

WIRING
CLOSET/SER
ADAPTER

MMP
H-8226

BRN/W c=====
W/BRN c=====
W/BLU

~
GO 60
R- 50
R+ 40
E- 30
E+ 20
GC 10

6
5
4
3
2
1

i-.

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
BUILDING CABLE

GRNIW===----~

W/GRN ====':L_
W/ORG===~J

ORGIW===:;:::?'
BLUIW

H3112A
CONNECTOR
.A.

W/BLU
BLUIW
W/ORG
ORGIW
W/GRN
GRNIW
W/BRN
BRNIW

Figure 16

CLIP AND
REMOVE

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
BUILDING
CABLE

BC16U-02
CABLE

OFFICE
ADAPTER

I
~? I

",~MMJPINS

1
2
3

GRN
BLK
VEL
RED
ORG
BLU

@ .~

@ 5
@ 6
@ 7
@ 8

R+
EE+
GC

AT&T Unshielded TP Connections (Sheet 1 of 2)

TPENET-14

TPENET CABLING

DEMPR

BNC

1
I

ThinWire CABLE
(PIN BC16K·081

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
WIRING CLOSET/SER
ADAPTER
PIN H3330-AA

MMJ

____ ...L. ----

PUNCH DOWN

L------J[------J

MATCH

r------

CODES

I
I
I

OPTIONAL

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
BUILDING CABLE

------,
I
I
I

PUNCH DOWN

~======JE======~I

TERMINATION
BLOCK

-.....

L. _____

-T.----- ..I
MMJ

COLOR

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
BUILDING CABLE
UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
BUILDING CABLE

CONNEC,"" BAe""

:=========================-<. -E--

(P/NH3112-A\
WALLPLATE
OFFICE

MMJ

OFFICE ADAPTER
CABLE
(PIN BC 16U-02)

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
OFFICE
ADAPTER
PIN H3310-AA

BNC

50-OHM
TERMINATOR (pIN H8225Al

ThinWire CABLE
T-CONNECTOR
(PIN H8223·AI

PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OR OFFICE
WORKSTATION

LKG-1321-87

Figure 16

AT&T Unshielded TP Connections (Sheet 2 of 2)

TPENET-15

TPENET CABLING

WIRING
CLOSET/SER
ADAPTER

GD
RR+
EE+
GC

MMP
H-8226
6

60
50
40
30
20
10

....

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
BUILDING CABLE

BRNIW c:====
W/BRN c:===
W/BLU
GRNIW===",,W/GRN ====='7A

3
2
1

W/ORG ===~

H3112B
CONNECTOR

BC16S-02
CABLE

ORGIW ==:=:::7
BLUIW

.A.

W/BLU
BLUIW
W/ORG
ORGIW
W/GRN
GRNIW
W/BRN
BRNIW

Figure 17

CLIP AND
REMOVE

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
BUILDING
CABLE

OFFICE
ADAPTER

,,~MMJPINS

@ 1
@ 2
@ 3
@ 4
@ 5
@ 6
@ 7
@ 8

ORG
RED
BLK
YEL
GRN
BLU

GD
RR+
EE+
GC I

Northern Telecom Unshielded TP Connections (Sheet 1 of 2)

TPENET-16

TPENET CABLING

DEMPR

I
I

J
I

BNC

CABLE
1 - - - Th,nW""
IPNBC16KOB'
BNC
UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
WIRING CLOSETISER
ADAPTER
PIN H3330-AA

I
r-

OPTIONAL

MMJ

___ ..::...L'

----,

~=====~~~~=~==~ }
I
I
I

PUNCH DOWN

TERMINA TION

I
I
I

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED·PAIR
BUILDING CABLE
MATCH
COLOR
CODES

~======JE.======~I

UNSH!ELDED
TWISTED·PAIR
BUILDING CABLE

_~------~

UNSHIELDED
TWISTeD-PAIR
BUILDING CABLE

L____ BLOCK

MMJ

CO'N'CW' eM""

=======================-<~~--I

w~~~~!" I
I

MMJ

(PIN H3112-BI

OFFICE ADAPTER
CABLE
(PIN BC 16S-02)

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
OFFICE
ADAPTER
PIN H331 O-AA

I
50-OHM
TERMINATOR(PIN H8225Al

BNC

rBNCl

Thlo,Wire CABLE
T -CONNECTOR
(PIN H8223-AI

PERSONAL
COMPuTER
OR OFFICE
WORKSTATION

LKG-1322-87

Figure 17

Northern Telecom Unshielded TP Connections (Sheet 2 of 2)

TPENET-17

TPENET CABLING
The overall connections are shown in Figure 18.

DEMPR

BNC

ThinWire CABLE
(PIN BC16K-08)

BNC
UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
WIRING CLOSETISER
ADAPTER
PIN H3330-AA
MMJ

MMJ

I--

DEC connect
PATCH CABLE
(PIN BC16Q-03)
(PIN H3113-B)

SER
PATCH PANEL

MATCH
COLOR
CODES

{

MMJ BARRELS

I
I

MMJ CONNECTOR
BARRELS

UNSHIELDED
TWISTEDPAIR
BUILDING
CABLE

DECconnect
WALL PLATE

MMJ

I - - (PIN H3113-A)
OFFICE
ADAPTER
CABLE
(PIN BC16R-02)

UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
OFFICE
ADAPTER
PIN H3310-AA

I
50-OHM TERMINATOR(PIN H8225A)

BNC

ThinWire
CABLE
T-CONNECTOR
(PIN H8223-AI

PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OR OFFICE
WORKSTATION
MKV88-1190

Figure 18

DECconnect Installation Overview

TPENET-18

TPENET DIAGNOSTICS

Self-Test Diagnostics
TPENET devices are passive and have no indicators. There are no self-tests, debug exercises, or associated
system diagnostics. Use standard ThinWire, Thickwire, system diagnostics, tools, and associated Ethernet
device indicators to troubleshoot TPENET.

TPENET-19·

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS
Maintenance Aids
The wire-characterization test equipment can be used as maintenance and troubleshooting aids for the TP
adapter and TP Ethernet cables.
Wire Characterization
Section 3 of the Unshielded Twisted-Pair Wiring Installation and Characterization Guide contains
detailed discussion of wire characterization testing. Highlights of that section follow.
Equipment Required - Table 4 lists the. test equipment needed to characterize wiring. Test equipment
outlined in this table is shown in Figures 19 through 27.

Table 4 Wire Characterization Test Equipment
Equipment

Qty

Part Number

Office adapter cables
8MP - 6MMP
6MP - 6MMP
6MMP - 6MMP

8
8
8

DIGITAL BS16U-02
DIGITAL BS16S·02
DIGITAL BS16R-02

Wiring closet identifier
6MMP - 6MMP

DIGITAL BS16Q-02

Office loop back identifier

DIGITAL 54-17331-01

Wiring closet test connector

DIGITAL 70-25414-01

Balun

DIGITAL 16-28983-01

Digital multimeter

Fluke Model 8060A

Accessories:
•
High-frequency probe
•
BNC-to-probe adapter
•
Banana plug-to-BNC connector

Fluke 85RF
Fluke 574756
Locally available -

Time-domain reflectometer (TDR)

Tektronix 1502 TDR

Accessories:
•
TDR static suppressor
•
Precision 50-ohm calibrated
coaxial cable

Tektronix 011-0132-00
Tektronix 012-0482-00

TPENET-20

TPENET.MAINTENANCE AIDS

SHRINK WRAP

LKG-1414-87

Figure 19

Office Loopback Identifier

LKG-1415-87

Figure 20

Wiring Closet Test Connector

TPENET-21

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS

TOGGLE SWITCH
(NORMAL POSITION)

DIP SWITCHES
MMJ

N/C

MMJ

N/C

( BNC LOAD (i---

( BNC SHORT(.t-'"

N/C

R9
R8
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2

58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51

BUILDING
WIRE
WIRING CLOSET TEST CONNECTOR

OFFICE LOOPBACK IDENTIFIER

N/C = NOT CONNECTED
R = RESISTOR
W = SHORT
S = OFFICE SWITCH

LKG-1416-87

Figure 21

DEC Resistance Test

TPENET-22

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS

TOGGLE SWITCH
; - (NORMAL POSITION)

....

L'I

DIP SWITCHES
MMJ

N/C

MMJ

( BNC LOAD ('-

( BNC SHORT ( f

N/C

B UILDING
WIRE

WIRING CLOSET TEST CONNECTOR

R9
1

N/C

88
87

OFFICE LOOPBACK IDENTIFIER

TOGGLE SWITCH
(HELD POSITION)
DIP SWITCHES
MMJ

N/C

1
2
3
4
5

N/C

MMJ

88
1

BUILDING
WIRE

2
3

N/C

87
86

85
84

5
6

N/C

OFFICE LOOPBACK IDENTIFIER

WIRING CLOSET TEST CONNECTOR

N/C = NOT CONNECTED
R = RESISTOR
W = SHORT
S = OFFICE SWITCH
LKG-1417-87

Figure 22 Noise and Impedance Tests

TPENET-23

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS

TOGGLE SWITCH
(HELD POSITION)
DIP SWITCHES
MMJ

MMJ
1 N/C
2
R1
3
4
6

BUILDING
WIRE

WIRING CLOSET TEST CONNECTOR

N/C

R9
R8
R7

S8
S7
S6

R5
R4
R3
R2

S4
S3
S2
S1

OFFICE LOOPBACK IDENTIFIER

N/C = NOT CONNECTED
R = RESISTOR
W = SHORT
S = OFFICE SWITCH

LKG-1418-87

Figure 23

Diode Test

TPENET-24

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS·

TOGGLE SWITCH
(HELD POSITION)
DIP SWITCHES
MMJ
N C

MMJ
1 N/C
2
3

v-~-----+4----~---.------~---

N/C

BC16R-02
OFFICE
ADAPTER
CABLE

WIRING CLOSET TEST CONNECTOR

N/C

S8
S7
S6

R9
R8
R7
R6

S5
S4
S3
S2
S1

R5
R4
R3
R2

OFFICE LOOPBACK IDENTIFIER

N/C = NOT CONNECTED
R = RESISTOR
W = SHORT
S = OFFICE SWITCH

LKG-1423-87

Figure 24

Measuring Diode Breakdown Voltage

100 n BALANCED

50 n UNBALANCED
LKG-1419-87

Figure 25

Balun

TPENET-25

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS

AC/DC FUNCTION
SWITCH

VOLTAGE FUNCTION
SWITCH
DIODE AND RESISTANCE
FUNCTION SWITCH

85RF PROBE

BNC TO PROBE ADA\ER \

BNC

WIRING CLOSET
TEST CONNECTOR

GROUND

LKG-1420-87

Figure 26

8060A Fluke DMM and Accessories

TPENET-26

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS

~..---'---.:_lJ_1-1

I. '-J

li·i'~

--·-ilii

iii

CALIBRATED
COAXIAL CABLE

LKG-1422-87

Figure 27 Tektronix TDR 1502 and Accessories.

TPENET-27

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS

Wire Characterization Tests - Detailed test procedures are contained in Section 3.3 of the Unshielded
Twisted-Pair Wiring Installation and Characterization Guide. These test procedures include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

,Preparing the Office, Section 3.3.1
Verifying Office and Data Pairs, 3.3.2
Measuring DC Resistance, 3.3.3
Measuring Low-Frequency Noise (RMS), 3.3.4
Measuring High-Frequency Noise, 3.3.5
Measuring Cable Length, 3.3.7
Measuring Balanced Impedance, 3.3.8

Section 3.3 in the Guide also explains TDR calibration.

Wire Characterization Worksheet - A Wire Characterization Worksheet (Figure 28) is provided to record
test results.

TPENET-28

Presale Characterization Date: _________
Preinstallation Characterization Date: ______
Completed By: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Location: _________________
Page _ _ _ Of _ _ _ Pages
WIRE CHARACTERIZATION TESTS

III

DC
Resistance
Office
LinelD

Office Loop Back Identifier
Switch No. 1-8

Diode
Breakdown
Voltage

Office Adapter
Switch
(Up or Down)

Lo Freq
Noise

OK Use BNC Short Use BNC Load
DDMTDR
DMM
16.8-ohms Max .3 mVac Max
120mVac Max

High Freq
Noise

Transient
Noise?
Yes

I No

Impedance

•
Length

Use BNC Load Use BNC Load Use BNC Short
DMM Probe
TDR
TDR
50 mVdc Max 90-120 ohms 230 ft Max

>-3
'"C
trl

trl

';'"l
N

~
tr1
Z

Number of Lines Checked: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Notes: (Identify by Office Line 10) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

::>
~

Number of Lines Within Spec: ________

tr1

Wire Type: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Wire Manufacturer: ____________
LKG-1424-87

Figure 28

Wire Characterization Worksheet

~
tr1

>
~
~

TPENET MAINTENANCE AIDS

Tools
The punchdown tool and crimper shown in Figure 29 may be useful during maintenance as well as during
installation.

CABLE
PUNCHDOWN
TOOL
(PART OF H8242
FACEPLATE
TOOLKIT)

H8241
MMP
CRIMP
TOOL

LKG-1425-87

Figure 29

Special Tools for Cabling

TPENET-30

CHAPTER 3
CABLES
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains the following information.
•

Outline drawings of cable types needed to install devices described in this manual.

•

Outline drawings of comiectors and terminators.

•

Drawings of proper slide-latch assembly.

•

ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cable termination procedures.

3.2 CABLES AND CONNECTORS
The cables in this section are divided into the following categories.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Baseband Ethernet coaxial cables
Baseband Ethernet connectors and terminators
Baseband Ethernet transceiver cables
Fiber-optic channel elements
Broadband Ethernet connectors and terminators
Other Cables
DECconnect twisted pair and office data cables
Thin Wire Ethernet cables
ThinWire Ethernet connectors and boots

(See Table 1)
(See Table 2)
(See Tables 3, 4)
(See Table 5)
(See Table 6)
(See Table 7)
(See Table 8)
(See Table 9)
(See Table 10)

Table 1 Baseband Ethernet Coaxial Cables
Cable
Number

Length Variations
Available *

Description

BNE2B-xx

MA,MB,MC,MD

PVC composition

BNE2A-xx

MA,MB,MC,MD

Teflon™ composition

* MA = 23.4 m (76.78 ft)
MB = 70.2 m (230.33 ft)
MC = 117.0 m (383.88 ft)
MD = 500.0 m (1640.50 ft)
Teflon is a trademark of Dupont de Nemours and Co., Inc.

3-1

Table 2 Baseband Ethernet Connectors and Terminators
Part
Number

Part
Name

Description

H4060

Male N-connector

Connector for BNE2x-xx cable (six per package)

12-19816-01

Terminator (50 ohms)

50 ohm terminator for BNE2x-xx cable

12-19817-01

Barrel connector

Barrel connector for BNE2x-xx cable

DEXJK

Etherjack

Etherjack connector

END CONNECTOR

MKV84-1676

Figure 1 BNE2x-xx Coaxial Cable

-.--.~'"
~
.
~
--

-== ;=-".=;..

":"=.

- -.

MKV84-1677

Figure 2 H4060 (End) Connector

MKV84-1678

Figure 3

12-19817 -01 Barrel Connector

3-2

MKV84-1679

Figure 4

12-19816-01 Terminator

COVER

MKV84-1674

Figure 5

. k Connector
DEXJK EtherJac

3-3

Table 3 Baseband Ethernet Transceiver Cables
Cable
Number

Length
Available*

Connector
Description

Composition

05, 10, 20, 40
05, 10, 20, 40
05, 10, 20, 40
05, 10, 20, 40
02, 05
02,05

Straight angle
Right angle
Straight angle
Right angle
Straight angle
Right angle

PVC
PVC
Teflon™
Teflon™
PVC
PVC

05, 10, 20, 40
05, 10, 20, 40
05, 10, 20, 40
05, 10, 20, 40
02, 05
02, 05

Straight angle
Right angle
Straight angle
Right angle
Straight angle
Right angle

PVC
PVC
Teflon™
Teflon™
PVC
PVC

Ethernet:
BNE3A-xx
BNE3B-xx
BNE3C-xx
BNE3D-xx
BNE4A-xx
BNE4B-xx
IEEE 802.3:
BNE3H-xx
BNE3K-xx
BNE3L-xx
BNE3M-xx
BNE4C-xx
BNE4D-xx

*Lengths are in meters (1 meter = 3.281 feet)
Teflon is a trademark of DuPont de Nemours and Co., Inc.

3-4

Any combination of drop cable lengths may be connected to achieve the necessary total length. It is
recommended that no more than two cables be used.

Table 4 Transceiver Drop Cable Applications
Condition

Cable Types

Maximum Lengths

H4000 transceiver to host or
server

BNE3 (only)
BNE3 + BNE4-02
BNE3 + BNE4-05
BNE4 (only)

40 m (131.2 ft)
32 m (105.0 ft)
25 m (82.0 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)

DELNI interconnect to host or
server

BNE3 (only)
BNE3 + BNE4-02
BNE3 + BNE4-05
BNE4 (only)

40 m (131.2 ft)
32 m (105.0 ft)
25 m (82.0 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)

H4000 transceiver to DELNI
interconnect to host or server
(total of both cables)

BNE3 (only)
BNE3 + BNE4-02
BNE3 + BNE4-05
BNE4 (only)

40 m (131.2 ft)
32 m (105.0 ft)
25 m (82.0 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)

H4000 transceiver to repeater

BNE3 (only)
BNE3 + BNE4-02
BNE3 + BNE4-05
BNE4 (only)

50 m (164.1 ft)
42 m (137.8 ft)
30 m (98.4 ft)
12 m (39.4 ft)

DELNI interconnect to DELNI
interconnect (cascaded)

BNE3 (only)
BNE3 + BNE4-02
BNE3 + BNE4-05
BNE4 (only)

50 m (164.1 ft)
42 m (137.8 ft)
30 m (98.4 ft)
12 m (39.4 ft)

3-5

8
MKV84-1670

Figure 6 BNE3A-xx/BNE4A-xx and BNE3B-xx/BNE4B-xx Transceiver Cables

MKV84-1671

Figure 7 BNE3C-xx/BNE4C-xx and BNE3D-xx/BNE4D-xx Transceiver Cables

3-6

Table 5 Fiber-Optic Channel Elements
Part
Number

Description

BN25B-XX}
Duplex fiber-optic cable (see note for length variations)
BN25C-xx
DEXJB

Fiber-optic junction box
NOTE
The following length variations are available 15, 30,
60, 90, A5 (=150), CO (=300), EO (=500), H5
(=750), and LO (=1000)*.

*Lengths are in meters (1 meter = 3.281 feet).

TRANSMIT CABLE

RECEIVE CABLE

'\.

~=~ r"---~----"\"::= :

TRANSMIT CABLE

RECEIVE CABLE

Figure 8 Duplex Fiber-Optic Cable

3-7

MKV84-1672

DUPLEX FIBER-OPTIC
CABLE INPUT

RECEIVE CABLE
INPUT

TRANSMIT CABLE OUTPUT
MKV84·1673

Figure 9 DEXJB Fiber-Optic Junction Box

3-8

Broadband Ethernet Coaxial Cable
CAB-6* cable is a flexible office broadband cable. CAB-6 type cable is available in 304.8 m (1000 ft)
lengths.

Table 6

Broadband Ethernet Connectors and Terminators

Part
Number

Part
Name

Description of Use

TR-75F*

Female F terminator

Used to terminate 75 ohm male F connectors

F-81C*

Female F to female F
adapter

U sed to join two lengths of broadband cable

F-56C*

Female F connector

Used for CAB-6 type (broadband) cable

BNC-F*

Female F to male BNC
adapter

Typically used for test equipment connection

*Manufactured by Jerrold Div., General Instrument Corp.

Figure 10 CAB-6 Broadband Office Cable

MKV84·1681

Figure 11

TR-75F Terminator

*Manufactured by Jerrold Div., General Instrument Corp.

3-9

MKV84-1682

Figure 12

F-81C Adapter

MKV84-1683

Figure 13

F-56C Connector

MKV84-1685

Figure 14

BNC-F Adapter

3-10

Table 7 Other Cables
Part
Number

Part
Name

BC08R-1

Ribbon cable

A .3 m (1 ft) ribbon cable that interconnects a
DEUNA link and port module (two are
required).

70-18798-xx

Bulkhead cable
assembly

A cable that interconnects a DEUN A link
module and bulkhead interconnect panel
assembly. The following length variations are
availble.

Description of Use

•
•
70-18799-00

70-18798-04 = 1.2 m (4 ft)
70-18798-08 = 2.4 m (8 ft)

An I/O connector panel with an adaptor
bracket acceptable for installation in various
cabinet types.

Bulkhead interconnect
panel assembly

H856 CONNECTOR

VV ______ I
TT

RR---J

C
E

HH
EE

JJ
FF
DO

W
U

L
J

S
U
W
y

X
V

S
P
H
E

CC
EE

I....... vv

6--.f

DO
FF
JJ

HH
pp

MKV84-1684

Figure 15

BC08R-l Ribbon Cable

3-11

BULKHEAD
CABLE ASSEMBLY

BULKHEAD
INTERCONNECT
PANEL ASSEMBLY

D-CONNECTOR
MKV84-1675

Figure 16

70-18798-xx Bulkhead Assembly and 70-18799-00
Bulkhead Interconnect Panel Assembly

3-12

Table 8

DECconnect Twisted-Pair and Office Data Cables

Part
Number

Description

H8240
H8245-A
H8246-A

6-conductor cable, 1000 ft spool, unterminated
DECconnect Twisted-Pair PVC cable, 1000 ft spool
DEC connect Twisted-Pair Teflon™ cable, 1000 ft spool

Teflon is a trademark of DuPont de Nemours and Co., Inc.

Table 9

ThinWire Ethernet Cables

Part
Number

Description

H8243-A
H8244-A

ThinWire cable, PVC
ThinWire cable, Teflon™

Teflon is a trademark of Dupont de Nemours and Co., Inc.

Table 10

ThinWire Ethernet Connectors and Boots

Part
Number

Description

H3112-A
H3112-B
H3112-D
H3114
H8222
H8223
H8224
H8225

Modular jack (AT&T connection)
Modular jack (Northern Telecom, Rolm PBX connection)
Modular jack (universal phone connection)
ThinWire Ethernet BNC connector
ThinWire male connector and boot
TEE connector and boot
Barrel connector and boot
Terminator and boot

3-13

TERMINATOR

BNC CONNECTOR

BNC CONNECTOR
BARREL
CONNECTOR
MKV86-0513

Figure 17 T-Adapters, Barrel Connectors, and Terminators

STANDARD ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE

ThinWire ETHERNET
COAXIAL CABLE

MKV86-0512

Figure 18

Cable Differences

3-14

3.3 PROPER SLIDE-LATCH CONFIGURATION
Slide-latches may not function properly unless they conform to the "correct" configuration shown below.
NOTE
The figure below is correct for bulkhead-mounted
slide latches. Differences for cable-mounted slide
latches are noted.
Verify the following.
•

Each locking pin of the male connector has two flat washers.

•

The smaller cutout on a bulkhead-mounted slide latch is close to pin 1.

•

The smaller cutout on a cable-mounted slide latch is close to pin 8.

•

There is no space between the slide latch and the connector. Note the "incorrect" drawing for
detail.

SMALLER
1'\.:oI1----CUTOUT
.......
.......

" .......

I
I
I

I
I

.......

I
I

LOCKING
PINS

I
I

I
CORRECT
SCREW

IF THERE IS SPACE (AS
SHOWN IN THIS INSET).
REPLACE THE SCREWS
WITH THE UNCOLLARED
TYPE AS SHOWN IN THE
"CORRECT" DRAWING

I
I

Figure 19

Proper Slide-Latch Configuration

3-15

3.4 ThinWire Ethernet COAXIAL CABLE TERMINATION
3.4.1 Installing Male Bulkhead Connectors on ThinWire Cables
There are two ThinWire stripping tools: the H8100-A for stripping FEP-jacketed ThinWire, and the
H8100-B for stripping PVC-jacketed ThinWire.

Make sure you have the correct tool by referring to Figure 20, and perform the following steps.

FRONT OF TOOL

BACK OF TOOL

MEASURING
STUD

MKV89-0004

Figure 20

Thin Wire Stripping Tool

Work with one cable at a time.

Use diagonal cutters to cut the cable flush.

Grasp the stripping tool and retract the blade.

MKV88-1671

3-16

Insert the cable into the tool and align the end of the cable with face B (as shown).

FACE B

MKV88-1S72

Rotate the tool clockwise until cutting stops.

Rotate the tool counterclockwise two (2) turns.

3-17

Align the ring of cut to face A (as shown).

CABLE
FACE A

MKV88·1533

NOTE
For steps 8 and 9, hold the tool as shown below for
steadier cutting.
8.

Rotate the tool clockwise until cutting stops.

MKV88-1534

Rotate the tool counterclockwise two (2) turns.

MKV88-1535

3-18

10.

Align the second ring of cut to face B (as shown).

SECOND RING
OF CUT

MKV88·1536

11.

Rotate the tool counterclockwise at least six (6) turns.

12.

Pull the tool off the cable and remove any debris that remains inside the hole.

MKV88·1538

3-19

13.

While firmly gripping the cable braid and dielectric, use diagonal cutters to pull the dielectric
waste off the cable.

MKV88-1539

14.

Compare your cable to the illustration below.

MKV88-1540

15.

Brush metal debris from the cable.

MKV88-1541

3-20

16.

Slip the ferrule onto the cable.

NOTE
Make sure that the braid or foil does not touch the
center conductor.

c:>
~

=mmC=\=::33

-=Cc::>i

CABLE

FERRULE

MKV88-1542

17.

Slip the center contact onto the center conductor. The contact must butt against the dielectric.

NOTE
Make sure that the braid or foil does not touch the
center contact.

CENTER
CONDUCTOR

~ ~~_RI~C~__~
~Jd:acJ.]
CENTER
CONTACT
18.

MKV88-1543

Crimp the center contact onto the cable.

MKV88-1544

3-21

19.

Insert the center contact through the connector.

CRIMPED CONTACT

e::;

m I_W

CONNECTOR
SUPPORT SLEEVE
MKV88·1668

20.

Slip the support sleeve under the braid and over the dielectric.

BRAID OVER CONNECTOR
SUPPORT SLEEVE
MKV88·1669

21.

Slide the ferrule over the support sleeve to the back of the connector.

SLIDE FERRULE FORWARD
OVER SUPPORT SLEEVE

~!
~=;;;:;"'_J::1=~3
CONNECTOR SHOULDER

MKV88·1670

3-22

22.

Crimp the ferrule onto the cable.

MKV88·1545

23.

Tug gently on the connector to be sure it is firmly attached ..

MKV88·1828

3-23

3.4.2 Installing Female Bulkhead Connectors on ThinWire Cables
There are two ThinWire stripping tools: the H8100-A for stripping FEP-jacketed ThinWire, and the
H8100-B for stripping PVC-jacketed ThinWire.

Make sure you have the correct tool by referring to Figure 21, and perform the following steps.

FRONT OF TOOL

BACK OF TOOL

MEASURING
STUD

MKV89-0004

Figure 21

Thin Wire Stripping Tool

Work with one cable at a time.

Use diagonal cutters to cut the cable flush.

Grasp the stripping tool and retract the blade.

MKV88-1671

3-24

Insert the cable into the tool and align the end of the cable with face B (as shown).

FACE B

MKV88-1672

Rotate the tool clockwise until cutting stops.

Rotate the tool counterclockwise two (2) turns.

3-25

Align the ring of cut to face C (as shown).

RING OF CUT

MKV88-1547

Rotate the tool clockwise until cutting stops.

MKV88-1534

Rotate the tool counterclockwise two (2) turns.

MKV88-1535

3-26

10.

Align the second ring of cut to face B (as shown).

FACE

SECOND
RING OF CUT

MKV88-1548

11.

Rotate the tool counterclockwise at least six (6) turns.

12.

Pull the tool off the cable and remove any debris that remains inside the hole.

MKV88-1538

3-27

13.

While firmly gripping the cable braid and dielectric, use diagonal cutters to pull the dielectric
waste off the cable.

IXXI
MKV89-0005

14.

Compare your cable to the illustration below.

MKV88-1549

15.

Brush metal debris from the cable.

MKV89-0006

3-28

16.

Slip the ferrule onto the cable.

NOTE
Make sure that the braid or foil does not touch the
center conductor.

~ ~c:::>I=amC=\:=:J3
CABLE

FERRULE

MKV88-1542

17.

Slip the center contact onto the center conductor. The contact must butt against the dielectric.

NOTE
Make sure that the braid or foil does not touch the
center contact.

CENTER
CONDUCTOR

I D~LECTRIC

\~,........=......,..]----'3
CENTER
CONTACT
18.

MKV88-1543

Crimp the center contact onto the center conductor.

MKV88-1544

3-29

19.

Insert the center contact through the connector.

SUPPORT
SLEEVE

20.

MKV88·1550

Slip the support sleeve under the braid and over the dielectric and foil shield. The center conductor
must be flush or within 1/16 inch of the end of the connector.

MKV88·1651

21.

Slide the ferrule to the rear of the connector and crimp it onto the cable.

22.

Tug gently on the connector to be sure it is firmly attached.

3-30

3.4.3 Checking the Cable
Check the cable for continuity and shorts after the connectors are attached to both ends of the
Thin Wire cable.
1.

Install a 50-ohm terminator on one end of the ThinWire cable using a TEE connector or barrel
connector.

Check for cable continuity on the other end of the cable using an ohmmeter.
a.

Connect the ohmmeter leads to the center pin of the connector and the connector body.

The ohmmeter reading must be 60 ohms or less, indicating continuity in both the shield and
center conductor.

Remove the 50-ohm terminator.

Check for an open circuit (no connection) between the center conductor and the shield (using
the ohmmeter).
a.

Connect the ohmmeter leads to the center pin of the connector and the connector body.

The ohmmeter must read infinite ohms, indicating no shorts between the shield and center
conductor.

3-31

3.5 INSTALLING MMJ CONNECTORS ON TWISTED-PAIR CABLES
Tools required: MMJ/MJ punch tool 47-00117-01
1.

The first operation is to remove the jacket.

Use diagonal cutters to trim the cable flush.

Use a stripper cutter to cut the cable jacket 3.16 cm (1.25 in) from the end of the cable and pull
off the jacket.

The second operation is to arrange the individual wires and install MMJ connectors. Starting on
the left side with the white wire with the blue stripe, arrange the individual wires so that they
are in the same order as indicated on the MMJ connector stuffer cap.

When the wires are arranged, trim them so that they are even.

Wire and Stuffer Cap Code
Wire
Number

7
6

5
4

3
2
1

@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@

Solid Wire/
Cap Outer Ring

Brown
White
Green
White
Orange
White
Blue
White

Tracer Wire/
Cap Center Dot

White
Brown
White
Green
White
Orange
White
Blue

MKV86·1046

Figure 22

Wire and Stuffer Cap Code

Starting with the white wire with the blue stripe, cut 1/8 inch off of each white wire. The four
white wires should now be 1/8 inch shorter than the colored wires.

Place the connector on a flat surface. The front of an extra faceplate with modular wall box is a
good surface to use. The MMJ cutout on the faceplate holds the connector in place while the
wires are being installed.

3-32

Place the wires over the connector barrels of the MMJ connector. Notice that the white wire
with the blue stripe is to the left. Use the color code on the stuffer cap to check the order of
installation.

WIRE COLOR (WHITE)
TRACER COLOR (BLUE)

MKV86-1047

Figure 23

Placement of Wire over the Connector Barrels

Using the punchdown tool, press one wire at a time into its connector barrel. Notice that as each
wire is pressed into its connector barrel, a click is heard.

MKV86-1048

Figure 24

Using the Punchdown Tool

3-33

10.

After all wires are pressed into the barrels, press the stuffer cap onto the MMJ connector. When
the stuffer cap is about halfway on, check to make sure that each wire is in the proper slot in the
stuffer cap. If all wires are in their associated slot, continue pressing the stuffer cap onto the
MMJ connector. When the stuffer cap is completely installed, the ridges on the cap engage the
slots on the MMJ connector.

WIRES PRESSED UP
INTO STUFFER CAP

MKV86-1049

Figure 25

Cap Ridge in Connector Slot

3-34

3.6 INSTALLING MMP CONNECTORS ON TWISTED-PAIR CABLES
There are two type of twisted-pair cables: solid and stranded. It is important to know which type of cable
you have because each type uses a different connector (Figure 26). In DECconnect, the cable that runs
behind the wall from the faceplate to the SER, acc, or RWE is the solid wire type. Cables that run within
the office itself or patch cables are typically the stranded wire type. If the cable has some spring to it when
bent, it is probably the stranded wire type. DIGITAL office flat cable is stranded wire.
Unfortunately, the connectors are not easily identified because they do not have a number stamped on them.
If you are not sure which you have, carefully examine the connector using Figure 26 as a reference. Note
that the 8225 connector has points for penetrating the stranded wire and the 8226 connector is designed to
wrap around the solid wire.

o
8225 FOR STRANDED
WIRE

8226 FOR SOLID
WIRE
MKV88-1528

Figure 26

MMP Connectors for Stranded and Solid Wire

3-35

Preparing the Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cables for the MMP Connectors
Prepare both types of cable (FEP-jacketed and PVC-jacketed) in the same way.
1.

Make sure the ends of the wires are flush. If necessary, use wire cutters to trim the end of the
cable, but only trim what is absolutely necessary.

Use a knife to cut the cable ja~ket about one (1) inch from the end of the cable.

Remove the cut cable jacket.

Use the wire cutters to trim the white/brown and brown/white wires as close to the remaining
cable jacket as possible. (These two wires are not used with the MMP.)

Attaching the MMP Connector to the Twisted-Pair Cable
1.

Determine with which type of cable you are working (stranded or solid wire).

Select the correct MMP connector for the wire with which you are working (Figure 26).

Arrange the wires side by side in the order shown below. (For stranded flat wire, this step
is not necessary).

Align the cable with the MMP so that the wires will go to the pins in the order shown.

BLUE/WHITE
ORANGE/WHITE
WHITE/ORANGE
WHITE/GREEN
GREEN/WHITE
WHITE/BLUE

WHITE/BROWN

BLUE/WHITE WIRE

P'N4~~~~
PIN 6

~----

I
MMP

!
,I

WHITE/BLUE WIRE
MKV88-1529

3-36

Insert the cable into the MMP connector and push it in as far as it will go (about 1/4 inch).

MMP PIN :#=
1

2
3
4
5
6

WIRE COLOR CODE
BLUE/WHITE
ORANGE/WHITE
WHITE/ORANGE
WHITE/GREEN
GREEN/WHITE
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE/WHITE WIRE

: : ~~I C1
IJ

U:::==:rll

WHITE/BLUE WIRE
MKV88·1530

Insert the MMP connector into the die-cut mouth of the MMP terminating tool (H8241) until it
locks in place.

MKV89·0009

Squeeze the handles together until the ratchet releases.

Remove the connector from MMP terminating tool.

3-37

3.7 TERMINATING THE 36-CONDUCTOR CABLE
The 36-conductor cable used to link the RWE to the acc is terminted with 36-position plug on one end, and
either a 36-position plug or a 36-position receptacle on the other end.
1.

Select the correct connector.
a.

Always use the 36-position plug for the RWE end.

Use a 36-position plug for connecting directly to a terminal server.

Use a 36-position receptacle for connecting to an acc.

Leave 1 m (3.3 ft) of slack at each end of the cable and cut the cable with diagonal cutters. Make
sure the cut is square.

Strip the outside jacket and braid back 6 em (2 inches).

Hold the termination tool with the discharge chute facing down between your fingers (as shown).

~DISCHARGE

CHUTE
LKG-1n4-88

3-38

Place the connector in the index slide as shown.

CABLE CLAMP

WIRE DISCHARGE CHUTE
MKV89-0007

Place the cable in the index slide.

Pull the cable clamp down, and lock it into place to hold the cable firmly. Make sure the cable
jacket extends approximately 1.5 cm (1/2 inch) beyond the clamp.

DISCHARGE CHUTE
LKG-1773-88

Starting at the connector end opposite the cable clamp, slide the index until the contact that is to
be terminated aligns with the tool's wire slot.

3-39

Select the wire to be terminated at the first contact.

3 4 5 6

1
2

10 -

11
12 -

13 14 15 16 ~
17 0
18 0
19 -

20 21 22 23 ~
24 _
25 26
27 ~
28 29
30 31 32 33 34
350
360

BLUE/WHITE
ORANGE/'MiITE
GREEN/WHITE
BROYtt4/WHITE
,SLATEjWHllE
BLUE/REO
ORANGEjRED
GREEN/RED
BROWNjRED
SLATEjRED
BLUE/BLACK
ORANGE~LACK

GREEN/BLACK
BROYtt4/BLACK
SLATE/BLACK
BLUE/YELLOW

WHITE/BLUE
WHITELORANGE
WHITE/GREEN
WHI,TE/BROWN
WHITE/SLATE
RED/BLUE
RED/ORANGE
RED/GREEN
RED/BROWN
RED/SLATE
BLACK/BLUE
BLACK/ORANGE
BLACK/GREEN
BLACK/BROWN
BLACK/SLATE
YELLOW/BLUE

-1
-2
-3

-4
-5
-6
-7

-'8

-9
-10
-11

12
~13

-14
-15
-16
017
018
-19
20
~ 21
- 22
- 23
- 24
-25
- 26
-27
28
- 29
-30
- 31
32
-33
- 34
035
036

LKG-1789-88

10.

Insert the wire through the wire slot until it goes into the discharge chute.

11.

Make sure the contact and the wire are centered on the wire slot, and squeeze the termination tool
until the wire is pressed all the way to the base of the contact.

3-40

12.

Release the tool.

NOTE
If the tool jams, the rachet can be released by gently

squeezing the tool. to relieve the tension on the release
pawl, and then rotating the ratchet release clockwise
using the supplied hex wrench.
13.

Remove the scrap wire from the discharge chute.

14.

Move the index slide to the next contact, insert the next wire, and squeeze the tool.

15.

Repeat steps 8 through 14 until all wires are terminated on the first side of the connector.

16.

Remove the slide and reinsert it from the opposite side of the tool.

17.

Repeat steps 8 through 14 until all wires are terminated on this side of the connector.

18.

Inspect all terminations to ensure that each wire is properly inserted. Ensure that:
a.

Wires are cut off just beneath the contact, and no wire strands are visible.

Insulation is not cut in area other than where it is held in the contact.

Wires are held in both slots of the contacts.

Contacts are not crushed or deformed.

RIGHT

WIRE FULLY
SEATED IN
BOTH WIRE
SLOTS AND

~
o

WIRE NOT
CUT PROPERLY

RUSHED

CONTACT

MKV89·0008

3-41

19.

If a wire is improperly terminated, remove the wire and contact from the connector using the
extraction/insertion tool:
a.

Hold the flat side of the extraction/insertion tool against the wire and gently pry the wire out
of the contact as shown.

)
PEEL WIRE

OUT OF CONTACT

FLAT SIDE
OF TOOL

THUMB
WIRE -----t~I.

\~'~~~4----

FEMALE
CONNECTOR
LKG-1812-88

3-42

Place the hooked end of the tool over the contact barb and pry the barb off its seat.

With the tool still engaged with the barb, gently push the contact out of the connector
housing (as shown).

RELEASE
BARB

BARB
SEAT
PUSH TOOL

INWARD AFTER
RELEASING
BARB
LKG-1813-88

d.
20.

Insert the tip of the tool into the wire slot and pull the contact all the way out of
the connector.

Insert a new contact:
a.

Remove an unused contact from the same type connector.

NOTE
Pins 17, 18, 35, and 36 are unused.

PUSH
CAREFULLY

BARB
SEAT
LKG-1814-88

3-43

21.

Carefully place this contact into the connector where the damaged one was removed.

Insert the tip of the extraction/insertion tool into the wire slot and push the contact into the
connector (as shown).

Ensure that the barb seats.

Replace the wire using the punchdown tool.

Install the connector hood (as shown).

TWIST CONNECTOR
APPROXIMATELY 1/2 TURN
TO MANAGE WIRES

CONNECTOR
HOOD SNAPS
OVER CONNECTOR

LKG-1n6-88

3-44

22.

1 - ocks.
I nstall the ba·ll

MKV88·1653

3-45

CHAPTER 4
SPECIAL TOOLS
AND TEST EQUIPMENT

NOTE
The following trademarks are used in this chapter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

AMP 90302-1, 91239-7 are trademarks of AMP Special Industries, Inc.
Amphenol 906 is a trademark of Amphenol, An Allied Co.
Blonder Tongue SA-7U is a trademark of Blonder-Tongue Labs, Inc.
FOTEC T302D is a trademark of FOTEC, Inc.
Photodyne 5500 is a trademark of Photodyne, Inc.
Tektronix 1503, OF-150, 564 are trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
Wavetek SAM III, 1801B are trademarks of Wavetek Rockland, Inc.

4.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides brief descriptions of various special tools and test equipment that may be required
for installing, testing, and troubleshooting Digital Equipment Corporation's Ethernet networks. The
following tools and test equipment (or their equivalent) are recommended.
Baseband Equipment
•
•
•
•

DIGITAL H4090 (-KA or -KB) transceiver installation kit
DIGITAL H4000 (-TA OR -TB) Ethernet transceiver tester*
DIGIT AL H4080 loopback test connector
Tektronix 1503™ TDR (time-domain reflectometer)*

Broadband Equipment
•
•
•

Blonder Tongue SA-7UTM variable attenuator (to 62 dB)
Wavetek 1801B™ swept RF oscillator
Wavetek SAM IIFM RF signal level meter/spectrum analyzer (5 to 400 MHz)

Fiber-Optic Equipment
•
•
•

Photodyne 550QTM FOTDR (optical time-domain reflectometer)
Tektronix OF-150™ FOTDR
FOTEC T302D™ fiber-optic test set

Baseband Coaxial Cable Tools
•
•
•

DIGITAL 29-24668 coaxial cable stripper
DIGITAL 29-24663 ferrule and pin crimper
DIGITAL 29-24667 coaxial cable cutter

*May also be used for testing broadband networks.

4-1

Baseband Transceiver Cable Tools

•
•

AMP 90302™ D-connector pin crimper
AMP 91239™ cable ferrule crimp tool and die set

DECconnect Tools and Repair Equipment

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

H8241 MMP Crimp Tool
H8242 Faceplate Tool Kit
Standard Ethernet Cable Cutter
Standard Ethernet Cable Stripper
Standard Ethernet Cable Crimp Tool and Die Set
H4090 Transceiver Installation Kit
Transceiver Cable Ferrule Crimp Tool and Die Set
Transceiver Cable D-Connector Pin Crimp Tool
H4054 Transceiver Cable Straight Connector Kit
H4055 Transceiver Cable Right-Angle Connector Kit
Fiber-Optic Pulling Device
Fiber-Optic Swivel

4.2 BASEBAND TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
This section describes the various tools and test equipment required for installing and/or maintaining
baseband Ethernet devices.

4.2.1 H4090 (-KA and -KB) Transceiver Installation Kit
The H4090-K* transceiver installation kit is required for installation of an H4000 Ethernet transceiver.
Two versions of the kit are available from Digital Equipment Corporation: the H4090-KA and H4090-KB.

The parts that make up the H4090-KA and H4090-KB transceiver installation kits are shown in the
following table.
Table 1 Parts Included in H4090 Transceiver Installation Kits
H4090-KA

H4090-KB

Part

29-24337 cordless electric drill and charger

29-24341 insulated drill bits
29-24338 drilling fixture assembly
29-24339 box with 100 braid terminators
29-24340 3/16-inch hex wrench

*Equivalent parts must be supplied by a local source.

4-2

The following illustration shows the parts that make up the H4090-KA and H4090-KB transceiver
installation kits.

ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
INSTALLATION KIT H4090-KA
OR H4090-KB

~EXWRENCH
-

\ , 9 24340
0

DRILL AND DRILL CHARGER
29-24337 (NOT INCLUDED
IN -KB KIT)

CABLE GUIDE
DRILL CHUCK
KEY
DRILL GUIDE

f~l
DRILL BITS
(VIAL OF 5)
29-24341

WoRILLING FIXTURE 29-24338
(INCLUDES DRILL GUIDE
AND CABLE GUIDE)

BOX OF BRAID CONTACTS
29-24339 (NOT REQUIRED
FOR INSTALLATION)

H4090 TRANSCEIVER INSTALLATION KIT (OLD STYLE)
MKVB4-2210

Figure 1 Transceiver Installation Kit Parts (Sheet 1 of 2)

4-3

INSTALLATION TOOL
PIN 12-24664-02

TRANSCEIVER INSTALLATION TOOL (NEW STYLE)
LKG-0455

Figure 1 Transceiver Installation Kit Parts (Sheet 2 of 2)
4.2.2 H4000-TA and H4000-TB Ethernet Transceiver Tester
The H4000-T* tester is a portable test device that may be used for on-line verification of the following
Ethernet physical channel components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

H4000 Ethernet transceivers
Ethernet coaxial cable
Transceiver cables
Etherjack connectors
DELNI network interconnects
DEREP Ethernet repeaters
DECOM broadband transceivers

There are two versions of the H4000-T* transceiver tester.
•
•

H4000-TA 120 V /60 Hz
H4000-TB 240 V /50 Hz

4-4

An H4000-T* transceiver tester verifies a transceiver's capability to perform the following.
•
•
•
•

Transmit a packet to an Ethernet coaxial cable
Receive data from an Ethernet coaxial cable
Detect a collision
Generate CPT (collision presence test)

The H4000-T* transceiver tester operates in two modes.
•

TX/RX (transmit/receive) mode
In this mode, one tester is used to verify the transceiver to which it is connected. The tester
transmits a packet to the transceiver, receives these data packets back from the transceiver, and
verifies the data packets.

•

RX ONLY (receive only) mode
In this mode two testers are used to verify Ethernet network connectivity. Connectivity can be
between a pair of transceivers, DELNI ports, or similar Ethernet ports. One transceiver tester is
set in the TX/RX mode while the other tester (set in RX ONLY mode) receives and verifies
the data packets transmitted by the TX/RX tester.

For specific instructions on the use of the H4000-T* transceiver tester, consult the Ethernet Transceiver
Tester User's Manual (EK-ETHTT-UG).
The following illustration shows an H4000-T* transceiver tester.

MKV84-1658

Figure 2 H4000-T* Ethernet Transceiver Tester

4-5

4.2.3 H4080 Loopback Test Connector
The H4080 test connector acts as a "known-good" transceiver to simulate connection to an Ethernet
coaxial cable. As such, it provides packet loopback, CPT (collision presence test) signals, and draws
normal transceiver current. The H4080 connector may be used to test controllers, repeaters, DELNI
network interconnects, and similar devices. The following illustration shows an H4080 connector.

Figure 3 H4080 Loopback Test Connector
4.2.4 Tektronix Type 1503 Time-Domain Reflectometer (TDR)
The Tektronix 1503 TDR is a portable test device used to measure the length and attenuation of a single
Ethernet coaxial cable (see notes). These parameters may be used to accurately determine the distance to
cable faults such as shorted, open, or unterminated cable.

1.
2.

NOTES
For testing baseband (BNE2) cable, a BNC to
N adaptor is required.
For testing broadband (CAB-6) cable, a BNC
to F adaptor is required.

The Tektronix type 1503 TDR (or equivalent) is required for certification of the Ethernet coaxial cable.
Its features include:
•
•

An oscilloscope-type display,
A strip chart (optional) for recording cable "signatures",
4-6

•
•

Selectable impedance levels (50, 75, 93 and 125 ohms), and
Distance calibration switches for entering propagation delay.

The following illustration shows a Tektronix type 1503 TDR.

",n.'IUlll·"

Type 1503 TDR

4.3 BROADBAND TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
This section describes the various tools and test equipment required for installing and/or maintaining
broadband Ethernet devices.
4.3.1 Blonder Tongue Model SA-7U Variable Attenuator
The model SA-7U variable attenuator is used to verify the dynamic range of the broadband transceiver.
The SA-7U attenuator is portable [less than .454 kg (I lb)]and attenuation may be varied by 1 dB steps to
62 dB.

4-7

MKV84-1660

Figure 5 Blonder-Tongue Model SA-7U Variable Attenuator
4.3.2 Wavetek Model 1801B Sweep Signal Generator
The Wavetek model 1801B sweep signal generator provides a means to test the bandpass of a broadband
Ethernet cable. Specifically, the 1801B generator may provide a single frequency or may sweep through
the entire broadband spectrum.
Features of the model 1801B sweep signal generator include:
•
•
•

Variable rate of sweep,
Variable repetition of sweep, and
Variable voltage level of the output sweep.

The generator should be used in conjunction with the following equipment.
•

Signal level meter (Wavetek SAM III or equivalent).

•

Spectrum analyzer (or oscilloscope connected to spectrum analyzer output on the SAM III
signal meter).

4.3.3 Wavetek SAM III Signal Analysis Meter
The Wavetek SAM III signal analysis meter is a portable test device used to measure RF signal levels in
broadband (and other CATV type) cable systems.
The Wavetek SAM III meter has the following capabilities.
•

Signal level measurement in dBmV.

•

Internal calibration to within ± .25 dBmV.

•

A spectrum analyzer output that enables certain oscilloscopes to act as a spectrum analyzer.

•

A front panel keyboard that permits selection of preprogrammed standard and HRC channels,
or manual selection of any frequency in the 450 MHz (CATV) bandwidth.

4.4 FIBER-OPTIC TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
This section describes the various tools and test equipment required for installing and/or maintaining fiberoptic cables.

4-8

4.4.1 Photodyne Model 5500 Fiber-Optic Time-Domain Reflectometer (FOTDR)
The Photodyne model 5500 FOTDR is a portable test device used to measure the following parameters of
a fiber-optic cable.

•
•

Attenuation
Distance to faults, breaks, and the end of the fiber

Features of the 5500 FOTDR include a four-digit digital readout (an oscilloscope-type display is not
provided).
The 5500 FOTDR may be used with the following additional equipment.
•
•

Amphenol type 906™ SMA connector
Tektronix model 564™ oscilloscope or equivalent

Figure 6

Photodyne Model 5500 FOTDR

4-9

4.4.2 Tektronix Model OF-150 Fiber-Optic Time-Domain Reflectometer (FOTDR)
The Tektronix model OF-ISO FOTDR is a portable test device used to measure the following parameters

of a fiber-optic cable.
•
•

Attenuation
Distance to faults, breaks, and the end of the fiber

The Tektronix model OF-ISO FOTDR (or equivalent) is required for certification of a fiber-optic link.

The OF-1S0 FOTDR may require an Amphenol type 906 SMA connector.
Features of the OF-1S0 FOTDR include:
•
•

An oscilloscope-type display, and
A strip chart for recording fiber "signatures".

Figure 7 Tektronix Model OF-ISO FOTDR

4-10

4.4.3 FOTEC Optical Test Set
The FOTEC Optical Test Set is a portable test device used to measure and perform the following:
•
•
•
•

Cable loss
Coupled source power
Receiver power level
Loopback testing

MKV86-0555

Figure 8 FOTEC S300 Signal Source

MKV86-0556

Figure 9

FOTEC M200 Optical Power Meter
4-11

4.5 BASEBAND COAXIAL CABLE TOOLS
This section describes the various tools and test equipment required for installing and/or maintaining
Ethernet coaxial cables.
4.5.1 DIGITAL 29-24668 Coaxial Cable Stripper
The DIGITAL 29-24668 coaxial cable stripper is used to strip insulation and braided shield from the
coaxial cable in preparation for installing male "N" type connectors.

MKV84-1663

Figure 10 DIGITAL 29-24668 Coaxial Cable Stripper

4-12

4.5.2 DIGITAL 29-24663 Ferrule and Pin Crimper
The DIGITAL ferrule and pin crimper (PIN 29-24663) and die set (PIN 29-24662) are used to crimp a
male "N" type connector ferrule on a prepared coaxial cable end.

MKV84·1664

Figure 11

DIGITAL 29-24663 Ferrule and
Pin Crimper, and Die Set 29-24662

4-13

4.5.3 DIGITAL 29-24667 Coaxial Cable Cutter
The DIGITAL 29-24667 coaxial cable cutter is used to cut coaxial cable with minimum deformation of
the cable end.

MKV84·1665

Figure 12

DIGITAL 29-24667 Coaxial Cable Cutter

4-14

4.6 BASEBAND TRANSCEIVER CABLE TOOLS
This section describes the various tools and test equipment required for installing and/or maintaining
Ethernet transceiver cables.
4.6.1 AMP 91239-7 Cable Ferrule Crimp Tool and Die Set
The AMP 91239-7 cable ferrule crimp tool and die set is used to crimp the connector ferrule to the end of
a transceiver cable.

MKV84-1666

Figure 13

AMP 91239-7 Cable Ferrule Crimp Tool and Die Set

4-15

4.6.2 AMP 90302-1 D-Connector Pin Crimper
The AMP 90302-1 D-connector pin crimper is used when installing the connector end on a transceiver
cable. The tool can be used for crimping male pins or female sockets to the cable wire.

MKV84-1667

Figure 14

AMP 90302-1 D-Connector Pin Crimper

4-16

4.7 DECconnect TOOLS AND REPAIR COMPONENTS
This section describes the various tools that are used to install and maintain DECconnect systems.
4.7.1 H8241 MMP Crimp Tool
The MMP crimp tool is used to attach loose-piece modified modular plugs (MMPs) to H8240 6-conductor
flat cable.

H8241
MMJ
CRIMP
TOOL

LKG-0449

Figure 15

H8241 MMP Crimp Tool

4-17

4.7.2 H8242 Faceplate Tool Kit
The H8242 faceplate tool kit contains the following tools:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ThinWire cable stripper (47-00114-01)
ThinWire cable crimp tool (47-00115-01) and die set (47-00113-00)
A dual socket wrench to attach the BNC and F-connectors (47-00110-00)
MMJ loopback connectors (H3103)
36-pin loopback connectors (H31O 1)
MMJjMJ punch tool (47-00117-01)
ThinWire terminators (H8225)

4.7.3 Standard Ethernet Cable Cutter
The standard Ethernet cable cutter is used to cut standard Ethernet cable.

STANDARD
ETHERnet
CABLE
CUTTER
DIGITAL PIN 29-24667

LKG-0452

Figure 16

Standard Ethernet Cable Cutter

4-18

4.7.4 Standard Ethernet Cable Stripper
The standard Ethernet cable stripper is used to strip insulation from standard Ethernet cable.

STANDARD
ETHERnet
CABLE
STRIPPER

PIN 29-24668

LKG-0453

Figure 17 Standard Ethernet Cable Stripper

4-19

4.7.5 Standard Ethernet Cable Crimp Tool and Die Set
The standard Ethernet cable crimp tool is used to crimp cable ferrules on standard Ethernet coaxial cable.

STANDARD
ETHERnet
CABLE
CRIMP
TOOL

LKG-04S4

Figure 18 Standard Ethernet Cable Crimp Tool and Die Set

4-20

4.7.6 84090 Transceiver Installation Kit
The H4090 transceiver installation kit is used to attach the old style H4000 transceiver to the standard
Ethernet coaxial cable. Refer to the Baseband Tools and Test Equipment section of this chapter for more
information.
4.7.7 Transceiver Cable Ferrule Crimp Tool and Die Set
The transceiver cable ferrule crimp tool is used to attach the cable ferrule to the transceiver cable.

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
FERRULE
CRIMP
TOOL

PIN 29-24662

LKG-0456

Figure 19 Transceiver Cable Ferrule Crimp Tool and Die Set

4-21

4.7.8 Transceiver Cable D-Connector Pin Crimp Tool
The transceiver cable D-connector pin crimp tool is used to attach the D-connector pins to the individual
wires of the transceiver cable;

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE
D-CONNECTOR
PIN
CRIMP
TOOL
AMP PIN 90302-1

LKG-0457

Figure 20

Transceiver Cable D-Connector Pin Crimp Tool

4-22

4.7.9 H4054 Transceiver Cable Straight Connector Kit
The H4054 connector kit contains the supplies necessary to repair a straight connector transceiver
D-connector.

H4054
STRAIGHT
CABLE
CONNECTOR

LKG-0458

Figure 21

H4054 Transceiver Cable Straight Connector Kit

4-23

4.7.10 H4055 Transceiver Cable Right-Angle Connector Kit
The H4055 connector kit contains the supplies necessary to repair a right-angle D-connector.

H4055

RIGHT-ANGLE
CABLE
CONNECTOR

LKG-0459

Figure 22

H4055 Transceiver Cable Right-Angle Connector Kit

4-24

4.7.11 Fiber-Optic Pulling Device
The pulling device properly distributes the pulling force over the strength elements in a fiber-optic cable.
When pulling, the device grips the outside of the fiber-optic cable.

FIBER-OPTIC
CABLE
PULLING
GRIP

LKG-0460

Figure 23

Fiber-Optic Pulling Device

4-25

4.7.12 Fiber-Optic Swivel
The fiber-optic swivel allows the cable coils to unwind naturally without causing cable kinks.

FIBER-OPTIC
CABLE
PULLING
SWIVEL

LKG-0461

Figure 24

Fiber-Optic Swivel

4-26

CHAPTER 5
NETWORK TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 INTRODUCTION
The object of troubleshooting an Ethernet network is to isolate problems affecting network operation.
There are several tools available to accomplish this. Since space and time restrict the documenting of all
the tools, this chapter will concentrate on the Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) with a brief
description of the Network Control Program (NCP).
This chapter contains the following information:
•
•
•
•
•

An overview of the Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE).
NIE operating instructions
Listing of the NIE commands
Listing of NIE error messages
Network Control Program (NCP) overview

5.2 NETWORK INTERCONNECT EXERCISER (NIE) OVERVIEW
The NIE is a program that enables the user to test whether nodes on an Ethernet can communicate with
one another. The NIE operates at the data link level of the Ethernet architecture and uses the loopback
features of the Maintenance Operation Protocol (MOP).
The following capabilities are provided by the NIE:
Testing - Enables the user to determine whether nodes on the network can communicate with one another.
This kind of testing is called' connectivity testing and can be performed at any time. Such tests, however,
should always be conducted when a node is added to the network. Connectivity testing provides four types
of tests to verify the connectivity of new and existing nodes. Each test loops packets through different
paths to verify that the tested nodes can communicate with each other.
Monitoring - Enables the user to monitor network traffic to determine the volume and characteristics of
the packets moving through the network. Statistics returned by this capability can help analyze problems
that may be caused by traffic flow and protocol errors between sending and receiving nodes.
A user· can specify that the monitor listen to the traffic and log statistics based on anyone, any
combination, all, or none of the following parameters:
•
•
•

Specified source node address
Specified destination node address
Specified protocol type

If values are not specified for any of these parameters, all nodes will be monitored for messages of all
protocol types.

5-1

5.3 VMS OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5.3.1 Setting DECnet and VMS Parameters
Certain network and system parameters must be set or reset for NIE to run. SERVICE must be disabled
on the host node.
NCP> SHOW CIRCUIT UNA-n CHARACTERISTICS
The network returns a list of characteristics for the specified circuit. SERVICE is specified as ENABLED
or DISABLED. If DISABLED, exit NCP. If ENABLED, use the following command.
NCP> SET CIRCUIT UNA-n STATE OFF
NCP> SET CIRCUIT UNA-n SERVICE DISABLED
NCP> SET CIRCUIT UNA-n STATE ON
NCP> EXIT
NOTE
Setting CIRCUIT STATE OFF dissolves all links
for the specified circuit. It might be a good idea,
therefore, to SHOW KNOWN LINKS before setting the CIRCUIT STATE OFF.
The following VMS parameters must be adjusted:
MAXBUF Parameter
$MCR SYSGEN
SYSGEN>SHOW MAXBUF
If this parameter is 1600 or greater, exit SYSGEN. If the parameter is not 1600 or greater, enter the
following commands:

SYSGEN>SET MAXBUF 1600
SYSGEN> WRITE ACTIVE
SYSGEN>EXIT

BYTLM Parameter
$SET DEF SYS$SYSTEM
$RUN AUTHORIZE
UAF>MODIFY <username>/BYTLM=30000
UAF> EXIT
A user must log out and log in again for this change to take effect.
NOTE
When the NIE run is complete, use the above procedure to return the MAXBUF and BYTLM parameters to their orignal values.

5-2

5.3.2 DECnet Implications
When running concurrently with DECnet, the Ethernet adapter internal counters are shared. They contain
information concerning full operation of the NI adapter, not just information developed by the NIE. A
SHOW COUNTERS command displays full counter information since the time the counters were last
zeroed. This includes information generated by DECnet operation. The NIE cannot zero the NI adapter
counters.
5.3.3 Loading and Starting NIE
When in the VAX Diagnostic Supervisor (VDS), enter the following series of commands:
DS>LOAD EVDWC
[730]
DS>ATTACH DW[750] HUB DWO
[780]
DS>ATTACH [UNAll] DWO XEAO 774510 120
[LUA11]
DS>SELECT XEAO
DS>START
In the above, 774510 is the device address, and 120 is the vector. After the START command is issued,
the NIE prompt (NIE» appears. Help can be obtained using NIE by typing HELP or a question mark (?)
to the NIE prompt.
NOTE
Running NIE increases traffic on the network. If
more than one NIE runs concurrently on the network, normal operation could be severely affected.
Note also that NIE does not guarantee packet delivery. Test packets lost during normal operation are
reported to the operator.
5.4

PDP-II XXDP+ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

5.4.1

Requirements
•
•
•

Network Interconnect Exerciser (NIE) CZUACC Version CO
XXDP+ Monitor Version 2.0 or later
Diagnostic Runtime Services (DRS) Version 2.0 or later

5.4.2 Loading NIE
Boot the medium and the XXDP+ prompt, a dot (.), appears. Type the following:
$R CZUACC
This loads the DRS along with NIE into system memory. The following prompt informs the user that
XXDP+ has passed control to DRS.
DR>

5-3

Under DRS the following commands can be used:
STA

Start the NIE

RES

Restart the NIE

CON

Continue running the NIE after <CTRL C> is entered

DIS

Display content of hardware parameter table

EXI

Exit the DRS to the XXDP+ monitor

START, RESTART, and CONTINUE can be used with the following switches:
/NOR

Informs the DRS not to perform checksum after DRS traps

/FLA:flaglist

Sets all flags that are specified in flaglist
Flags that may be used are:
IER - Inhibit all error reports
IBE - Inhibit all error reports except first level
IXE - Inhibit extended error reports

5.4.3 Starting the NIE
The following commands and responses are used to start the NIE:
DR>

START/NOR

Change HW (L)?

TYPE Y

# UNITS (D)

ENTER 1

WHAT IS THE PCSRO ADDRESS (O)? 174510?

ENTER THE ADDRESS

WHAT IS THE VECTOR ADDRESS (O)? 120?

ENTER VECTOR

WHAT IS THE PRIORITY LEVEL (O)? 5?

ENTER PRIORITY

When this dialogue is complete, control passes to the NIE. An identification message appears, followed by
the NIE prompt (NIE».

5-4

5.5

NIE COMMANDS

BOUNCE
FUNCTION

Enables the user to loop a packet through a sequence of nodes specified in the command line.
FORMAT

BOUNCE addrlst
addrlst is a list of physical addresses or logical node names in sequence through which the packet will be
looped. If a node table is not built, physical addresses must be used. The addresses and/or node names
must be separated by commas.
EXAMPLE

NIE> BOUNCE/ AA-OO-04-00-02-10,NS,N3,N6,N4
This BOUNCE command loops a packet from the NIE to Node AA-OO-04-00-02-10, to Node 5, to Node
3, to Node 6, to Node 4, and back to the NIE. This table assumes the availability of a node table in which
N3, N4, N5, and N6 are defined.
AA-OO-04-00-02-10

MKV86·0545

Figure 1 BOUNCE Command

5-5

BUILD
FUNCTION
Calls the BUILD routine to build a node table. The node table defines the network to the NIE. It consists
of the following information:
•
•
•
•
•

Logical address
Hardware default address
Physical node address
Node type
DECnet address (for DEC net nodes)

FORMAT
BUILD
EXAMPLE
NIE>BUILD

CLEAR
FUNCTION
Clears the entire node table, specified nodes, and other operating parameters as specified by the user.
FORMAT
CLEAR NODE/addrlst
NODES/ALL
SUMMARY
LISTEN
MESSAGE
addrlst.is one or more logical names or physical addresses of nodes to be cleared from the node table. Node
addresses and/or logical names must be separated by commas.
EXAMPLE
NIE>CLEAR NODES/N 1,N2,AA-00-03-00-1 0-53
This CLEAR command clears nodes Nl, N2, and AA-00-03-00-10-53 from the node table.
NOTE
CLEAR MESSAGE sets MESSAGE parameters to
default values.

5-6

EXIT
FUNCTION
Exits the NIE to Diagnostic Supervisor and deallocates allocated buffer space.
FORMAT
NIE> EXIT

HELP
FUNCTION
Displays HELP text.
FORMAT
HELP or ? (type a question mark)
EXAMPLES
NIE> HELP
NIE>?

IDENTIFY
FUNCTION
Issues a request ID packet to be sent to a specified node or nodes.
FORMAT
IDENTIFY / addr
addr is the physical address or logical name of a node the user wants identified.
EXAMPLES
NIE> IDENTIFY / AA-OO-04-00-27 -10
NIE> IDENTIFY /N6
These IDENTIFY commands cause nodes AA-OO-04-00-27-10 and N6 to return the following identifying
information about itself:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Hardware default address
Current physical address
Node type [DEUNA, DELUA, DSRVA (DECserver 100)]
MOP version number
ECO version numbers
Device-specific information (where -implemented)
5-7

LISTEN
FUNCTION
Monitors the network for packets that pass user-specified filters.
FORMAT
LISTEN SOURCE/addr
DESTINATION/addr
PROTOCOL/protype
SOURCE/addr is the physical address or logical name of the transmitting node. Default = accepts packets
with any valid source address.
DESTINATION/addr is the physical address or logical name of the destination node. Default = accepts
packets with any valid destination address.
PROTOCOL/protype is the protocol type specified in the packet. Default = accepts packets of any valid
protocol type.
Protocol Types
60-00
60-01
60-02
60-03
60-04
60-06
00-08
90-00

Loopback functions
Dump/load functions
Remote console functions
DECnet
LAT (Ethernet terminal server)
Reserved for customer use by Digital Equipment Corporation
TCP/IP (as implemented by 4.2BSD UNIX)
Cross-company loopback messages

EXAMPLES
NIE>LISTEN
This LISTEN command logs source and destination of messages of all protocol types.
NIE> LISTEN SOURCE/AA-00-03-00-23-45
This LISTEN command logs destination and protocol types of all messages transmitted by node
AA-00-03-00-23-45.
NIE> LISTEN DESTINATION /N2/S0URCE/N 1/PROTOCOL/60-03
This LISTEN command logs messages of protocol 60-03 sent by Node 1 to Node 2.

5-8

MESSAGE
FUNCTION
Establishes the type of data to be contained in the message field of a packet to be looped.
FORMAT
MESSAGE/TYPE=type
/SIZE=n
/SIZE=ALL
/COPIES=n
Type specifies the following message types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ALPHANUMERIC: A-Z, a-z, 0-9
ONES
ZEROS
lALT: 1010101
OALT: 0101010
CCITT: Random test pattern, in accordance with CCITT standard.
TEXT: User-selected pattern; maximum of 72 characters
ALL: Enables packet to cycle among all of the above

SIZE=n is the number of bytes in a packet. Valid range: 46-1500. Default: 512
SIZE=ALL indicates various packet sizes. If TEXT is defined, and the user specifies SIZE=ALL, a
message of minimum, nominal, and maximum will cycle for all of the message types. If TEXT is not
defined, messages of minimum, nominal, and maximum will cycle for all message types except TEXT.
COPIES=n is the number of times the message type is transmitted. Default=1. An entry of -lor "loop"
causes the test to loop until a <CTRL/C> is entered.
EXAMPLE
NIE>MESSAGE/TYPE=OALT/SIZE=1024/COPIES=3
This MESSAGE command causes a test message of OALT, 1024 bytes long, 3 copies.
NOTE
If only MESSAGE is entered, default values will be
set for all parameters.

5-9

NODE
FUNCTION
Adds a specified node or nodes to the node table.
FORMAT
NODE/addrlst
addrlst is a physical address or addresses of a node or nodes that a user wants to add to the node table.
EXAMPLE
NIE>NODE/ AA-00-03-00-27-1 0,AA-00-03-01-04-26
Adds specified nodes to the node table.

NOPRINT
FUNCTION
Puts NIE into the NOPRINT mode.
FORMAT
NIE>NOPRINT

PRINT
FUNCTION
Puts NIE into the PRINT mode.
FORMAT
NIE>PRINT

5-10

RUN
FUNCTION
Causes the specified test to execute the specified number of times.
FORMAT
RUN test[jPASS=n]
Test is DIRECT, LOOPPAIR, or ALL.
DIRECT - Loops a packet to each node in the node table and maintains test summary data in a
summary data table. Message parameters are set up in the MESSAGE command. NIE waits a
maximum of three (3) seconds for a reply.
LOOPPAIR - Loops a packet through each logically adjacent pair of nodes in the node table. In a
4-node network, for example, the loop path would be: Nl to N2 to Nl, N2 to N3 to N2, N3 to N4 to
N3, N4 to Nl to N4.
ALL - First invokes DIRECT for one pass and goes to LOOPPAIR.
NOTE
In all cases, the test begins and ends at the node in
which NIE resides.
jPASS=n indicates the number of times the test is to be run. Default = value of jCOPIES in the
MESSAGE command. An entry of -lor "loop" causes the test to loop until <CTRLjC> is entered.
EXAMPLES
NIE>RUN DIRECTjPASS=3
NIE>RUN LOOPPAIR
NIE>RUN ALL

MKV86-0546

Figure 2 RUN DIRECT

5-11

MKV86-0547

Figure 3 RUN LOOPPAIR

SAVE
FUNCTION

Writes the current node table to a text file.

FORMAT
SAVE [filespec]
filespec is a valid VMS file specification. Default = NIE. TBL.
EXAMPLES
NIE>SA VE NTBL.TXT
This command writes the current node table to a file called NTBL.TXT.
NIE>SAVE
This command writes the current node table to the default file, NIE.TBL.

5-12

SHOW
FUNCTION
This command displays information as specified by the command's qualifier.

FORMAT
SHOW [NODES]
[MESSAGES]
[COUNTERS]
[LISTEN]
[REMOTE addr]
SHOW NODES displays the contents of the node table.
SHOW MESSAGES displays the current MESSAGE parameters.
SHOW COUNTERS displays counters maintained by the node on which the NIE is running.
SHOW LISTEN displays the contents of two data logs. One log consists of source address, destination
address, protocol type, packet length, and count indicating the number of times a packet passes a specified
filter. The second log contains source addresses for packets that have passed filters and a count of the
number of times packets with that source address have been received.
SHOW REMOTE displays the counters maintained by the specified remote node, if the node supports this
function. The remote node may be specified by physical address or logical name.

NOTE
SHOW REMOTE has not been implemented.
EXAMPLE
NIE>SHOW NODES

5-13

SUMMARY
FUNCTION
Displays summary data of all test runs since the CLEAR SUMMARY command was last issued or since
the NIE was started.
FORMAT
SUMMARY
EXAMPLE
NIE>SUMMARY

UNSAVE
FUNCTION
Restores the latest version of the node table that was written to a specified file or to the default file by the
SAVE command.
FORMAT
UNSAVE [filespec]
filespec is a valid VMS file specification. Default = NIE.TBL.
EXAMPLES
NIE>UNSA VE NTBL.TXT
This command restores the latest version of a file called NTBL.TXT.
NIE>UNSAVE
This command restores the latest version of the default file NIE.TBL.

5-14

5.6 ERROR MESSAGES
The NIE issues three types of error messages:
•
•
•

NIE QIO error messages
System error messages
Test error messages

When the NIE aborts because of an error condition, you will go to the Diagnostic Supervisor level; other
errors leave you in NIE.
SAMPLE ERROR MESSAGE #1
The following is an error message when the MAXBUF was set at 1400 bytes instead of 1600 bytes and the
following NIE commands were issued:
NIE>MESSAGEjSIZE=1500
NIE>BOUNCEjN 1
Starting bounce - 1500 bytes, ASCII data pattern ...
******NI EXERCISER EXTENDED - 2.0******************
Pass 0, initialization section, error 29, 7-MAR-1986 16:12:52.51
System fatal error while testing XEAO: QIO error in Bounce procedure
RO status error queueing packet transmit. Exceeded. quota.
******End of System fatal error number 29***********
.. Aborted program at pass 0, initialization section, PC 00009652
DS>
To correct this error and confirm the system, use the following commands:
SYSGEN>SET MAXBUF 1600
SYSGEN>WRITE ACTIVE
SYSGEN>EXIT
$RUN ENSAA

OS>ATTA OW730 HUB OWO
DS>ATTA UNAII OWO XEAO 774510 120 5
OS>SEL ALL
OS>RUN EVOWC

NIE>UNSAVE
12 Entries have been added to the node table
(this command uses the existing node table)
NIE>MESSAGE SIZE 1500
NIE>BOUNCE Nl
Starting bounce - 1500 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test ok

5-15

SAMPLE ERROR MESSAGE #2
The following error message was encountered trying to run NIE with service enabled.
$MC NCP
NCP>CIR UNA-O STATE OFF
NCP>CIR UNA-O SERVICE ENABLE
NCP>CIR UNA-O STATE ON
NCP>EXIT
$RUN ENSAA

DS>ATTA DW730 HUB DWO
DS>ATTA UNA11 DWO XEAO 774510 120 5
DS>SEL ALL
DS>RUN EVDWC
.. program: NI EXERCISER EXTENDED, revision 2.0, 1 test, at 16:29:27.19
Testing:XEAO
******NI EXERCISER EXTENDED - 2.0**************
Pass 0, Initialization section, error 10, 7-MAR 1986 16:29:27:.71
System fatal error while testing XEA): Error starting NI channel.
Cannot start loopback (MOP) channel.
Device already allocated to another user.
There were 0 (dec) bytes transferred.
I/O Status Block status = 00000000 (hex)
******End of System fatal error number 10**********
.. Aborted at pass 0, Initialization section, PC 00007CB7
DS>EXIT
To correct the error do the following:
$MC NCP
NCP>SET CIR UNA-O STATE OFF
NCP>SET CIR UNA-O SERVICE DISABLE
NCP>SET CIR UNA-O STATE ON
NCP>EXIT
$

5-16

SAMPLE ERROR MESSAGE #3
The following error message occurs when no device is attached.
DS>RUN EVDWC
.. Program: NI EXERCISER EXTENDED, revision 2.0, 1 test, at 16:33:01.02.
??No units to test, none selected with device types UNA11, LUA11
DS>
To correct the problem the user must do the attaching in the Diagnostic Supervisor as follows:
DS>ATTA DW730 HUB DWO
DS>ATTA UNA11 DWO XEAO 774520 120 5
DS>SEL ALL

5-17

5.7 TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEMS
The two problems discussed in this section show the use of NIE as a network troubleshooting tool. When
running NIE, there is no need to turn off DEC net or LAT-11. This allows the system to stay up and
running on the network.
NOTE
Service, however, must be disabled on the node running the NIE.
PROBLEM #1
Customer at Node N2 cannot communicate with Node N4.

MKV86·0548

Figure 4 Network Configuration for Problem #1

5-18

Probable troublehooting method. After starting NIE the following commands can be used:
NIE>UNSAVE (Loads "saved" node table)
NIE>BOUNCE/N1.N3
Starting bounce - 512 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test ok
Proves that N2 can talk to N1 and N3.)
NIE>BOUNCE/N4
Starting bounce - 512 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test timed out
*******NI EXERCISER EXTENDED - 2.0*****************
Pass 0, initialization section, error 100 25-NOV-1985 09:51:41.59
System fatal error while testing XEAO: Error looping packets.
BOUNCE command
ASCII data pattern
Packet frame length = 512 (dec) bytes
Pass 0
******End of System fatal error 100***********************
This should indicate that something is wrong with N4 or the path to N4. A check of the DELNI unit
shows that the Mode Selection switch is in the LOCAL position. Put switch in GLOBAL position. Check
network using NIE as follows:
NIE>BOUNCE/Nl,N3,N4
Starting bounce - 512 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test ok
Problem solved.

5-19

PROBLEM #2

Customer at Node Nl cannot talk to Node N4.

MKV86-0549

Figure 5 Network Configuration for Problem #2

5-20

Probable troubleshooting method using NIE. After NIE is running use the following commands.
NIE>UNSAVE
NIE>BOUNCE/N2,N3,N4
Starting bounce - 512 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test timed out
*******NI EXERCISER EXTENDED - 2.0******************
Pass 0, initialization section, error 100, 25-NOV-1985 09:41:51.59
System fatal error while testing XEAO: Error looping packets.
BOUNCE command
ASCII data pattern
Packet frame length = 512 (dec) bytes
Pass 0
******End of System fatal error 100********************
NIE>BOUNCE/N2
Starting bounce - 512 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test ok
Go to N3 and run NIE.
NIE>UNSAVE
NIE> BOUNCE/N 4
Starting bounce - 512 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test ok
NIE> BOUNCE/N 1,N2
Starting bounce - 512 bytes, ASCII data pattern .. Test timed out
*******NI EXERCISER EXTENDED - 2.0***************
Pass 0, initialization section, error 100, 25-NOV-1985 09:45:51.19
System fatal error while testing XEAO: Error looping packets.
BOUNCE command
ASCII data pattern
Packet frame length = 512 (dec) bytes
Pass 0
******End of System fatal error 100*****************
Test results show that nodes on either side of the repeater can communicate; nodes cannot communicate
across the repeater.
This indicates that the repeater linking the two segments is the probable cause.

5-21

5.8 NCP OVERVIEW
This is a brief overview of three basic NCP commands. In-depth information on NCP can be obtained
from the NCP Reference Manual (AA-Z425A-TE). The commands described below allow the user to
loop within or between nodes and to set circuits for running NIE.

LOOP NODE
FUNCTION
The LOOP NODE command tests a specified node (other than the executor node) in the network by
causing test blocks of data to be transmitted to the node. The parameters are optional and can be entered
in any order.
FORMAT
NCP>LOOP node - component [parameter][ ... ]
PARAMETERS
ACCOUNT
Identifies the user's account for access control verification for the designated node.
COUNT
Number of blocks to be sent during loopback. Range = 1 through 65,535 (decimal). Default = 1.
LENGTH
Specifies length (in bytes) of the blocks to be sent during loopback. Range = 1 through 65,535.
Default = 40.
PASSWORD
Identifies the user's password for access control verification for the designated node.
USER
Specifies the user's identification for access control verification for the designated node.
WITH
Specifies the type of binary information to be sent during testing. The three types of data that can be
sent are:
MIXED
ONES
ZEROS
EXAMPLE
NCP>LOOP NODE LAUREL

5-22

LOOP CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
The LOOP CIRCUIT command tests a specified circuit in "the network by transmitting test blocks of data
over the specified circuit. Parameters are optional and can be entered in any order.
FORMAT
NCP>LOOP circuit-component[parameter][ ... ]
CIRCUIT-COMPONENT - Identifies the circuit for loopback testing.
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANT PHYSICAL ADDRESS
Ethernet physical address of the node that will be loopback assistant for Ethernet third party loop
testing. Must be included if HELP is used in this command. Cannot be a multicast address.
ASSISTANT NODE
Can be used instead of PHYSICAL ASSISTANT ADDRESS.
COUNT
Specifies the number of blocks to be sent during loopback testing. Range = 1 through 65,535.
Default = 1.
HELP
Indicates assistance to be provided during Ethernet loopback testing by the assistant node. Three
types are:
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
FULL
If HELP is specified, ASSISTANT PHYSICAL ADDRESS or ASSISTANT NODE must be

specified.
LENGTH
Specifies length (in bytes) of blocks to be sent during loopback testing. Range = 1 through 65,535.
Default = 40.
NODE
Identifies the destination node to be used for loopback testing. Can be used instead of PHYSICAL
ADDRESS parameter.
PHYSICAL ADDRESS
Identifies the Ethernet physical address of the destination node in Ethernet loopback testing.

5-23

WITH
Specifies type of binary data to be sent during testing. Three types are:
MIXED
ONES
ZEROS
Default = MIXED

EXAMPLES
NCp>LOOP CIRCUIT UNA-O PHYSICAL ADDRESS AA-OO-04-00-FF-04
NCp>LOOP CIRCUIT UNA-O NODE 224
NCp>LOOP CIRCUIT UNA-O PHYSICAL ADDRESS AA-OO-04-00-12-02
ASSISTANT NODE GULL HELP RECEIVE

SET CIRCUIT
FUNCTION
The SET CIRCUIT command is needed to set circuit characteristics for running NIE.

FORMAT
NCP>SET CIRCUIT UNA-n STATE OFF
(circuit not in use)
NCP>SET CIRCUIT UNA-n SERVICE DISABLED
(circuit may not perform any service functions)
NCP>SET CIRCUIT UNA-n STATE ON
(circuit is available for normal use)

5-24

CHAPTER 6
ETHERNET CONFIGURATION

6.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter defines the local area network (LAN) configurations supported by the Ethernet and summarizes the guidelines for these configurations.
Ethernet configurations fall into one of five categories:
•
•
•
•
•

Standard Ethernet configurations (see Section 6.3)
ThinWire Ethernet configurations (see Section 6.4)
Combined Standard/Thin Wire Ethernet configurations (see Section 6.5)
Extended LAN configurations (see Section 6.6)
Broadband Ethernet configurations (see Section 6.7)

6.2 GENERAL GUIDELINES
All configurations must conform to the following guideline:
The number of stations for a single Ethernet network must be limited to 1024. A station is any
network-addressable device. Repeaters and DELNI network interconnects are not considered stations.
The various configurations are illustrated in figures and the rules are listed in conjunction with them.
Figure 1 identifies the symbols used in the illustrations.

6-1

STANDARD ETHERNET COAXIAL CABLE
ThinWire ETHERNET COAXIAL CABLE
TRANSCEIVER CABLE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE

BARREL CONNE€TION
T-CONNECTOR

TERMINATOR

ETHERNET TRANSCEIVERS
MULTIPORT REPEATER (DEMPR AND DESPR)

IDESTA\

IDEMPRI

LOCAL NETWORK INTERCONNECT (DELNI)

I DELNII

TERMINAL SERVER (DSRVA)

IDSRVA\

LOCALREPEATER(DERE~

REMOTE REPEATER (DEREP)

LOCAL BRIDGE
REMOTE BRIDGE

STATION
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT ROOM

SER
MKV88·1016

Figure 1

Ethernet Network Architectural Symbols

6-2

6.3 STANDARD ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS
Standard Ethernet LANs are Digital Equipment Corporation's implementation of both the Ethernet and
IEEE 802.3 "lObase5" standards. Standard Ethernet LANs are Ethernets that are composed of one or more
standard Ethernet coaxial cable segments. If the network consists of multiple segments, these segments are
joined by the use of standard Ethernet repeaters (DEREP). Standard Ethernets are sometimes called IEEE
802.3 "10base5" networks. The 10 refers to the speed of the network (10 Mbits/s) and the 5 refers to the
maximum length allowed for a single segment (500 meters or 1640.0 feet).
This section describes the rules for the following:
•
•
•
•
•

Station attachments to standard Ethernet LANs (see Section 6.3.1)
Standalone DELNI configurations (see Section 6.3.2)
Cascaded DELNI configurations (see Section 6.3.3)
Standard Ethernet coaxial cable segments (see Section 6.3.4)
Multiple-segment standard Ethernet configurations (see Section 6.3.5)

6.3.1 Station Attachment to Standard Ethernet LANs
Basic configuration rules:
•

Stations are attached to standard Ethernet LANs by means of a transceiver (also called a
Medium Attachment Unit or MAU). The transceiver mounts on the standard Ethernet coaxial
cable by means of a tap. The transceiver provides a connection point for a transceiver drop cable
which is attached to the station.

•

Transceiver drop cables must be limited to 50 meters (164.0 feet) in length. This maximum
length may be reduced due to an internal cabling equivalency at the station or due to the use of
high-loss transceiver cable:
Many stations have an internal cabling equivalency. This cabling equivalency is a measure
of the internal timing delay of the device expressed in meters of transceiver cable. This cable
equivalency must be subtracted from the 50-meter maximum (164.0 feet). For instance, if a
station has a 5-meter (16.4 feet) internal cabling equivalency, then its maximum allowable
transceiver cable length is 50-5 or 45 meters (147.6 feet). The internal cabling
equivalencies for all DEC connect System Ethernet products are given in Table 1.
High-loss transceiver cable has a signal loss that is four times that of the regular transceiver
cable. Therefore, if high-loss transceiver cable is used, the maximum transceiver cable
distance must be divided by 4. This means the maximum high-loss transceiver cable length
allowed is 12.5 meters (41.0 feet). If the station has any internal cabling equivalency, this
should be subtracted from the 50-meter (164.0 feet) maximum before dividing by 4. For
instance, if a station has a 10-meter (32.8 feet) internal cabling equivalency and is attached
to its transceiver using high-loss transceiver cable, then its maximum allowable transceiver
cable length is (50-10)/4 or 10 meters (32.8 feet).

•

Table 2 shows which products and transceivers are compatible. When an H4005 transceiver is
used, the transceiver cable must be an IEEE 802.3-compliant transceiver cable
(BNE3H/K/L/M or BNE4C/D).
NOTE
When the DELNI is used with an H4005, H4000BA, or DESTA with heartbeat disabled, any devices
attached to the DELNI will show incrementing collision detect check failure counters.

6-3

Table 1 Internal Cable Equivalencies
Product

Cable Equivalency (in meters)

DECNA
DELUA
DEQNA
DE UNA
DELNI
DEREP
DEMPR/DESPR
LAN Bridge 100
DECserver 100
Ethernet Terminal Server
DELQA
DECserver 200
DECserver 500
DEBNA/DEBNK

5
5
5
10
5

Table 2

o
o
o
o

10
5

o
5
5

Transceiver and Product Matrix

Product

Transceiver

DECNA
DELUA
DEQNA
DEUNA
DELNI
DEREP
DEMPR
LAN Bridge 100
DECserver 100
Ethernet Terminal Server
DELQA
DECserver 200
DECserver 500
DEBNA/DEBNK

H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005/DESTA *
H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005 /DESTA **
H4000
H4000/H4005 /DESTA t
H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005/DESTA
H4000/H4005 /DESTA *
H4000

* Transceiver cable must be 20 m or greater.
** With heartbeat disabled if DEMPR is under DELNI.
t Heartbeat is disabled if DEMPR is to be operated in IEEE 802.3
- compliant mode.

6-4

6.3.2 Standalone DELNI Configurations
Standalone DELNI configurations (see Figure 2) are composed entirely of a single DELNI and its eight
associated transceiver cables.
Basic configuration rules:
•

Up to eight stations can be attached to a DELNI using transceiver drop cables. The transceiver
drop cables must conform to the guidelines given in Section 6.3.1. Note that no transceivers are
needed; the transceiver cables are connected directly to the DELNI.

•

The standalone DELNI must operate in LOCAL mode.

DELNI
50 m MAXIMUM

s
LKG-0421

Figure 2 Standalone DELNI Configuration

6-5

6.3.3 Standalone Cascaded DELNI Configurations
Standalone cascaded DELNI configurations are composed entirely of DELNI interconnects and
transceiver ~ables.
Basic configuration rules:
•

Up to eight DELNI interconnects can be attached to a central DELNI to form a cascaded
DELNI network (see Figure 3).

•

The eight DELNI interconnects are attached using transceiver drop cables. The DELNI-toDELNI transceiver drop cables must adhere to the guidelines given in Section 6.3.1. Note that
the DELNI has no internal cabling equivalency when used in this manner.

•

There can be only one level of cascading.

•

The central DELNI must operate in LOCAL mode; the other DELNI interconnects must
operate in GLOBAL mode.

•

A cascaded DELNI network can never be attached to an Ethernet segment
(Thin Wire or standard).

DELNI

50 m MAXIMUM

~ ~

I DELNI I I DELNI I I DELNI I I DELNI J

DELNI

111

8 STATIONS

I I

DELNI

I I

DELNI

8 STATIONS

I I

DELNI

r r~
8 STATIONS

8 STATIONS
MKV88-1020

Figure 3 Standalone Cascaded DELNI Configuration

6-6

6.3.4 Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segments
A standard Ethernet coaxial cable segment is composed of one or more standard cable sections
(see Figure 4). The sections are joined using barrel connectors.
Basic configuration rules:
•

A segment must be terminated with a 50-ohm terminator at each end of the segment.

•

The segment must be grounded at a single point to the building's ground system.

•

A cable segment can be up to 500 meters (1640.5 feet) long.

•

There can be up to 100 transceivers on a cable segment.

•

There must be at least 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) between transceivers.

500m

MAXIMUM

2.5 m
MINIMUM

/l1li(

UP TO 100 TRANSCEIVERS
LKG-0423

Figure 4 Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segment

6-7

6.3.5 Connecting a DELNI to a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segment
A DELNI is connected to standard Ethernet cable using a transceiver and transceiver drop cable.
Basic configuration rules:
•

The DELNI must operate in GLOBAL mode.

•

When a DELNI is installed between a transceiver and a station (see Figure 5), the maximum
total length of all transceiver cable between the transceiver and the station attached to the
DELNI must not exceed 45 meters (147.6 feet). This is due to the DELNI interconnect's
internal cabling equivalency of 5 meters (16.4 feet) when used in this manner. In addition, the
maximum transceiver drop cable length is affected by the station's internal cabling equivalency or
by the use of high-loss transceiver cable (see Section 6.3.1).

•

A DELNI may be connected to a ThinWire segment with a DESTA. Care should be taken to
ensure that all configuration guidelines are followed.

TRANSCEIVER

COMBINED LENGTHS
MUST NOT EXCEED
45m

LKG-0424

Figure 5 Connecting a DELNI to a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segment

6-8

6.3.6 Multiple-Segment Standard Ethernet Configurations
Multiple-segment standard Ethernets are composed of two or more standard Ethernet coaxial cable segments
joined by the use of standard DEREP Ethernet repeaters. Each of the segments must follow the guidelines
given in Section 6.3.4.
Basic configuration rules:
•

There can be no more than two repeaters between any two stations. A repeater consists of a single
local repeater or a pair of remote (fiber-optic) repeaters.
A local repeater can be used when the two segments to be joined are no more than 100
meters apart (328 feet) (see Figure 6). This length represents the length of the two
transceiver drop cables used to attach the repeater to the segments.
A pair of DEREP-RC remote repeaters amplifies the signal between two standard Ethernet
coaxial cables and transmits the signal over a fiber-optic link (see Figure 7).
The total length of all interrepeater fiber-optic links between any two stations can be up to
1000 meters (3281.0 feet). Therefore, if multiple remote repeater pairs are used between
stations, all the interrepeater fiber-optic links between stations must share this 1000-meter
(3281.0-foot) allowance.
For example, in Figure 7, there are two remote repeater pairs between stations A and B, and
the combined lengths of interrepeater fiber-optic links X and Y (600 + 400) equal the
maximum allowance of 1000 meters (3281.0 feet). There are also two remote repeater pairs
between stations A and C. The combined lengths of these fiber-optic links is 900 meters
(2952.9 feet).
Note that the total length of all fiber-optic cable in the network can exceed 1000 meters
(3281.0 feet) as long as each individual station-to-station path does not exceed this limit.

•

The total cable length allowed between any two stations is 2800 meters (9186.8 feet). As
previously outlined, this includes:
Three coaxial cable segments of 500 meters (1640.5 feet) each.
Two interrepeater fiber-optic links totalling a maximum of 1000 meters (3281.0 feet).
Four 50-meter (164.0-foot) transceiver cables; one for each of the four remote repeater
components (for a total of two remote repeaters).
Two 50-meter (164.0-foot) transceiver cables, one for each station.

•

Local repeaters can be placed in parallel for backup purposes (see Figure 6 repeaters Rl and R2).
During normal operation one of the repeaters will be in standby mode. If the other repeater fails,
the standby repeater will take over.

•

DEREP repeaters cannot be connected to a DELNI or an H4005 transceiver.

6-9

*EITHER R1 OR R2 IS IN STANDBY MODE

LKG-0425

Figure 6

Multiple-Segment Ethernet with Local Repeaters

Figure 7

Multiple-Segment Ethernet with Remote Repeaters

MKV88·1019

6-10

6.4 ThinWire ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS
ThinWire Ethernet configurations are Ethernets composed of one or more ThinWire coaxial cable segments.
If the network consists of multiple segments, these segments are joined using ThinWire multiport repeaters
(DEMPR). ThinWire Ethernets are sometimes called IEEE 802.3 "lObase2" networks. The 10 refers to the
speed of the network (10 Mbits/s) and the 2 refers to the maximum length allowed for a single segment
(185 meters or 606.9 feet).
This section describes the rules for the following:
•
•
•

ThinWire Ethernet coaxial cable segments (see Section 6.4.1)
Standalone DEMPR networks (see Section 6.4.2)
Cascaded DEMPR networks (see Section 6.4.3)

6.4.1 ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segments
Thin Wire coaxial cable segments can be standalone segments that are not attached to any DEMPR
multiport repeaters (see Figure 8), or they can be part of a larger network, using DEMPR multiport
repeaters (see Figure 9).
Basic configuration rules:
•

Thin Wire coaxial cable segments can be composed of multiple coaxial cable sections. These
coaxial cable sections are joined by the use of barrel connectors or by the use of the T-connectors
attached to the cable's stations.

•

A cable segment can be up to 185 meters (606.9 feet) long.

•

There must be a 50-ohm terminator at each end of the cable segment. If a DEMPR is attached to
one end of the cable, the DEMPR provides the termination for that end; a terminator is still
required for the other cable end.

•

There must be one and only one ground per cable segment. Ensure that no other connectors
contact the ground. If the segment is attached to a DEMPR, the DEMPR provides the ground
and no other ground connections are allowed. Two DEMPR multi port repeaters cannot be
connected with a single coaxial segment between two ports.

•

Stations either attach directly to the cable using T-connectors or attach to an Ethernet station
adapter (DESTA) by means of a transceiver cable. A DESTA is connected directly to the
ThinWire by means of aT-connector. DESTA transceiver drops must meet the requirements
outlined in Section 6.3.1.
NOTE
There can never be any cable between the T-connector
and the attached station or DESTA.

•

There must be at least 0.5 meters (19 inches) between T-connectors.

•

Each cable segment can have a maximum of 30 stations between terminators. If the segment is
attached to a DEMPR, the limit is 29 stations; if a satellite equipment room and faceplate are
used, the limit is 28 stations.

6-11

These maximums are derived from a rule that limits the number of cable connections on a
ThinWire segment to 60. Since each T-connector has two connections, there is a maximum of 30
stations allowed per cable, provided that terminators are attached to the T-connectors on the two
end stations. Other connections reduce the allowable number of stations accordingly (for example;
adding a barrel connector, which has two connections, would reduce the number of stations
allowed by one). A DEMPR counts as one connection; a satellite equipment room and faceplate
combination counts as three connections.
•
•

ThinWire cable segments must never be configured in a loop.
Thin Wire cable segments must never have any branch segments. All T-connectors must attach
directly to stations, not to other segments of ThinWire. Ethernet coaxial cable.

•

A DESPR can be configured anywhere a DEMPR can be used (providing only one
port is needed).
185 m
MAXIMUM

T-CONNE~OR

TERMINATOR

~ 0.5 m ------1
r-MINIMUM~

UP TO 30 STATIONS
MKV88-1024

Figure 8

Standalone ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segment
185 m

...

DEMPR

MAXIMUM

~ffiE

I't:.

T -CONNECTOR

\.-

0.5 m

MINIMUM

TERMINATOR

UP TO 28 STATIONS
MKV88-1023

Figure 9

DEMPR ThinWire Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segment

6-12

6.4.2 Standalone DEMPR Configurations
Standalone DEMPR configurations are composed entirely of Thin Wire coaxial cable segments and a single
DEMPR multi port repeater.
Basic configuration rules:
•

One to eight Thin Wire cable segments can be attached to a DEMPR (see Figure 10).

•

The attached ThinWire cable segments must adhere to all rules described in Section 6.4.1. Note
that the DEMPR provides the grounding point for the segments and that the segments can have a
maximum of 29 stations.

•

A standalone DEMPR configuration can later be connected to a standard Ethernet using an
H4005 transceiver.

•

Cable segments must never be looped from one DEMPR port to another port on the same
DEMPR.

rMINIMUM
0.5 m -1

UP TO 29 STATIONS PER CABLE

MKV88-1021

Figure 10

Standalone DEMPR Configuration

6-13

6.4.3 Standalone Cascading DEMPR Configurations
Cascaded DEMPR configurations are composed entirely of ThinWire coaxial cable segments and up to
30 multiport repeaters.
Basic configuration rules:
•

There can be up to two DEMPR multiport repeaters between stations. Therefore, DEMPR
multi port repeaters can be cascaded on only one of the Thin Wire cables attached to a
DEMPR (see Figure 11). This cascading segment can contain up to 29 cascaded DEMPR
multiport repeaters. The cascaded DEMPR multiport repeaters are connected to the Thin Wire
cable segment using DESTA transceivers.

•

All ThinWire segments in a cascaded DEMPR LAN must adhere to the guidelines for ThinWire
segments given in Section 6.4.1. Note that the DEMPR multi port repeaters provide the grounding points for all segments and that each ThinWire segment in a cascaded DEMPR LAN is
limited to 29 stations.

•

Cascading DEMPR configurations can never be connected to a standard Ethernet LAN.

1
I

I DESTA I

0.5 m

MINIMUM ------.

I DESTA I
50 m MAXIMUM

UP TO 27 DESTA
STATION ADAPTERS •••
WITH DEMPR MULTIPORT
REPEATERS

DEMPR

J ••• I

DEMPR

J
MKV88-1022

Figure 11

Standalone Cascading DEMPR Configuration

6-14

6.5 COMBINED STANDARD/ThinWire ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS
ThinWire and standard Ethernet network components can be combined to create a combined standard/ThinWire LAN. Combined networks must adhere to both the rules that govern ThinWire networks
and the rules that govern standard networks. In addition, there are some rules that are specific to combined
networks. This section covers the configuration rules for the following networks:
•

Standalone DELNI/DEMPR configurations (see Section 6.5.1)

•

Connecting a DEMPR to a standard Ethernet coaxial cable segment (see Section 6.5.2)

•

Connecting a DELNI/DEMPR combination to a standard Ethernet coaxial cable segment
(see Section 6.5.3)

6.5.1 Standalone DELNI/DEMPR Configurations
Standalone DELNI/DEMPR configurations are composed entirely of a single DELNI and up to eight
DEMPR multi port repeaters (see Figure 12).
Basic configuration rules:
•

Up to eight DEMPR multi port repeaters can be connected to a standalone DELNI.

•

The DELNI must be in GLOBAL mode and it must have a special loopback connector
(DIGITAL PIN 12-22196-01) attached to the global transceiver connector.

•

Cascaded DEMPR multiport repeaters are not allowed; that is, no other DEMPR can be
attached to any of the 64 possible ThinWire segments.

•

Rules for the Thin Wire cable segments connected to the DEMPR multiport repeaters are the
same as those defined for a standalone DEMPR (see Section 6.4.2).

•

A DELNI/DEMPR combination can later be attached to a standard Ethernet coaxial cable
segment. If this is done, however, the standard Ethernet coaxial cable segment must meet the
guidelines given in Section 6.5.3.
50 m MAXIMUM

v----------------------------~/
,~--------------------------~
UP TO 29 STATIONS
PER DEMPR SEGMENT

Figure 12 . Standalone DELNI/DEMPR Configuration
6-15

LKG-0427

6.5.2 Connecting a DEMPR to a Standard Ethernet Segment
Basic configuration rules:
•

A DEMPR must be connected to a standard Ethernet coaxial cable using an H4000-BA or
H4005 transceiver (see Figure 13). When using an H4005, the transceiver cable must be an
IEEE 802.3-compliant transceiver cable (BNE3H/K/L/M or BNE4C/D).

•

Up to eight ThinWire cable segments can be attached to the DEMPR.

•

Cascaded DEMPR multiport repeaters are not allowed; that is, no other DEMPR can be
attached to any of the eight ThinWire segments.

•

All standard and ThinWire segments must adhere to rules given in Sections 6.3.4 and 6.4.2.

500m
MAXIMUM

50 m •
MAXIMUM

185m

MAXIMUM

0.5 m
MINIMUM

DEMPR

1-'

UP TO 29 STATIONS PER

ThinWire CABLE
MKV88-1018

Figure 13

Connecting a DEMPR to a Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable Segment

6-16

6.5.3 Connecting a DELNljDEMPR Combination to a Standard Ethernet Segment
Basic configuration rules:
•

The DELNI must be connected to the standard Ethernet cable using an H4000-BA or H4005
transceiver with heartbeat disabled. When using an H4005, the transceiver cable must be an
IEEE 802.3-compliant transceiver cable (BNE3H/K/L/M or BNE4C/D).
NOTE
When this configuration is used, none of the devices
attached to the DELNI receive. heartbeat. This may
cause the devices to report the lack of heartbeat as
error counters or error messages.

•

When a DELNI/DEMPR combination is used (see Figure 14), the standard Ethernet cable
segment to which it is attached must not exceed 300 meters (984.3 feet).

COMBINED LENGTH
MUST NOT EXCEED
45m
I

~------------------------~v~--------------------------~

UP TO 29 STATIONS
PER DEMPR SEGMENT
LKG-0429

Figure 14

•

Connecting a DELNI/DEMPR Combination to a Standard Ethernet Segment

When a DELNI/DEMPR combination is used, the total length of all transceiver cables between
the DELNI interconnect's transceiver and each DEMPR must not exceed 45 meters (147.6 feet).
[The DELNI consumes 5 meters (16.4 feet) of the usual cable allowance of 50 meters
(164.0 feet)]. Only low-loss transceiver cable should be used.

6-17

•

When a DELNI/DEMPR combination is used, DEREP repeaters may be connected to the same
standard Ethernet segment.

•

Up to eight DEMPR multiport repeaters can be attached to a DELNI that is connected to a
standard Ethernet coaxial cable.

•

One to eight ThinWire cables can be attached to each DEMPR.

•

Cascaded DEMPR multiport repeaters are not allowed; that is, no other DEMPR can be
attached to any of the 64 possible ThinWire segments.

•

All ThinWire and standard Ethernet segments must adhere to the rules in Sections 6.3.4 and
6.4.2 respectively.

6.6 EXTENDED LAN CONFIGURATIONS
Two or more ThinWire Ethernet LANs, standard Ethernet LANs, or combined ThinWire/standard
Ethernet LANs can be combined into an extended LAN by use of bridges. The configuration rules for the
following extended networks are given:
•

Extended networks with LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) bridges (see Section 6.6.1)

•

Extended networks with LAN Bridge 100/DEREP combinations (see Section 6.6.2)

•

Extended networks with Vitalink TransLAN bridges (see Section 6.6.3)

•

Extended networks with a METROWAVE (see Section 6.6.4)

It is important to note that bridges are designed to extend LANs transparently in terms of geographic
distance, number of supported stations, and capacity. Bridges are not designed to address the general
problem of building large, complex networks.

6.6.1 LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) Bridge Configurations
Basic configuration rules:
•

A local bridge joins two LANs by transmitting signals over connecting transceiver cables
(see Figure 15). The networks can be up to 100 meters apart (328 feet; the maximum length of
two transceiver cables).

•

A pair of remote bridges joins two LANs by transmitting signals over a combination of transceiver cables and a fiber-optic link (see Figure 16). The fiber-optic link can be up to 2000 meters
(6562 feet) long.

•

There can be up to seven bridges between stations. Each remote bridge counts as one bridge
(note that this rule differs from the rule for counting remote repeaters).

•

The total number of stations in the extended network must be limited to 8000.

•

Bridges can be placed in parallel for added availability. Bridges must be of the same type
(LAN Bridge 100 or TransLAN).

•

A bridge cannot be used when the two networks are already linked by a single DECnet router. If
the networks are linked by two or more intervening routers a bridge can be used.

6-18

LKG-0430

Figure 15

Extended Network with LAN Bridge 100 Local Bridges

FIBER-OPTIC LINK
UPTO 2000 m

FIBER-OPTIC LINK
UPT02000m

LKG-0431

Figure 16

Extended Network with LAN Bridge 100 Remote Bridges
6-19

6.6.2 Remote LAN Bridge tOO/Repeater Configurations
The remote bridge/repeater combination joins two LANs and amplifies the signal by transmitting over a
combination of transceiver cables and a fiber-optic link.
Basic configuration rules:
•

The extended network must adhere to all rules in Section 6.6.1.

•

The maximum length allowed for the bridge-to-repeater fiber-optic link is calculated by adding
500 meters (1640.5 feet) to the maximum fiber-optic link allowed for repeater-to-repeater links
(as described in Section 6.3.6).
For example, in Figure 17, there are two remote repeaters between stations A and B; therefore, as
described in Section 6.3.6, there can be a maximum fiber-optic link length of 1000 meters
(3281 feet) between them (X + Y = 1000). To transmit to bridge Bl, both of these stations must
transmit over one remote repeater (either X or Y) fiber-optic link and the bridge/repeater fiberoptic link (Z). To determine the maximum length allowed for Z, subtract the greater of X or Y
from the 1000 meters permitted for repeater fiber-optic links. Then add 500 meters to this value:
(1000-600)+500=900 meters, or 2952.9 feet.
When the bridge/repeater components are reversed (as done with bridge B2), the length permitted
for the fiber-optic link (W) increases to 1500 meters (4921.5 feet). This occurs because there is
no other fiber-optic link between the bridge and either of the stations (C and D) on the other side
of the repeater in the bridge/repeater combination. The lengths of X and Y remain at the
maximum allowed between stations.

" ............"' ,
........

NETWORK 2
:: ........
............
'::::':.

------

~~~;;;...;;.~----

NETWORK 1

500 m:::...~-:,...... "1000 m
AVAILABLE
FIBER

"
' \' \
\ \

NETWORK 3 \ \
I \
I

NO OTHER
FIBER OPTIC LINKS

'\
"
LKG-0432

Figure 17

Remote Bridge/Repeater Configuration
6-20

6.6.3 Vitalink TransLAN Bridges
A pair of Vitalink TransLAN bridges joins two LANs by transmitting signals over a combination of
transceiver cables and a terrestrial serial data link (see Figure 18).
Basic configuration rules:
•

There can be up to two serial data links between stations.

•

The serial data line's line speed must be a minimum of 56 Kbits/s.

•

The number of stations must be limited to 6000.

•

Bridges can be placed in parallel for added availability. Any parallel bridges must be of the same
type (LAN Bridge 100 or TransLAN). In addition, TransLAN bridges placed in parallel for
backup purposes must reside on the same physical LAN.

•

A bridge cannot be used when the two networks are already linked by a single DECnet router. If
the networks are linked by two or more intervening routers a bridge can be used.

•

Satellite links cannot be used to interconnect TransLAN bridges.

56 Kbits/s
SERIAL DATA LINES

""
MKV88·1017

Figure 18

TransLAN Bridge Extended Network Configuration

6-21

6.6.4 METROWAVE Configuration
A local bridge is connected to the Ethernet on one side and to a DEMWA (DIGITAL Ethernet Microwave
Adapter) on the other. The DEMWA connects to vendor-supplied microwave radio equipment and antennae.
The same configuration is mirrored at the other end of the link.

Figure 19 depicts the configuration and distance guidelines for the standard LAN Bridge 100, the fiber-optic
LAN Bridge 100, and the METROWAVE bridge in an extended baseband Ethernet LAN environment.
Basic configuration rules:
•

The maximum distance between transmit and receive controllers and the antenna is
304.8 m (1000 ft).

•

The maximum distance between controllers cannot exceed 4.5 miles including the cables connecting the controllers to the antennae.

•

The METROWAVE configuration counts as two bridges (one for each end).

•

Other guidelines as stated in Section 6.6.1 apply (if appropriate).

More information is available in the DEMWA option section of the Communications Options Minireference
Manual or in the METROWAVE Bridge Microwave Ethernet Link Sales Guide from CSS.

6-22

H4000

TERMINATOR

H4000

STANDARD
AND
FIBER-OPTIC
CONFIGURATIONS

FIBER-OPTIC
REPEATER

H4000

BASEBAND COAXIAL CABLE
FIBER
OPTIC
BRIDGE

-------_-----1

MICROWAVE LINK

METROWAVE
CONFIGURATION

ANTENNA

----=-ANTENNA

~--L-

__,~-----------<7240M

H4000

Figure 19

MKV88-1245

Extended Baseband LAN with METROWAVE Bridge

6-23

6.7 BROADBAND ETHERNET CONFIGURATIONS
Broadband networks can be single-cable (see Figure 20) or dual-cable (see Figure 21). In single-cable
networks, distances are measured from the network's headend, where the DEFTR frequency translator is
placed. There is no DEFTR on dual-cable networks; distances are measured from the point where the
inbound cable turns to become the outbound cable (this turning point is considered the headend).

Basic configuration rules:
•

Dual-cable broadband Ethernet systems use channels 2, 3, and 4 (54-72 MHz) for both transmission and reception. Single-cable systems use these same channels for transmission, but the
frequency translator sends the information back on channels 13, J, and K (210-228 MHz). The
frequency spectrums used by Ethernet cannot be shared with other services on the broadband
cable.

•

Digital Equipment Corporation must certify the broadband cable prior to network installation.
The certification process is described in the Broadband Ethernet Channel Specification.

•

The distance between any broadband transceiver and the cable's headend must not exceed
1900 meters (6233.9 feet).

•

The maximum distance between any two stations is 3900 meters (12,795.9 feet). This limit can
be reached if the network has at least two 1900-meter (6233.9-foot) branches.

•

Ethernet imposes no limits on the number of branches in a broadband network.

•

The maximum number of stations allowed is 1024.

•

Stations are connected to the broadband cable using DECOM transceivers and RG-6 drop cables.

•

The RG-6 drop cable from the broadband tap to the DECOM transceiver must not exceed
25 meters (82.0 feet).

•

Repeaters (DEREP, DESPR, and DEMPR) are not allowed on broadband networks.

•

Broadband networks can use either the LAN Bridge 100 or the Vitalink TransLAN Bridge to
connect to baseband Ethernets or to other broadband networks.

•

DELNI interconnect use on broadband networks follows the same rules described in
Section 6.3.5.

•

Broadband networks cannot be attached to a standard Satellite Equipment Room unless a bridge
is used in the SER.

6-24

3800m
1900m

BROADBAND SIGNAL
SPLITTER
BROADBAND COAXIAL CABLE

LKG-0323

Figure 20

Single-Cable Broadband Ethernet Configuration
MIDCABLE LOOP

BROADBAND SIGNAL
SPLITTERS

I
I

BROADBAND COAXIAL
CABLES

BROADBAND TAP

I~~~~~~~~

I
_______ dJ

16 __

DROP CABLES

:::; 25 m

35 m
MAXIMUM

1:~

DELNI

TRANSCEIVER

~ABL~

~~
1900 m
3800 m
LKG-0329

Figure 21

Dual-Cable Broadband Ethernet Configuration

6-25

Communications Options Minireference Manual
Volume 7 Ethernet Devices (Part 3)
EK-CMIV7-RM-005

READER'S COMMENTS
Your comments and suggestions will help us in our efforts to improve the quality of our publications.
1.

How did you use this manual? (Circle your response.)
(a) Installation
(b) Operation/use

(e) Training
(f) Other (Please specify.) _ _ _ _ _ _ __
No 0

Why?

Did the martual meet your needs? Yes 0

Please rate the manual on the following categories. (Circle your response.)
Excellent
Accuracy
Clarity
Completeness
Table of Contents, Index
Illustrations,· examples
Overall ease of use

5
5
5
5
5
5

Good
4
4
4
4
4
4

Fair
3
3
3
3
3
3

Poor
2
2
2
2
2
2

Unacceptable
1
1
1
1
1

What things did you like most about this manual'?

5_ What things did you like least about this manual'? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Please list and describe any errors you found in the manual.
Page

Description/Location of Error

Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____

Job Title,__________________

Street _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____

Company _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

City _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Department _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

State/Country _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Telephone Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Postal (ZIP) Code

Date

THANK YOU FOR YOUR COMMENTS AND SUGGESTIONS.
Please do not use this form to order manuals. Contact your representative at Digital Equipment Corporation
or (in the USA) call our DECdirect'M department atthis.toll-free number: 800-258-1710.
<0 1988 by Digital Equipment Corporation.

MKO

FOLD HERE AND TAPE. DO NOT STAPLE.

No Postage
Necessary
if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS

PERMIT NO. 33

MAYNARD.MA

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Educational Services/Quality Assurance
12 Crosby Drive BUO/E08
Bedford, MA 01730-1493
USA

1111"1"111"11"111111","11.1"11.1 •• 1111 ••• 1.11
FOLD HERE AND TAPE. DO NOT STAPLE.